YOUR

ELECTRO-VIBRATORY
BODY

A Study of the Life Force as E/ectro-vibratory Phenomena

VICTOR R BEASLEY, PH.D.

Volume One of the Six Volume series "The Supersensitive Life of Man".

GENERAL EDITOR

CHRISTOPHER HILLS, Ph.d, D. Se.,

UNIVERSITY OF THE TREES PRESS

P.O. Box 644

Boulder Creek, California 95006
YOUR ELECTRO-VIBRATORY BODY

Copyright © 1978 by University of the Trees Press.

All Rights Reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any

form or by any electronic or mechanical means including information
storage and retrieval systems without permission in writing from the
publisher, except by a reviewer who may quote brief passages in
review.

LIBRARY OF CONGRESS CATALOG CARD NUMBER :

ISBN 0-91643 8-15-5

SECOND EDITION: 77-085774

First Edition Copyright 1975.

Cover photographs and design by John Hills.

Printed in the United States of America

by Kingsport Press.

Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data

Beasley, Victor R, 1945-

your Electro-Vibratory Body.

(The Supersensitive Life of Man; v. 1)

Bibliography: p.
Includes index.
1. Consciousness. 2. Personality. I. Title.
11. Series.
BF311.B43 001.9 77-85774
ISBN 0 -916438-15-5

University of the Trees Press, Box 644, Boulder Creek. Ca. 95006
Volume One of the Six Volume series "The Supersensitive Life of Man".

INTRODUCTION TO THE.;;SECOND EDITION

It is now eight years since Dr. Beasley came to me in London

to embark on the course which led him to write this book. In that
time much has happened and still is happening in the whole field
of the vibratory body which cannot yet be documented due to
lack of time and lack of finances. Obviously no government
department or large foundation would think it safe to be risking
its name on this scientific borderline stuff called psychotronics,
Supersensonics or radionics. Hence grants are nonexistent and
only the sale of the books can help to defray the cost of
publishing further research. Even the first edition printed and
typeset in Barbados in a cramped, badly designed book without
a col or cover sold out on its content matter alone. It was used as
a textbook by many schools investigating new energies and
therefore we have redesigned the book with the able help of Dr.
Robert Massy to become a textbook which has been brought up
to date with recent researches in negative ions, wholistic healing
and biomagnetics.

Christopher Hills,

General Editor
May, 1978

iv
 INTRO DUCTION TO THE F IRST ED ITION

When Victor Beasley came to me in 1 970 and said that he

was thinking of getting a doctorate under a new program
which would enable him to choose his own field of inquiry,
he asked if I would help him to complete his thesis on
Nuclear Evolution. Inwardly I smiled because of the vastness
of the subject, but I nevertheless encouraged him to seek a
specific area of inquiry in that field, particularly as to how
the emanations of energy at different subtle levels, which are
often called auras, interact with the ability of humans to
communicate with each other. Since the world problems,
peace, political understanding as well as marital and social
understanding, all suffer from the inability of humans to
know from what level of consciousness they are speaking or
seeing, I felt it would be best if I gave Victor a few leads of
people to see, places to go, areas to look into and he would
soon be into the deep waters of our unknown selves. Since
those days he has rigorously limited his field to the graspable
evidence within the reach of anyone who would wish to
investigate and prove for themselves the truth of subtle forces.

To go beyond the immediate measuring devices of science

to a reality which can only be measured by developing new
conceptual comparative skills was a courageous decision
which would leave behind many people who would be
passing judgement on his work. The fact that these energies
are just as real, in spite of our scientific inability to measure
and understand them, can only be tested by those who are
prepared to venture into forbidden territory. The human
authorities which label all these " forbidden areas" are those
which may be afraid of discovering a different kind of Truth
from the one they already know. The ancient sages, through
direct perception, charted many of the kingdoms of nature
which science is slowly rediscovering.

The ancient yogis were both physicists and mathematicians,

but the discovery of consciousness dwarfed these disciplines
as it will again when man wakes up to his real nature.

V
 The seven-layered atom and the causal energies which
witness the material universe through the consciousness of
man was the study of great researchers who were not held
back by the need to publish and report findings, or to establish
credibility through name and fame . They raced so far ahead
of ordinary man's everyday experience to discover the life
force itself seated at the Center of the observer and witness
of creation. Man is a nucleus and the universe is its expansion
into seven thresholds of energy. Prana, or vital force of life,
is the cause of this expansion. It is often referred to as the
vital breath of the universe or " vayu " in Sanskrit. Prana
maintains the link between the manifest physical body and
the subtle worlds of the spirit. Prana is present in the uncon­
scious self during sleep as well as in the waking state. In its
expansion from the seed of Self-sense to awareness of the
seven worlds of Being, prana undergoes many modifications
as it passes through the seven chakras in man's psycho­
physical make up. During these modifications, however, it
never changes its true nature. Just as water can appear at
different energy levels to be a gas by the application of heat
energy and to be a solid in the form of ice through extraction
of heat energy and also as a liquid representing 90 percent of
the make up of our physical body, so can prana cause the
expansion and contraction of the normal operation of atoms
and molecules other than water in the human body.

This prana being under the control of consciousness in

advanced adepts and being under the unconscious control of
common folk, manifests whatever is in the ego of a person as
a reflection. If the prana is not flowing evenly through each
of the seven chakras the reflection will be warped and may
not even be visible on the outer limits of the seven thresholds.
We know in physics that every nucleus which is highly
energized has most of its orbits fllled with electrons. Man is
no different at the micro-energy level.

The macro-universe in which he exists as a reflection in his

own chakra activity and the energy of his consciousness is
limited or enhanced by the amount of prana which expands

vi
to the seven 'Worlds or contracts to the one physical world.
Or if only two orbits are filled with prana his Being will be
limited to a dualistic world of mind and matter. The
confusions of the thought world and the physical world
cannot be understood nor controlled without getting a
vantage point in other worlds of imagination, intuition, direct
perception, etc. , all of which are in turn subject to distortion
and modification by flow of prana through them.

The stilling of the flow of prana through these psycho­

physical centers of Being is as difficult as becoming an opera
singer or achieving excellence in other fields such as physics
or art. The reader of these five volumes on the " Supersensitive
Life of Man " , of which Victor Beasley 's is the first introduc­
tion, is encouraged to go step-by-step and persist to the end
even if the going may be intellectually or temperamentally
different. To persist until insight comes is the way of all the
creative seers and originators. Victor Beasley persisted in
personally following up all the leads he was given and now
you too may use his work to investigate deeper and further
into the Secrets of the Supersensitive Life.

Christopher Hills;
Boulder Creek
November, 1 974
General Editor

vii
 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

It is doubtful that an individual ever accomplishes anything

really alone. Even if one is without immediate, tangible
assistance on a particular undertaking, one is at least indebted
to all of one 's past experiences -- to parents, to relatives, to
friends, to enemies, to teachers, to acquaintances, to successes
and failures, to profundities and frivolities alike -- for having
conditioned one for the task of the moment. It has been said,
in fact, that if those of us who live today can see far, then it
is because we stand up on the shoulders of all the generations
of mankind who have preceded us: So it is with the present
work, for not only does it rest upon the shoulders of past
scientific and metaphysical achievements, but is also substan­
tially fortified by numerous contemporary inputs.

Many persons have given generously of their time and of

themselves that this volume might come into being. From the
very outset, the enthusiasm, encouragement, and criticism
received from various members of my Union Graduate
School Committee, named below, have been outstandingly
supportive :
Dr. Roy P. Fairfield Core Faculty
Acharya Christopher B . Hills, [Link]. Adjunct Faculty
11 11
Dr. Lloyd S .N. Kunar
11 11
Mr. Aurobindo J . Jani
Dr. Lee R. Steiner Student Peer
11 11
Dr. Zoltan Tarczy-Homoch
11 11
Dr. Joan Halifax-Grof

Credit for the conceptual direction taken by this work must

be shared with an advisor, one trained in both science and
metaphysics, but who prefers to remain anonymous.

Then there are the investigators whom I interviewed for this

project, and others whose counsel and instruction I sought on
particular topics ; they are listed in the bibliographic section

viii
of this work. In every instance, I was fortunate to have
received the patient and unselfish cooperation of these
persons, and without their willingness to share, this work
would not have been realized in its present form.

Over a period of nearly three years, the many stages of

typing, re-typing and correcting the original manuscript saw
the unstinting efforts, aye labors of love, of three lovely
persons: my wife Sonia, and my friends and colleagues Janet
Naidu and Barbara Taylor. I am further indebted to several
friends and associates for proofreading the many stages
through which this volume has passed and for otherwise
assisting in its preparation.

I extend an additional note of gratitude to my wife who

yielded to my inumerable hours of domestic truancy, thus
allowing me the freedom of unmolested time- without this,
this project could not have been undertaken.

Victor R. Beasley
Barbados, W.I.
August 23, 1974.
 PREFACE

What man does is inextricably conditioned by what man is.

The social affairs of mankind are a consequence, not an
antecedent, of man's existence as an entity of nature. Thus, it
would seem that a deeper appreciation of human social/
behavioral motivation is not possible without first gaining
fuller comprehension of how man is governed by those
natural forces to which he is subject as a creature within the
Universe's complex. Accordingly, a fundamental sentiment
which prompts the present work is that the motive forces
behind human social behavior are not fully understood or
dealt with, within the confines of many existing approaches.

The accounts presented in this volume are concerned with

the possible influence which certain radiational or 11 electro­
vibratory11 forces might exert upon human behavior. The
term " electro-vibratory11 is meant to have a generic applica­
tion. We might have substituted in its place the standard term
11 electromagnetism, 11 but electromagnetism, as understood by
science, refers only to a definite spectrum of what is probably
an infinite range of vibrations occurring in nature. Under the
circumstances, to identify as magnetic the varied forces
mentioned in this work, would perhaps be confusing - as
well as misleading - when judged by scientific criteria.
Hence, with an 11 electro-vibratory 11 concept, the attempt is to
reflect an identity which is thought to be common to the
different forces, all of whose promulgation is understood to
involve the vibration, oscillation or radiation of energy, and
whose composition, whether at physical or meta-physical
levels of inquiry, is thought to entail charged electrons or
similar particles.

This, then, is a wide interdisciplinary perspective, accom­

plished by a review of some of the accepted tenets of the
physical and biological sciences, together with the presentation
of original research findings as maintained by various investi­
gators in different fields. Also included are reports of
11 electro-vibratory11 phenomena from the areas of metaphysics

X
and clairvoyance, where the detection of possible socio­
behavioral causal factors presently lies outside the defined
boundaries of either the physical or the social sciences. A
more critical view, however, suggests that the line of demarca­
tion between the Physical and the Esoteric is really a
question of how keenly a particular researcher perceives the
phenomenon under his investigation.

Obviously, those radiational phenomena mentioned in this

volume by no means represent the totality of such forces
which could influence human behavior. And even for those
forces which are discussed here, vast areas of research and
understanding remain to be accomplished. Therefore, the
author, governed by the limitations of time, the accessibility
of source materials, and his own understanding, has confined
this inquiry to those areas herein presented.

Thus this work attempts to be an integrative one, as reflected

in the observation of Mr. William 0. Judge, Co-founder of the
Theosophical Society, that, " No science is complete which
leaves out any department of nature, whether visible or
invisible " ( 1 9, P. 1 ).

xi
 CO N T E N TS

Introduction to the Second Edition.............................. iv

Introduction to the First Edition................................ v
Acknowledgements.......................................... viii
Preface x
The Future of Supersensonics ................................. xv
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Supersensonics and the Law................................. xxv

PART I

T HEOR I ES AND IN VESTIG ATIONS OF

ELECTRO-MAGN ETIC PHENOMEN A 1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2 .

ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR MAGNETISM . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 . .

Creation of the Atomic Magnetic Field . . . . . . . . . . . .6

. .

Magnetic Moment and External Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 8

. . .

Atomic Precession . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 . .

Molecular Magnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1 1 .

A BIOCHEMICAL PERSPECTIVE 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Biochemical and Electrolytic Responses . 14 . . . . . . . . . . .

The Cell and Magnetism . . 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Magnetism and Enzymes . 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Healing Hands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
.

ELECTROBIODYNAMICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
. .

Frequency and Electromagnetic Spectrum . . . . . . . . 28

. .

Magnetic Field Composition . . . . . 4 • • • • • • • • • • • • • 33

• •

Resonance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
. .

Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . 36
. .

Biomagnetic Resonance .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
. .

Rapport . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 42
. .

The Magnetron . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 . .

Pest Control in Organic Farming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

. .

Communication. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Healing Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
East-West Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

xii
POLARITIES - NORTH AND SOUTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Polar Distinctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fundamental Rays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 63
Fundamental Ray Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
A New Look at the Earth's Polarities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Hills' Model of Magnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Medical/Biological Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
North-South Animal Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Somatic Polarities . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

GEOMAGNETISM AND BIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . .8 5

Geomagnetic Trends in Biological Evolution . . . . . . . . .86
Biological Sensitivity t o Geomagnetic Forces . . . . . . .9 1
.

Magnetism and Aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

AUTONOMIC NERVOUS SYSTEM AND MAGNETISM . . . . 1 03

Brain Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 04
Brain Rhythms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 09
Neural Stimulations Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 14

B IOCLIMATOLOGY AND IONOTHERAPY

The Effects of Air Ions . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1 7
Static Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 19
Alternating Fields . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 21
Spheric Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 22
Ions in the Environment . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Ions and Human Biology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 26
Ionizing Winds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 30
Human Weather Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Negative Ion Therapy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34
Sulman 's Ionization Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 39
Controlling Disease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 40
Alpha Waves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

SUMMARY AND DISCUSSION OF PART I . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 7

xiii
 PART 11
DIMENSIONS OF HUMAN BEHAVIORAL FIELDS
PHYSICAL AND META-PHYSICAL 161

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 1 62
SUBTLE ENERGIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... . . . . . . . . . . 1 65.

The L-Field . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .. . . . ..
. . .... . 1 66. . . .

Radionic Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....

. . . ... . . 1 72
. . . .

Radiesthesia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 79
. . . .

Massy 's Laws of Radiesthesia . ... . . . . . . . . . .

. . 18 1. . .

Supersensonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. 185
. . . . .

CHAKRA ENERGIES . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
. .

The Energies . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 92

. . .

Chakras and Associated Biological/Behavior Systems . 1 97

Tie-in Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
CHAKRA SOCIAL MANIFESTATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
The Chakras and Time Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Sacral Chakra . . .2 1 0
. . .

Spleen Chakra . . . . . . 2 1 0 Psychological Persona-

Solar Chakra . . . . . . . 2 1 1 lity Type s . . . . . . . 2 18 . .

Heart Chakra . . . . . 2 1 1. Sensation Type

. . . .219 . .

Throat Chakra . . . . 2 1 2 .Thinking Type . . .

. . 220 . .

Brow Chakra . . 212 .Feeling Type . . . . . . . 222

. . . .

Crown Chakra . . . . . . 2 1 3 Intuitive Type . . . . 223 . .

ESOTERIC ENERGIES OF GROUP PHENOMENA . . . . . . . . 227

A Scientific View of Group Phenomena . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Group Mind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Esoteric Radiations of Nations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
The Group Consciousness Experiment . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Creative Conflict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
SUMMARY DISCUSSION OF PART 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
APPENDIX: A PERSONAL PILGRIMAGE . . . . . . . . . ... . . 25 1
Written Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . 255
Interviews, Conversations and Correspondence . .. . . . 25 7
Works and Sources Cited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . 264
Tape Recorded Interviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . 266
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267-270

xiv
THE FUTURE OF SUPERSENSONICS

ADDITION TO THE SECOND EDITION

Dr. Victor Beasley is returning to the University of the Trees

where he will be establishing a department for the processing of
homeopathic remedies to develop new methods of diagnosing
for chiropractors and medical researchers investigating the new
fields of bioplasma, psychotronics, and the umbrella concept
which includes all of this, called "Supersensonics" by
Christopher Hills, founder of the University of the Trees.

The concept of homeopathy was developed by Dr. C. S.

Hahnemann, a medical genius who discovered the medical
equivalent of what is called in folk wisdom "the hair of the dog
that bit you". More scientifically speaking, this means that a
substance or tincture will cure or heal in homeopathic quantities
what causes the same condition in allopathic* quantities. In
plain language this means that what poisons you, for example
snake bite venom, can be so potentized that it can heal you of
snake bite. Another way of saying this is that if you get drunk
from too much alcohol or become an addict of Jamaican rum, a
very extraordinary weak homeopathic quantity of the same
alcohol could set you on the road to sobriety. The next step
obviously proceeds to the logical question of how much of the
original matter, or atoms or molecules of matter, are actually in
the homeopathic dose. Most people do not understand when
they take a homeopathic remedy that there is absolutely no
matter involved, because the quantities infused into the final
remedy are infinitesimally small, that they are smaller than
atoms themselves. This represents such a big hurdle for atomic

• Allopathy is the method of treating disease by the use of substances producing effects different
from those of the disease treated as opposed to Homeopathy which uses agents which produce
the same symptoms.

XV
physicists, who have found nothing smaller than atoms or parts
of atoms in nature, that they cannot believe it to be true, for it is
so staggering to man's imagination.

After studying Supersensonics with Dr. Hills, Dr. Beasley

went to England with the intention of becoming a homeopath
and naturopath after receiving his doctorate from the Union
Graduate School founded by Antioch College in Ohio. In
England he met up with Malcolm Rae, who had developed
radionic instruments which could potentize water or homeopa­
thic pills with the same vibration as an original homeopathic
substance merely by using a geometric pattern of angles
inscribed on a card and inserted in a radionic instument Dr.
Beasley practiced for one year before realizing that this was an
absolute proof of Christopher Hill's assertion that Supersen­
sonic energies could be communicated along the lines of ink on
paper or from any photo, symbol, or geometric pattern as
proclaimed in his book Supersensonics written three years
before, to which Dr. Beasley himself had written the introduc­
tion, not realizing he was an unwitting tool in the most mind­
blowing realization, that no matter whatsoever is required to
create the "hair of the dog" or the vibration of healing upon
which homeopathy works. Christopher Hills has �lways said
that homeopathy is useless unless you have the exact counter­
vibration of the situation you are attempting to cure and that the
difficulty of getting medical doctors generally to spend enough
time to figure out the tuning of this exact vibration is the reason
why homeopathy has never been popular among doctors who
must get through at least two patients an hour in order to support
their overheads for offices, equipment, nurses, technical
support, computer leases, etc., etc. Hence the principles of
homeopathy have been clouded by confusion, opposition,
deliberate condemnation and unwarranted skepticism.

Another major problem is in the preparation of remedies. In

the modem world, time is of the essence. Who has the time to
pound a remedy and vibrate it 10�000 times? Even after ten
.
xvz
your arm gets tired and even if you do it by machine, which has
been the case for the last fifty years, it still takes 10,000 times
five minutes to make a 10 M remedy; plus who can guarantee
that a profit conscious commercial fmn will not take short cuts
in an age where people are paid by the hour? Consequently there
are almost no homeopathic supply companies today that are
absolutely reliable. This is often the reason why scientists
cannot replicate the results of homeopathic doctors who, when
they have the exact counter-vibration in a remedy, are able to
get absolutely fantastic results. Nearly every expert homeopa­
thic doctor has been a total skeptic until he hit a case in which he
discovered the exact correct remedy in which a healing occured
if not within hours, within minutes. The whole difficulty so far
has been to get the exact remedy, and this has caused
homeopathy to fall into disrepute.

Now modem science, with computers and crystal ball technol­

ogy, is able to amplify very small potentials which far outdo the
dreams of Dr. Hahnemann and make him seem like a pigmy
compared to the exact resonances which can be achieved by
modem science. Undoubtedly, homeopathy as conceived by
Dr. Hahnemann is primitive, but it was an original insight like
Newton's theory of gravity. But even Newton's theory needed
an Einstein to come along 200 years later to link light and
gravity into such minute, exact calculations that man could
predict the bending of light rays as they flew past the sun from
different stars, as proved in 1917. Now, in 1977, exactly sixty
years later, a prediction made by the originator of Supersen­
sonics, Christopher Hills, has been proved true by Malcolm
Rae's equipment, tested over four years by 2,000 practitioners,
that the geometric patterns predicted by Christopher Hills
actually do influence atomic ionization which in turn influences
the human body, the human emotions, the human mind and
even the human spirit on different levels of function.

xvii
 Who knows whether this is not what Christ himself was talking
about and the very means by which he established such
powerful resonances with an afflicted condition at the spiritual
level that instant healings became possible with certain people
who were open to receive it? This principle of super sonic
resonance on different levels of vibration is very well estalr
lished in music, in atomic physics and in chemistry, but it had
not been established at the spiritual level of being until
Christopher Hills wrote his theory of Nuclear Evolution in
1968 and expanded it ten years later with his book on the
discovery of the rainbow body. For the reader to get some
inkling of what the new science of Supersensonics means in
terms of vibration perceived and absorbed by the unconscious
mind of a human being and to understand the profound effects
obtainable by exact resonances and patterns and energies, a
researcher would have to study not only the book Supersen­
sonics, written in 1975, but also the / Ching and its links with
rotating systems such as a biologically operated pendulum
which is merely the externalization of the internal tension
existing within a human being. These mental tensions are the
basis of homeopathy and the Chinese/ Ching. They both utilize
values which phase into the probability of vibrational compata­
bility with each person who exists in life in a specific situation at
a specific time.

Compatibility with this situation or being out of tune with it

creates the harmony or disharmony in the living organisms we
call" cells". When they are ill at ease we have a situation called
dis-ease.

The failure of homeopathy to spread as a science and lack of

interest from the public in the homeopathic laws of similars,
scientifically referred to as the laws of resonance, can be
attributed to the public disbelief that such small quantities of

xviii
matter can influence the psyche of a person. Sir James Jeans
described the physical universe as more like the expression of a
great mind than like a material thing. If only he had known of
homeopathy, radionics, psychotronics and ultimately Super­
sensonics, he would be able to dance on his own grave, instead
of turning in it at the route modem physics has taken. Likewise,
Albert Einstein must have turned in his grave many times over
the mental gymnastics and verbal ingenuity of quantum
physicists who caused him to say that God does not play dice
with the universe. His words may now be justified in the ready
acceptance of the entities known as black holes and white holes
which he called the ONE and which modem quantum
, physicists call a singularity. We should mention that this
singularity which the quantum physicists talk about dissolves
the whole dance of particles and their probability into one
cosmic egg yolk called a plasma. The density of this plasma at
the beginning of time at the birth of the universe we live in may
be likened to a homeopathic solution, beginning with the first
essence or substance or tincture of the oliginal nucleus. The
,subsequent expansion of the universe can be likened to the
successive subsequent succussions, triturations, dilutions and
vibrations with the thinning out of this original nucleus in the
form of plasma which becomes matter through being attenuated
or diluted throughout the,whole of space. To get an idea which
is beyond any imagination of how much physical matter is
smeared out through the whole of space through the big bang,
[sometimes called an implosion, depending whether you believe
the universe is expanding or contracting ] a scientist merely has
to look at the way the resonance of a homeopathic remedy is
established with the disharmony it is designed to cure or the
situation it is meant to phase in with.

To give the reader an idea of how much matter there is in a

homeopathic remedy, perhaps we should begin with the James
Jeans idea of the number of electrons in one's little toe. If we

.
XlX
mathematically calculated the number of electrons in one's little
toe and imagine each one blown up to the size of a grain of sand,
then there would be enough electrons to bury the;earth four feet
deep in sand over its entire surface. This calculation may give a
useful analogy to convey the size of an electron but it does
nothing to convey the amount of matter in a homeopathic
remedy. Mathematically speaking, �very time a homeopathic
tincture or essence is potentized or vibrated, two naughts are
added, .so that even in the preparation of a low potency 6X
remedy, one has already diluted the substance·· by
1 , 000, 000, 000, 000 parts .. This means that if one has a
single physical atom, a· homeopathic atom is one · thousand i
billion times as small in the potency of 6X. Atomic physics;
however, merely declares that an electron is 1 835 times smaller
than a proton and therefore compared to a thousand billion
times small, the electron is a huge universe, even though the
electrons in our little toe would cover the earth four feet deep in
sand if each one were blown UP. to the size of a grain of sand Let
us now give an example and look at a homeopathic substance
made from the tincture which we would ·call silver chloride
which is a light sensitive crystal which we use on every negative
and positive when we take a photograph. These tiny crystals,
present in the negatives and positives which we use every day .in_
our cameras, record the sensitive action of light on matter. If we
were to potentize silver chloride homeopathically, the following
process mixing 99 parts of alcohol with 1 part of silver chloride
would take place: one molecule ofsilver chloride, made up of an
atom of silver and an atom of chlorine ( AgCl) is mixed with 99
parts of alcohol and vibrated between triturations, meaning that
the number of naughts that are added between each dilution is
two. Thus in the table below, the tincture diluted with 99 parts of
alcohol= 1 X. The above substance 1 X diluted with 99 parts of
alcohol = 2X, adding two naughts to the previous two naughts,
making four naughts or 1 0, 000 parts in [Link]. The

XX
following is listed for convenience of our visua).ising the actual
process of dilution:

Tincture + 99 parts of alcohol= 1X add two naughts 00

1X + 99 parts of alcohol = 2X add two naughts 0000
2X + 99 parts of alcohol = 3X add two naughts 000000
3X + 99 parts of alcohol = 4X add two naughts 00000000
4X + 99 parts of alcohol = 5X add two naughts 0000000000
5X +99 parts of alcohol = 6X add two naughts 000000000000

xxi
adding twelve naughts to the original physical substance
potentised We can see from the above that any homeopathic
substance of6X is infmitely smaller than the 1835th part of an
atom or an electron, since it is smaller by 8 decimal places.
The homeopathic atom is therefore 1000 billionths smaller than
a physical [Link] scientist has ever discovered a particle that
small and probably never [Link] progress further beyond the
realm of fantasy may we say that 6X is a low potency in
homeopathic treatment or "Supersensonic" terms, since the
potency can be increased with every number from6X by adding
two naughts-to 7 X, 8X, 9 X ...12X, [Link] we come to
10M which is 10,000 such operations presuming, of course,
that modem pharmacists have the patience to sit on their
bottoms and vibrate anything 10,000 times merely to add more
naughts to a non-existent [Link] it is very difficult to get
even homeopathicfanatics to do this without taking [Link]
you have ever signed 100 travellers checks you will know what I
am talking about To get the picture of the physical limitation of
what we are talking about, sit down now and sign your name
every second for 1000 times, and if you are not bored continue
signing for 10,000 [Link] you will know what 10M really
is. The sages used to say that if you write out a mantrum
100,000 times and throw it each time in a river, the potency of
the mind would be sufficient to bring about what you wrote.
Therefore 10M (10,000X)is a small potency compared to the
mental vibration of a mantrum done 100,000 times.

Christopher Hills once travelled to the site of the Bo tree

under which Buddha became enlightened, intending to meditate
[Link] the surrounding monastery he watched the Buddhist
monks practicing their traditional discipline of 100,000 press­
ups or up and down vibrations in the form 9f physical
prostrations of the [Link] physical actions in the attempt to
get enlightened appeared to Hills to be mechanical and ineffec­
tive since each prostration was done at the same potency, unless

xxii
 there was in the act itself, some quantity which intensified the
human mind in a homeopathic manner making the physical
stimulus into a mental force. In meditating under the tree, he
had an unusual experience and heard in his Bodhi tree centre of
the brain the" Mega Nadam". It may not be without connection
that the spiritual forc�field generated at this particular spot by
hundreds of monks prostrating and each doing 100,000 press­
ups generated a forc�field resonant with spiritual levels of
. consciousness which ionised the cerebral-spinal fluids of the
brain and enabled him to hear this cosmic sound often referred
to by the ancient rishis as the cosmic sound or the" word" of the
universal ONE. The same internal experience of this sound was
referred to by Jesus when he was initiated by the cosmic one. In
Matthew: 3, v. 17 this event was experienced by Christ as the
heavens opening up when he was baptised by John the Baptist,
which started him off on his messianic mission.

The potency of consciousness, rarified 100,000 times on the

spiritual level or intensified 100,000 times (depending on which
point you are looking from) is the starting point of .Nuclear
Evolution, the process which Christopher Hills describes as a
black hole or a white hole in consciousness. This is the nuclear
self in which a seed thought can be placed in the white hot
intensity of one's ultimate total cosmic connection. It was on the
. possibility of manifesting this through the science of Supersen­
sonics that the new discoveries of geometric patterns which
could potentise ordinary water and homeopathic sugar pills
without any material substance convinced Dr. Victor Beasley
to leave his studies of anatomy, naturopathy, manipulations of
bones and muscles, diet, etc. to undertake the development of a
special healing department of the University of the Trees. His
intention is to bring the devices and instruments of Supersen­
sonics frrst to the leading vanguard of naturopathic doctors,
chiropractors, wholistic healers, and new generation of medical
homeopathic doctors and ultimately, through them, to the

xxiii
general public in the crystal ball technology which utilises
computers to use the/ Ching and tap the powers of the mind and
modem theories of probability, through establishing resonance
with the patterns in nature with which our subconscious mind
programs our body and our brain. The book you are about to
read in its second printing was written before Dr. Beasley' s
return to develop his department at the University of the Trees
and was published as Volume I of a whole series of books which
set out the background researches for practitioners of Supersen­
sonics by Christopher Hills and his students at the University of
the Trees. Therefore this book is being republished and
expanded with the able assistance of Dr. Robert Massy, PhD.,
who, working as a physicist, has updated and revised the
original edition to conform with the latest theories and modem
speculations. This addition to the second edition is written with
the knowledge that within the next few years Supersensonics
and Nuclear Evolution will become entirely validated by
computers, physics and psychology. The instruments which
will enable the general public to participate in this validation are
already being developed at the University of the Trees and a
detailed catalog of tools and research, at a small cost to cover
printing, postage and handling, are available to anyone who
wishes to participate.

The Publishers

.
XXlV
 Publisher's Note

SUPERSENSONICS AND THE LAW

Instructions on the setting up

of a healing practice

The words Psychotronics, Radionics and Radiesthesia mean nothing to those who are
not familiar with the vast amount of research done in recent years on the rational
explanation of the operation of mental forces. Supersensonics, which is an umbrella
term coined by Christopher Hills to include all types of human biological sensitivity to
radiations of all kinds, deals with the spiritual and mental faculties which sense and
report nonphysical signals to the brain from any source, whether living, inert or divine.
For centuries special examples of their sensitivity have been known, as water divining,
the homing instinct of pigeons and as direction-fmding of mosquitoes and butterflies.
However, it is not well known that throughout nature, from the sensitive skin of the
amoeba to the affinity of one atom for another, the subtle radiations between objects and
organisms can be detected with the instruments of Supersensonics and Psychotronics.
The question naturally follows - how can these be used to help people who are sick, both
mentally and physically without running afoul of the law which restricts all healing and
diagnosis to people who are qualified in the medical professions? The answer is simple.
We must not pretend that our fledgling new science is in any way dealing with the
normal methods of healing and at the same time try to prevent exploitation of sick
people by those who could use these new tools for fraud It is not for us to judge whether
the medical profession itself is riddled with fraud and exploitation of medical ignorance
or to say whether wholistic medicine is the better. Each person must think for himself.

The health divining methods of Supersensonics use instruments which enable a

doctor, homeopath* or a natural healer to detect the most favorable remedy and
treatment for optimum health. Under the California law a homeopath or wholistic
practitioner must practice under certain conditions. Clients of healers must be informed
if the operator is not a physician and the healers must not provide services that the legal
statutes reserve only to physicians. A licensed medical practice providing medical
service is recognized in law as the diagnosis or treatment of disease, ailment , injury or
pathological conditions. Therefore "Supersensonic" equipment for diagnosis can only
be used on other people by licensed doctors as an aid in their medical diagnosis and not
as their sole means of treatment. For nonmedical people to use the equipment legally it

*Homeopathy- a concept developed by Dr. C. S. Hahnemann who discovered the medical equivalent of
what is called in folk wisdom "the hair of the dog that bit you". Scientifically speaking this means that a
substance or tincture will cure or heal in homeopathic quantities the condition it causes in allopathic
quantities.

XXV
must be used as a detector of correct health patterns rather than used to detect disease or
ailments. Furthermore, people setting up a wholistic healing service with Supersen­
sonic equipment must make legal agreements with their clients and define how their role
is distinct from medical doctors and how it is a health practice.

Such an agreement recognizes the possibility of a health service that is basically

different from a medical practice. It accepts the use of the contract as a viable way that
the consenting parties can clarify their roles and responsibilities under the law and
establish a relatioJlship of healer and client

A practitioner utilizing a "wholistic" or "natural" approach with the Supersensonic

health divining methods cannot use the reductionist methodology that diagnoses or
treats disease. Thus the question of legality for nonlicensed health practitioners is not
dependent on the method they use. Whether the detection by Supersensonic divining
methods is truly wholistic or still diagnostic or reductionist is dependent upon the way
providers of health do their method. The difference between medical methods of
diagnosis and the natural biofeedback instrument of Supersensonics arises out of their
different usage of human faculties as follows:
1. Supersensonics method uses the unconscious mind to detect psychic physical
energies and to get a neurophysical response through divining the real causes. It
also uses the ability of the nervous system to detect the vibrational patterns of
suitable remedies. This is used together with the rational faculty to check out
results by using empirical methods and experiments in order to arrive at the
wholistic method.
2. The reductionist method uses only logical analysis and experiment and treats a
particular effect with a specific countereffect without regard to the whole.
Healers using the Supersensonic instruments should clearly understand the
difference if they wish to practice a health service.
The reductionist method is to understand whole systems by observing the actions of
their parts. Modem medical practice uses this approach and its treatments are based on
diagnosis which is defined as" the recognition of disease from its symptoms". Wholistic
methods do not necessarily carefully define a specific disease condition. Instead they
try to nurture a person's own natural healing powers so that they can set psychophysical
forces in motion which enable him to heal himself no matter what specific disease a
person is said to have. The wholistic approach is to deal with"Medicine for the whole
person" and not for the parts. Therefore a wholistic health service offers individualized
treatment that will build the individual's own natural constitution so that healing forces
can deal with the manifested conditions that are caus,ing the health problem.

All this has been tested in the California courts in the case ofDana Ullman versus the
State. Dana was arrested for practicing medicine without a license. The Oakland­
Piedmont Municipal Court judge and the District Attorney agreed to a settlement
offered by Ullman's attorney that allows his homeopathic practice under the above

xxvi
described conditions of the statutory laws. Following the dismissal of Ullman's case,
the press gave the mistaken impression to the public that a precedent had been set for
recognizing the legality of wholistic practices. The local medical society expressed
concern to the Oakland-Piedmont district attorney's office, which tried to back out of
the dismissal agreement and advised Ullman's attorney that it would refile charges if the
Medical Board brought a new case on the same facts. It is important for practitioners to
understand the implications of this case if they are dealing with wholistic health
practices and giving service to others. Of course there is no law which can prevent any
one from treating himself by any method he sees fit, but healing others and diagnosis of
others' illness is not permitted except by licensed doctors. Furthermore the Ullman
case, as a question of setting a precedent, is in no way binding on other courts. This case
may be considered in deciding future cases where the practitioner and the client
considered defining their relationship by means of specific agreement.

The Ullman case simply recognized that a nonmedical health practice could be
defined by a contract. On October 11th, 1977 an official of the fraud division testified
before the State Assembly Health Committee about the potential for "consumer
exploitation" in the wholistic health field Officials have been particularly vigilant
concerning radionic instruments which simulate or appear to work like electronic
instruments but which have no scientifically recognizable healing energy in their
circuits.

The circuits and diagrams of Supersensonics do not claim to use electronic energies
and the principles are clearly set out in the 608- page book Supersensonics published in
1975, now being used by several medical doctors as well as wholistic healers as an aid in
their healing practice by nonreductionist methods. The problem with officials, medical
boards and health committees is that there is an absence of verifiable st andards of
training, knowledge, education and skilL University of the Trees has set out to correct
this situation and offers courses and degrees in the study of the agent responsible for
wholistic healing-consciousness. It is authorized by the state to issue degrees after
satisfactory standards of training have been observed These standards are so high that
they are more than the usual university requirement. In this way Supersensonics will not
and cannot be dismissed by those uneducated in its practices and methods. These
methods have been set up as verifiable independently of the usual "authorities" which
c annot determine the validity of areas they know nothing about.

The Federal Trade Commission was recently petitioned requesting the regulation of
the "personal growth" industry, complaining that there were no valid standards by
which to objectively measure a given program. The petition asked the State Health
Committee to consider licensing and certifying of practitioners. The University of the
Trees welcomes this approach in an area where there is little background material or
experience of Supersensonic energies among medical people, officials of State Boards

. .

XXVll
and universities generally. The University of the Trees Press endeavors to publish basic
works and reference texts on methods of practice and the scientific investigation of
wholistic energies. It agrees that the field is wide open for deception and consumer
exploitation and therefore invites all objective criticism and success with Supersensonic
instruments to be reported for publication, so that authorities have something more to go
on than their own prejudices or narrow specialist fields which have no knowledge of
consciousness research or any of the parameters of divining practices. The empirical
observation and testing of experiences and seeing that a thing works must also be
buttressed with the rational tradition of logical analysis and explanation of phenomena
In modem science today the two systems of acquiring knowledge are often opposing
each other. One says, "I know it works but I don't know how it works," and the other
traditionalists say "It must be consistent with what we have proved already."

Supersensonics attempts to provide a body of knowledge at every level of skillful

validation, so that people can test the result for themselves and are not dependent on
experts. Supersensonic skills are available to anyone just as consciousness is available
to everyone. However, people use their consciousness differently and often with
different quality of skills and it is this we attempt to validate, not the knowledge itself or
the method of acquiring the knowledge. It recognizes many ways of acquiring
knowledge in unorthodox ways and gives mankind a second way of validating its
authenticity. Hence Supersensonics is even more scientific than current concepts of
objectivitY and we publicly repudiate ·those limited reductionist methods which are
claimed to be absolutely objective, when they are not Many have proved to be based on
false assumptions about health, nature and the workings of the human mind

Supersensonics would welcome a test case in any court as to the efficacy of divining
methods, where we can bring hundreds of witnesses to prove that it works, along with
our own rational tests and theories as to how it works. We can also explain why it
sometimes does not work, just as a scientific medicine in some cases does not work
either.
People who set up a health practice should be prepared to stand up to the authorities
and the courts to defend the practice of wholistic remedies and results, but they should
not make excessive claims and then expect sympathy from those who consider all the
forces in society as a whole. If we are truly wholistic we must understand the reasoning
of medical doctors and their well-meaning opposition to unqualified, and(in their eyes)
untested practices. We must document our successes and show that we are capable of
reasoning. We must understand that our laws governing the health profession are
written by rationalists and not related to empirical criteria These laws do not apply to
wholistic practices but since our social attitudes are also governed by rationalist
thinking, wholistic methods such as Supersensonics are presumed by officials and
doctors to be an alternative form of treatment for pathological conditions and therefore
are seen as requiring licenses according to existing statutes. This kind of thinking is a

xxviii
misapplication of rationalist methodology because a wholistic method, though it can be
validated, cannot be clearly defined by laws or authorities.

Unless wholistic practitioners take action to define and document their own work the
danger is that medical judgments and rationalizations will judge it for them, and these
authorities will be allowed to govern the growth and development of the wholistic
professions.

The primary vehicle for making a new conceptual framework for health services and
health practices is the obtaining of degrees of excellence in the publication of knowledge
of the skills involved and in the making of private agreements and contracts regarding
those skills. The University of the Trees is one of the first institutions to offer degrees in
this wide-open field of human enquiry which incorporates both religion and science,
philosophy and practice. Its main textbooks are Supersensonics and Nuclear
Evolution: Discovery of the Rainbow Body. These texts provide enough background
evidence for you to become a wholistic healer providing you follow the legal practice
outlined above in some form of contract

The use of Supersensonic equipment for divining the homeopathic potency of

remedies and for potentizing these remedies is perfectly legal in healing ourself and if
there is no pretense to practice medicine as defined within the law, is also perfectly legal
for helping others. Its use in treatment of crops is now being researched and if all
psychotronic instruments can be offered as research tools rather than as substitutes for
the established traditional professions there can then be no question of fraud or
deception especially if all health relationships are based upon contracts which defme
the roles and responsibilites of each party.

Finally we can assert that all the wholistic health movements encourage people to be
responsible for their own health. Yet this does not mean that people should only try to
heal themselves and avoid going to a health practitioner. It means more clearly that
people should look within for the cause and into all the ways they can help themselves. It
means they should go to a health practitioner to help them help themselves. In this way
Supersensonics works as an aid to the practitioner and does not clrum to be any better
than the operator. This is true of any other equipment from a computer to a motor car.

These instructions to doctors, homeopaths and chiropractors and lay people desiring
to set up a healing practice are given so that you can know the law in respect to these
nontraditional methods.

We are working with many people to set up psychotronic shops and distributorships
for our tools and instruments and can supply an entire range of books and stock on a
franchise basis. We also offer our franchise distributors our full range on a returnable
basis should they find that they get stuck with inventory.

XXlX
 PART I
THEORIE S AND INVESTIGATIONS OF
ELECTRO- MAGNETIC PHENOMENA

"A nd the vast reaches of celestial space stretched

out in infinite blackness. No thing was about. Even
the embryonic primordial gases adumbrating the
adven t of earth, had not yet coalesced. And the
inhabitants of the earth -- consciousness ranging
from mineral to man -- were yet mere shadows of
a fu ture far distan t.

Then after eons of n urturing evolution, millenia of

living creations spawned, condensed, and bound
together by cosmic forces - homo-sapiens evolved.
Now atom, man, and planet all obedien tly adhered
to the myriad manifestations of magnetism playing
upon and throughout the still fledgling globe.
From outside man himself into his innermost core,
came vital vibratory instructions - to sleep - to
breathe - to savor h is surroundings in many
wonderful ways. Ever so sub tly and sub-consciously
was the reluctan t homo-sapiens prodded along an
evolutionary path towards something even grander
than himself. "

( V. R. B. )
INTRODUCTION The physical dimension of the human body is a mass of
atomic substance, intricately designed and regulated, delicate­
ly balanced with environmental forces, and receiving its
ultimate animation from sources yet beyond full scientific
scrutiny.

Part 1 is, to a large extent, reflective of the approach used

throughout this work, which is more eclectic than compre­
hensive. The present section is partly a review of generally
accepted scientific knowledge regarding magnetism, as under­
stood by the fields of chemistry, physics, and biology ; it also
deals with selected experimental and theoretical findings
associated with certain electro-vibratory systems which,
apparently, can alter and/or govern behavior patterns in
biological systems, particularly man 's.

The writer does not make the claim that everything presented
on the following pages is unequivocally accurate and should,
therefore, be accepted without proper analysis. To the
contrary, inconsistencies between the works of different
researchers, and fallacy of interpretation can occur. And it is
thus in the interest of scientific decorum that the reader is
reminded that there are presented some research findings
which have been reported by only one investigator, which
have not been repeated, nor received the general approbation
of the scientific community.

Nevertheless, deviations from the scientific norm may, in

fact, be a prelude to redefming the known boundaries of
scientific inquiry. In any event, the contents of the succeed­
ing pages are offered as objectively as possible, within the
spirit of the perennial human quest towards fuller compre­
hension of nature's forces.

2
3
ATOMIC AND M OLECULAR
MAGNETI S M
ATO MIC AND MOLECULAR MAGNETISM

I l'" s
I
I
I
I
I
I

S sum of the spins L total orbital momentum

J total angu l ar momentum }Js total spin magnetic moment
}!_L total orbital magnetic moment jJJ total magnetic moment
HT resultant magnetic field

5
CREATION OF THE ATOMIC All forms of matter have atoms as basic building units, and
MAGNETIC FIELD there are at least 92 kinds of atoms which naturally occur in
nature. The essential composition of an atom is : a positively
charged nucleus, containing protons and neutrons, and
negatively charged electrons, orbiting the nucleus. Funda­
-e
mental to the generation of atomic magnetism is the orbital
movement of negatively charged electrons around a positively
charged nucleus. The relative movement of dissimilar charges
constitutes a flow of electrical currents, which, in turn,
produces a magnetic field. Electricity and magnetism are very
closely related. In fact, they seem to be different aspects of a
single phenomenon - hence the terms, "Electromagnetism " .
Magnetism, then, becomes a corollary to the movement of
charges, wherever such movement occurs. The magnetic field
itself is often described as a field of influence, (attractive or
repelling), surrounding the flow of electricity, such that if the
field were diagrammed , . it would be seen •surrounding the
current flow and at right angles to it.

---\
..... ... �'
I
,
.....
.. ... .... '
- - ... . - �-

THE MAGNETIC FIELD

6
 Thus, it is seen that electron movement around the nucleus
produces electrical flow, which, in turn, produces magnetism.
But this is only one source of magnetism in the atom.

In addition to their orbital movement, the electrons also spin

on their axis, thereby creating yet another magnetic field .
And to a lesser extent, the protons and neutrons inside the
An electron moving in a circular orbit is equivalent to a
nucleus have an intrinsic rotation which results in giving the
circular loop ofwire with the current flowing in the oppo­
site direction to the electron.
nucleus . a certain magnetism, although it is considerably
smaller in strength than that created by the electron move­
ment.* It is the combination of all these internal properties
that give the atom its overall magnetic moment.

A spinning electron. Any small piece of the electron moves

in a circular orbit and produces a magnetic field like a
current flowing in a circular loop.

* l t h as been shown that the magnetic moment of the n ucleus of an

atom is about 2,000 times weaker than that of the whole atom. (6) .

7
MAGNETIC MOMENT & In physics, the term "Magnetic Moment" is used to identify
EXTERNAL FIELDS the presence of a magnetic field associated with a given body,
and to refer to the strength and direction of that magnetic
field. When applied to the atom, magnetic moment relates to
the overall character of the magnetic field of the atom. The
atom 's magnetic moment results primarily from the combina­
result'lnt tion of the orbital and spin movements of the electrons. If,
however, the orbital and spin movements are viewed separate­
ly, each is seen to have a magnetic moment as distinct from
the other, though it is the vector sum of their respective
fields that give the atom its overall magnetic character.
Arising out of this interaction between orbital and spin
magnetic moments is what is called the ' 'spin-orbital coupling "
( 1 , P. l 6). This relates to an internal splitting of energy levels
and further contributes to the internal cohesion of the atoms'
structure. It is worthwhile to note that virtually all atoms
comprising matter - whether organic or inert - are consi­
dered to have a magnetic moment. Any system or body
which is the source of a magnetic field is said to have a
magnetic moment. Obviously, the magnetic field inherent in
the atom and created by its own natural motion does not
exist by itself in isolation from other external fields. Not
infrequently, an atom is exposed to magnetic fields stronger
than its own. If an external magnetic field of a strength
considerably greater than that of the atom's internal field is
applied the result is to destroy the spin-orbital coupling
mentioned above . In this instance, the dominant effect would
become that of the stronger external field. The exact external
field strength necessary to destroy the spin-orbital coupling
seems to vary, depending on which element of matter is being
acted upon. The inference drawn from the interaction of the
atom's spin-orbital coupling with an external magnetic field is
that under such conditions an alteration in the normal energy
level of atoms (and of molecules) occurs, and that in certain
instances this can lead to a considerable modification of
established atomic and molecular processes ( 1 , P. 1 6) .
 Dr. Madeline F. Barnothy indicates that external magnetic
fields can affect the nuclei of atoms. She points out that a
field external to the atom may affect the spin orientation of
protons within the nucleus. Such an external field can have
the effect of accelerating or retarding proton activity ( 1 , P. 83).

ATOMIC PRECESSION Two other concepts merit review within the present context
of external magnetic field influence upon atoms. They are :
"Precession and resonance, " and are seen to bear an intrinsic,
Appl ied even causal relationship to each other. Precession is said to
Magnetic F ield
occur when an applied magnetic field acts upon the magnetic
field of the electron, (or upon the magnetic field of any
body), altering the direction of movement of the field belong­
ing to the electron. The usual result is to give the electron's
field a kind of conical motion around the applied field.
Thus, the field of the electron is said to precess around
the applied field. Precession occurs with the spin as well
as the orbital motion of the electron. There is also precession
associated with the nucleus. With the various precessional
effects of an applied field upon an atom, the result is a
complicated relationship between competing forces : the
applied field, the spin and orbital fields of the electrons, and
the nucleus. These interactions are further complicated by the
many billions of atoms when matter is considered in bulk.

Full Vector Model

of Precession

The magnetic fiel d of a bar m agnet

showing only five spi n n i n g electrons.

9
 The rate of precession will vary, depending on the character­
istics of both the applied magnetic field and the subject
magnetic field . A varying applied magnetic field means that
the rate of precession will also vary. It turns out that the
earth's magnetic field (discussed in later pages) gives rise to
precession in all atoms comprising all matter upon the surface
of the earth. Thus, the picture that emerges is one of preces­
sion as the norm for all atoms, a stable condition for all, .
terrestrial matter, under the constant influence of the earth's
magnetic field.
Precession of the earth.

The motion of the atom with its nucleus and orbiting

and spinning electrons precessing around a magnetic field is
repeated in nature on the macroscopic scale in the solar
system with its orbiting of spinning planets all precessing as
part of the Milky Way around some variable point in space.
Micro and macro mirror each other.

Summer
(June 21)
s Fall
(Sept. 22)

Resonance in an atom occurs when the frequency of

precession of the field of the nucleus is the same as the
frequency of the applied field . This is referred to as " nucleus
magnetic resonance. " In addition to n uclear resonance,
electron resonance can also o ccur if the external field
frequency matches that of the atom 's electrons. It is under
the condition of resonance that the combined , interacting
effect of the magnetic fields is at maximum.

10
 MOLECULAR Physicists tell us that in probing the mysteries of matter,
MAGNETISM each level, e . g. atomic, molecular, and so on, has its own set
of laws, which may differ little or greatly from the other
levels. Nevertheless, patterns and principles established at one
level are frequently found to have an analogous carry-over to
other levels of investigation. So it is with the laws governing
the creation of magnetic fields. The fundamental principles
are established at the atomic level, thereafter, at the molecu­
lar level one has to consider the way in which atoms combine
to produce a particular substance. With the atom, the overall
magnetism depends on how the internal magnetism of the
atom's nucleus links up with the orbiting and spin magnetic
field of the electrons. With matter in bulk, it is the total
vector sum of various atom groupings which determines the
final character of molecular magnetism (A) . * For example, in
the case of iron or cobalt, the atoms join together in such a
Phi l Al ien's concept of body
way that there is, in effect, no cancellation of the individual
polarities.
field of each atom, all fields combine to point in the same
direction, thus producing a substance extremely responsive to
magnetic influence. Phil Alien shows how the human body
functions as a giant electromagnet (45 , P. 62). The next
chapter explains the whys and hows.

/' � 1'./!� � _.:, � � �!'� � � � --7'

N
SCH E MATI C
� \7� ;:;�
s � ./"1 �
� �
�
� ""'-»
Ns � -+ --4> �
� -7 -? �

I ron i n successive stages magnetic field weak magnetic strong magnetic

of magnetism with at zero field � field �
arrows as domains.

ACT UAL

*The human organism, it has been estimated, consists of about

1 0 tri l l ion cel ls, in which there are nearly 1 0 bill ion miles of D N A, the
nucleo-protei n which plays a key role in the transmission of l ife codes.
Ol iver R eiser suggests that the two chains of the double helix D N A
molecule are o f opposite polarity. Th is polar affinity withi n an aqueous
medium is thought to aid in the stabilization of the overa l l molecu lar
structure (3, P.42o ). '

11
A BIOCHEMICAL
PERS PECTIVE
 A BIOCHEMICAL PER S PECTIVE

endoplasmic reticulum -------,���-#:..__..y.

(smooth)

endoplasmic reticulum --+--.....---- :-:::::-::---�

(rough)

nucleus --+--.....:..if­

nuclear envelope --+--'--.-11

secretory granules ----t-:n!t\-....::.._

...::: _:___�,...o
.,
.- .....--�
Golgi complex ---'t'N�,...- .. I<IM.\""'"='>-'' F

glycogen -----\lr�!t\-­

chloroplast -----;:'!Tn>;,....---{

The above diagram shows a generalized picture of a cel l with its many detailed cell
structures. For an exposition of new theories concerning the storage and transmission of
vital forces through the transduction of ATP and the electrical ionization of the
mitochondrion, read "Nuclear Evolution : Discovery of the Rainbow Body (Section 1 1 ) .

13
BIOCHEMICAL & If we consider the chemical composition of the human
ELECTROLYTIC body and some of its related processes, we get a closer view
RESPONSES of the magnetic processes operative at this level. The human
body consists of over 80% water. Water is universally
recognized to be particularly susceptible to magnetic
influence. The chemical explanation given for this is that
since the nucleus of the oxygen atom has no magnetic
I sotope Magnetic Moment
In
moment, and should therefore not respond to an external
Nuclear Magnetrons magnetic field, it is the single proton of the hydrogen's
H 1 Hydrogen 2.793
nucleus that is thought to be so amenable to magnetic fields,
Proton with the result that water can be easily polarized by an
H2 0.857 external magnetic force. Thus, under normal circumstances,
c1 3 0.702
Na 23 2.2 1 6
some of the hydrogen protons contained in the water within
Si 29 -o. 6 55 the human body might be expected to line up in the direc­
Cl 36 0.821 tion of the earth's magnetic field. Extet;tding this rationale ,
K 39 0.3 9 1
1 1 29 2.79
these hydrogen protons in water would realign themselves in
the direction of any local or applied magnetic field whose
strength greatly exceeds that of the earth's field. Hence, the
body's high percentage of water is thought to be a prevailing
reason for its susceptibility to magnetic influences.
3
Magnetic m oment of a single proton = 1 . 4 1 0 x 1 0 2 erg/gauss
"

2. 793 u
------·Electron
=

4
/.. ...... ..... Where u is the n uclear magnetron = 5. 050 x 1 0"2 erg/gauss

/
I ,, Over recent years, several scientists have investigated the
I \
I \ effects of magnetic fields upon biochemical processes. And
I \
while there is no general consensus among them as to the
(J� Proton
I \
I I precise nature of these effects, the findings, when considered
I 1
I
\ I
collectively, leave no doubt that under some laboratory
\
\ I
I situations, artificially imposed magnetic fields can alter
\
\
/
I normal biochemical processes. So, the main point of conten­
', /
' / tion is not so much whether magnetic fields influence bio­
.......... ,., ,.,
...... _ _ _ _...

The simplest atom, hydrogen,

chemical processes, but rather, by what specific mechanism
contains only one proton and one electron. does the change occur.

14
 Dr. Madeline Barnothy, experimenting with mice, has
indicated that under given research conditions, there are at
least three possible effects of magnetic fields upon bio­
chemical processes : a) An upset of the normal enzyme
balance, b) An increase or decrease in the stability of the
genetic code, c) Modification of the normal rate of cell
division ( 1 , P. 80-8 7).

Two other researchers, Drs. I. L. and L. N. Mulay offer

further 'evidence of chemical responses to magnetic fields.
Emphasizing that "life processes themselves represent a
delicate balance between several interdependent biochemical
reactions, " the Mulay team, as an out-growth of their work
with fruit-flies and mice, explain that "the chemical compo­
nents in the cells have varying magnitudes of magnetic
susceptibility . . . Hence, the permanent and any transient
components will experience varying forces under the influence
of the magnetic field. Although these forces are small from a
microscopic point of view, they may be appreciable enough
to overcome weak intermolecular forces and thus to upset
the delicate balance (chemical or other equilibria, inside and
outside the cell) necessary for the sustenance of a living
system " ( 1 , P. 1 66-1 6 7). The Mulays further reported on
experiments which indicated that magnetic fields ranging
between 2,000 to 7,000 oersted may have the effect of
increasing the production of gases by the decomposition of
liquids exposed to such fields ( 1 , P. 1 65).

If we consider its electrolytic properties, we achieve another

perspective of the body's chemical susceptibility to magnetic
fields. An electrolyte, as we know, is a substance in solution
capable of conducting an electric current ; and where there is
electric current flow, there also is magnetism. Some liquid
solutions, because of differing chemical properties, are better
electrolytes than others. Obviously, the better the electrolyte,
the greater the current flow, and consequently, the larger the
resultant magnetic field. Iron is known to be especially
susceptible to magnetization, and the human blood carries in
solution relatively large amounts of iron. Given these
conditions, the body is seen to generate a magnetic field of

15
 its own, owing partly to the presence of iron-produced
charged particles flowing in the blood stream, although other
chemical elements, e.g. potassium and sodium, also contribute
a fair measure of charged particles to the body's overall
bioelectric/biomagnetic status. It is common knowledge that
blood placed under a microscope with a magnetic field
applied, reveals the blood cells all lined up in the direction of
the field. This easy polarization of the blood is thought to be
greatly facilitated by the high percentage of iron contained in
the blood. Dr. Jeno Barnothy has shown that under certain
conditions magnetic fields, in altering the orientation of
blood cells, induce changes in their biological reactions, and
thereby modify the probability of chemical bond formation
( 1 , P. l 5).

H=O H finite _ _ ).
,

M AG N ET I C F I E LD ( H )

16
 Dr. A. R. Davis explains that the blood is very slightly
alkaline, with respect to body cells which are more acid in
nature. Consequently, if one is suffering from a condition
prompted by the over-acidity of the blood, the proper
application of negative, alkaline north pole magnetic energy
should help restore the blood to normal (D)*, (22, P. 3 2-36).
It is well known among biomagnetic researchers in several
countries that the blood 's leucocyte count is particularly
amenable to magnetic influence, their numbers quickly rising
or dropping, depending on the prevailing magnetic conditions.
But just what implications, if any, this fluctuating leucocyte
count could have for affecting behavioral modes is not fully
clear. Thus, within the human system, the blood, because of
its chemical composition, assists in the creation of the body's
intrinsic biomagnetic field. And further, due to its iron
content, the blood is highly amenable to magnetic fields from
external sources.

The Magnetic Cell

* Letter notations throughout this work i ndicate that the referenced

i nformation was obtained by way of interview, d iscussion, or personal
correspondence with the particul ar i nvestigator as shown i n the bibl io­
graphic l isti ng.
17
 �z
� in 0
2 !::: -
� - 20 -
z :::;
w

- 40
��
�

PROPAGATION OF NERVE IMPULSE coincides with changes the axon interior locally positive. In the wake of the impulse the
in the permeability of the axon membrane. Normally the axon in· sodium gate closes and a potassium gate opens, allowing potassium
terior is rich in potassium ions and poor in sodium ions; the fluid ions to flow out, restoring the normal negative potential. As the
outside has a reverse composition. When a nerve impulse arises, nerve impulse moves along the axon ( 1 and 2 J it leaves the axon in
having been triggered in some fashion, a "gate" opens and lets a refractory stale briefly, after which a second impulse can follow
eodium ions pour into the axon in advance of the impulse, making (3 ) . The impulse propagation speed is that of a squid axon.

18
THE CELL & The cell is an important unit of analysis in considering the
MAGNETISM production of magnetism in the human body. Biomagnetic
researchers look upon the cell in the. living organism as a small
electric battery with the mitochondria as the power house.

All functions of the hum3:I1 body are electro-chemical in

their operations. A cell, like all units comprised of physical,
atomic substance, has a magnetic moment which, in part,
results from the interaction of its electrochemical constitu­
ents. In· fact, Dr. Oliver Reiser has speculated that there is a
resonance which holds between the DNA in the chromosomes
of the cell nucleus and the RNA residing in the cytoplasmic
envelope which surrounds the nucleus (3, P. 423-428).

Biochemists are steadily expanding their comprehension of

the phenomenon of the constant transfer of electricity occur­
ring across cell membranes. In outlining the process by which
the nervous system conveys a message, one author writes :
"the electric message is carried along the nerves as a result of
changes in the quantities of potassium and sodium salts inside
and outside the cell. Outside is a lot of sodium salt and little
potassium, inside lots of potassium and little sodium. The
effect is like that of a wet battery where different solutions
separated by a semi-permeable membrane give rise to an
electric current. If a very fine electrode tube is inserted inside
an individual nerve and another tube is bathed in the external
sodium predominating liquid, an electric difference of 65 - 9 5
millivolts can be measured between the two points.

* D iagram on adjacent page taken from Scientific American, Sept. 1 96 1 ,

" How Cel ls Com m u nicate," Bernard K atz.

19
 When a nerve is stimulated, sodium flows into it at the
point of stimulation and potassium flows out, discharging
the local voltage difference across the membrane. The
voltage difference is then discharged in the next bit of
membrane a little further along and so on - thus, the
message travels along the nerve " (4, P. l 71 ).

Interior E lrterior
K+ Na+ N,/ Na-4- K+
K+

Potassium Kt- Na+ Sodium Na-4-

K+ txcess E"ces�

Na+ K+ K+ Na+ Na+

Consequently, each cell can be viewed as possessing its own

immediate magnetic environment, or magnetic field, which
combines with the fields of like and adjacent cells, thereby
giving rise to the magnetic field of a particular system within
the human body. For example, the magnetic field of the
skeletal system can be seen as distinct from that of the
nervous system. In practice, however, the individual magnetic
fields of all the body 's cells and of all the body 's systems
combine to yield an overall "somatic magnetic field, " result­
ing from all of the body's physical, electrochemical, magnetic­
producing processes taken collectively.

20
Christopher Hills' radionic measurement of the seven levels ofthe bioenergetic field
taken with instruments described in his book Supersensonics.

MAN'S SOMAT I C MAG N ET I C F I ELD

21
MAGNETISM & An enzyme is defined as a biological catalyst ; it enters into
ENZYMES a chemical reaction but does not become a part of the
reaction itself. The enzyme is considered the ' 'Brain' ' of the
cell. Each cell in our body has its own enzyme* , and all
reactions occuring in each cell are dictated and controlled by
the enzyme (E) . " Enzyme failure is the ultimate cause of
disease ; all disease can be traced to some malfunctioning
enzyme. Thus, any successful therapy must be noticed at the
enzyme activity level " (E). This is how the noted researcher,
Dr. Justa Smith explains her concept of the place of the
enzyme in the structure of human biochemistry.

Viewed in light of the above perspective, all biological

mechanisms become , comparatively speaking, gross levels of
analysis of magnetic effects. The nervous system controls
behavioral patterns, but enzymes control the nervous system.
Hence, physiologically speaking the enzyme is the lowest
possible level of behavioral control, all biological systems,
necessarily, being directed by enzymes.

It was in doing research for her doctoral degree that Dr. Smith
observed the effects of magnetism upon enzymes. Enzymes
deliberately damaged by exposure to ultraviolet radiation
were subjected to various magnetic fields of strengths up to
1 3 ,000 gauss. Her results showed that molecular behavior was
altered, and that there was a general enhancement of enzyme
activity. From this, it was concluded that bonding activity
was somehow affected (E) . Although several other enzyme
solutions were tested, the enzyme trypsin figured most
prominently in the research. Also, catalase, an enzyme of the
blood, was found to be especially responsive to the presence
of a magnetic field. But at no time was there found to be any
harmful effects to the enzymes because of the strength of the
field employed (E) .
* The earth's magnetic field is also said to activate an enzyme system i n
fruits and vegetables which causes normal ripening. When the field of a
m agnet passes through the organ ic compound of an apple, for example,
it is fou nd to produce a loss or gai n of protons wh ich speeds u p the
enzyme system and causes ripeni ng (23).

22
 These pioneering investigations seem to leave little doubt as
to the ability of certain m agnetic fields to alter enzyme
reactions which, in turn, could modify the chemical processes
o ccurring in each cell of the human body. However, in order
to satisfy scientific criteria other researchers m ay want to
d uplicate Dr. Smith's work before reaching definite
con clusions.

Shown is an electromagnet u sed in biological research.

Permanent magnets (not shown ) a re also used. Dependi ng
upon experimental requ i rements, field strengths may range
from a few hundred gauss to several thousand gauss.

23
HEALING HANDS Dr. Smith has also conducted research on the effects of
. .
" sp1n'tual he al'mg, " or the "1aymg on o f h an d s, " upon
enzymes, as compared with the effects of magnetic fields. In
a series of experiments using the enzyme trypsin, she
compared the results of solutions treated by a healer against
those obtained from enzymes exposed to a magnetic field. It
turned out that the activity of damaged enzymes treated by
the healer, increased to a degree comparable to that obtained
in a magnetic field of 1 3 ,000 gauss. It was noted that the
qualitative effects of both the magnetic field and the healer's
hands were always the same - an enhancement of enzyme
activity. The effects were also quantitatively similar, up to
one hour of exposure (E) .

A constant, and obvious question which has arisen through­

out her research is, what is the nature of the force emanating
from the healer? Is it magnetism, or some other form of
energy? Using a fairly sensitive gauss meter, tests were made
for a possible magnetic field between the healer's hands -
there was no measurable field . Dr. Bernard Grad, a colleague
of Dr. Smith, who had also carried out previous investigations
on " spiritual healing, " says that the nature and mechanism of
the healing force is not known, but that it represents some X
factor or energy that flows from the human body. Dr. Smith
is equally reluctant to identify this paranormal healing energy
as magnetic. Both investigators agree, however, that whatever
the nature of the force, it can be modified by the healer's
general state of mental health, as well as by his mental
attitude or frame of mind at the time of testing (E).

24
Suggested models of energy flow between a healer's
hands.

s N

25
ELECTROBIODYNAMICS
 ELECTROBIODYNAMICS*

0
" l<l 0
6
0
r;j
,;
/
0 0
) 0
I 0 Q
0 o\
0
,. 0
Ill
\ 0
.. 0 0 00
0
' \ \
0 0 '

J
0

l.
•o
a
...
..

*This term is contrived to suggest that what follows is a discussion of certain selected
electrodynamic and biological phenomena, as thought to be relevant within the context of
this work. And u it is not intended to offer a full interpretation of electrodynamic and bio­
logical processes , as usually understood by physical science; references are made to both con­
ventional and unconventional fmdings.

27
FREQUENCY & Frequency is defined as "rate of vibration, " a cyclical
ELECTROMAGNETIC fluctuation of energy, over time, between certain values. The
SPECTRUM greater the rate of vibration, the higher the frequency. (The
higher the frequency, the denser the particle and the less the
heat, as heat is associated with the longer waves nearer the
red end of the spectrum ; this principle is applicable to every­
thing in the created universe) (7) . Dutch physician

E= mc2
Dr. J. Postma has noted that, since Einstein, we have known
that energy and matter are but two different aspects of a
single, unknown reality, that matter and energy are quantita­
tively different manifestations of one fundamental phenome­
non, viz. vibration (2, P. 38). We know too that there is only
one law of vibration, whether the field is electromagnetic (as
in radio waves), or mechanical (as in sound), or nuclear (as in
sub-atomic particles) (6) . Hence , frequency, a rate of vibra­
tion, is peculiar to everything that is - every manifest entity
in the universe has its own rate of vibration.

f'- visible
infrared I' x-rays
micro- ----1---,. 1 ----"'- - - -+
I
radio waves waves 1 1 ultraviolet -y-rays
,�

· -- ----"- 1 1,.--A-- -,I I,----"- -- .

'
\ j1
I I I I I I I I ti i I i I ;
1 04 1 06 1 08 1 010 1 012 1014 1 016 1 018 f in cycles/sec
10 ' 1 02 10" 10 " l (l . , ! ;_ ; (\ •' ,

The electromagnetic spectrum: this is a continuous range frequency and wave length. The regions with historical names
of radiation spreading from gamma rays to radio waves. overlap, but the names still give a hint of the common sources:
The descriptive names for sections of the spectrum are historical; radio waves and microwaves from electrons moving in conductors;
they merely give a convenient classification according to the infrared from hot objects; visible light from very hot objects;
source of the radiation. The physical nature of radiation is ultraviolet from arcs and gas discharges; X rays from electrons
the same throughout the whole range. In all sections it has striking a target; gan\ma rays from nuclei of radioactive atoms.
the same velocity, the same electromagnetic nature, and the
only difference from one part of the spectrum to another is in

28
 Associated with frequency are the forces of nature, and
there are four forces popularly recognized by contemporary
physics.

In their descending order of strength they are : Nuclear

Forces; Electromagnetic Forces, which are one hundred times
weaker than nuclear forces ; Weak-Interactions Forces, which
are one hundred million times weaker than nuclear forces ;
and Gravitational Forces, which are the weakest of all
(3, P. 200-20 1 ). Physical substance can be analyzed with
respect to all, or any of the above forces. For purposes of the
current discussion, our perspective is an electromagnetic one.

THE CREATI ON SPECTRUM 4

BLACK ATOM IC GRAVITATIONAL AKASI-UC

H OLE S DISINTEGRATION FORCES FORCE S VO I D

* F ro m H i l ls ' Theory o f Consciousness (43, p. 1 01 ) .

29
 According to the latest measurements of physicists, what is
normally regarded as the electromagnetic spectrum begins at
one end with radio waves of very great wavelengths and
continues through infra-red rays, visible light, ultraviolet
light, until it reaches the other extremity of X-rays, gamma
rays, and cosmic rays, where the wavelengths become exceed­
ingly short. This comprises some 60 to 80 octaves. All this
energy travels at about 1 86,000 miles per second (5, P. 7 1 ).
However, when we pursue the matter further, we find that
the popularly defined electromagnetic spectrum is, in reality,
only a section of a much longer energy continuum - one
which probably extends, on its high end, into infinity.

�·
THE CREATION S P ECTRU M

NUCLEAR UGHT WEAK I�RACTIONS GRAVITY

* F rom " Hills' Theory of Consciousness" (43, P. 1 01 )

30
 Most physicists will agree that all matter in which charges
oscillate should radiate magnetic waves, and since all matter
contains electrons in motion, i. e. moving charges, no
substance known to science should be excepted. Thus, once
charges are set in motion, they can radiate electromagnetic
energy, wherein the electrons are said to exhibit a wave-like
behavior. Some matter, then, demonstrates a low frequency
of electromagnetic waves because of the low oscillation rates
of the charges constituting that particular form of matter.
Such a slow rate of movement may produce a low frequency
wave, not easily measured because of its relatively weak
vibratory pattern. But, however weak and unmeasurable by
scientific means, the radiation should still be there. An
"inert" boulder, outwardly manifesting no signs of life has
its own electromagnetic rate of vibration, just as does a
vigorous young calf, obviously pulsating with life. Consequent­
ly, if all matter is placed along a continuum, and considered
with respect to its electromagnetic frequency, we will
discover numerous objects with wavelengths much longer
than those of radio waves. This would greatly extend the
lower end of the electromagnetic spectrum as viewed by
science. Seen from this perspective, a single electromagnetic
continuum would include rocks, plants, cows, and man's
physical body, each differing from the other only by its
relative electromagnetic frequency.

Hence, we can conceive of a vast array of electromagnetic

energies, ranging from atoms to stars. According to
Dr. Christopher Hills in his book Supersensonics (4 2) this
creation spectrum consists not only of the known 80 octaves
of physical energy but includes 80 octaves of thought waves
and 80 octaves of imagination radiations (43 , P. 1 00).

THE SPECTRUM OF CREATION

Subatomic Spectrum Electromagnetic Spectrum Superatomic Spectrum
Thoughts Physical Imagination
80 octaves 80 octaves 80 octaves

31
 World Sensoriu m

Man

Organisms

Un lce l l u lar Organistrls

CeUs

Molecu l es

Atoms

E lementar�

I l lustration of a spiralled "electro-vibratory" progression of

l ight-energy-matter ranging from elementary particles to a
planetary entity called the "world sensorium" from Prof.
Ol iver Reiser's Cosmic Humanism, conceived and redrawn
by Stephanie Herzog.

32
 Diagramatic expression of a spherical section of nodal points report·
edly existing within the force-field of a small bar magnet.
Researchers claim that by means of proper detection devices nodal
point movement in space can be registered over a considerable distance.
(Courtesy De La Warr Laboratories)

MAGNETIC FIELD Physics teaches that all magnetic materials must have a
COMPOSITION bipolar configuration, i. e. they must have a north pole, as
well as a south pole. It is evident that if two opposite poles
are facing each other attraction occurs, whereas repulsion is
the result when two similar poles face each other. One
British researcher, however, Dr. H. Tomlinson, claims that
there are polar fields developed in all directions around a
magnet. These fields, he asserts, may extend several feet,
fading as distance from the magnet increases. Tomlinson
speaks of the total field surrounding a magnet as being
comprised of various "rays" each of which can be detected in
a specific area around the magnet ( 1 0, P. 3 1 -3 5). If
Tomlinson 's assessment is correct, it would appear that the
detailed composition of a magnetic field is more complex
than the simple bipolar structure as popularly understood in
physics.

33
RESONANCE According to our previous discussion, all matter is under­
stood to have a rate of vibration which is peculiar to itself,
notwithstanding that it may be imperceptible to normal
human faculties, or to detection by scientific instrumentation.
To have a rate of vibration is to have a rhythmical pattern of
recurring periods wherein the energy of the vibration changes
from one value to another. In such a situation, the frequency
of a system is said to oscillate, or exhibit rhythmic variations
between certain maximum values . All matter, all freely
vibrating systems, then, are conceived as having their own
• natural frequencies or periods of free oscillation ; this consti­
tutes a system 's native vibration in an unobstructed state,
i. e. without the influence of an outside compelling vibratory
force. Resonance is said to occur when the respective periods
of free oscillation of two or more different systems coincide
with each other. If two independent systems, both having
the same naturally occurring frequency, are joined together
in phase, resonance occurs with the result that their
maximum and minimum values are reached simultaneously.
Both systems vibrate in unison. Under these conditions, the
resultant waveform values, created by the union of the two
frequencies, exceed that which either could produce indepen­
dently. An illustration of this is found in the fact that a
vibrating tuning fork will set into sympathetic vibration, or
resonance, another tuning fork of the same frequency.

Resonance , necessarily, involves an exchange between

systems, a kind of mutual " sensing. " In most cases two
vibrating systems interact, one becomes dominant, and the
other moves to the frequency of the dominant one. But once
resonance is achieved , there is continual and maximum
energy exchange between the two systems. Professor Oliver
Reiser, in his book, Cosmic Humanism, refers to the British
investigator, Ninian Marshal!, who has postulated a theory of
" Holistic Resonance. "

34
 Mr. Marshall asserts that any two structures exert a mutual
vibratory influence upon each other which tends to make
them become more alike.* He further states that " the strength
of this influence increases with the product of their complexi­
ties and decreases with the differences between their
patterns" (3 , P. 4 76).

A group of researchers in " Radiational Physics" maintain

that all vibrating matter with a wavelength (and that includes
all matfer) is like an antenna which moves back and forth in
resonance with the gyratory forces of nature around it. These
investigators have found that all vibrating bodies have around
them a pattern of specific points - nodal points -- at which
resonance with other systems can occur (6). They further
suggest that resonance between different o ctaves or realms of
matter is possible. "All quanta, 11 they explain, 11 depend on
the frequencies of radiation. " A feeble radiation of very high
frequency can cause the materialization of that frequency in
a large number of atoms when in resonance, while intense
radiation of a low frequency may not materialize at all if
there is no resonance ( 7).

We broaden our concept of resonance by the use of the

term 11 complementary. 11 Two or more fields are considered to
be complementary if when brought together their individual
phase and frequency result in an amplified, increased effect.
Two combined fields may show a complementary relation in
some aspects, but destructive in others. Thus, with combined
fields, one must consider relative degrees of " complementari­
ness " (or relative degrees of resonance) as such frequencies in
combination with each other can manifest varying aspects of
additive or destructive interaction, depending on their points
of intersection.

* Most physicists woul d agree that two independently vibrating sources

exert a mutual i nfluence upon each other, but not a l l wi l l agree that
such a mutual exchange makes them more a l i ke.

35
HARMONICS The state of resonance between two interacting magnetic
fields involves more than the association of simple frequencies.
As explained earlier, all naturally occuring waveforms are
complex, having several component features. And one of the
factors contributing to the complexity of frequency composi­
tion is the phenomenon of "harmonics. " Every vibration has
what is known as a fundamental frequency, plus its accom­
panying harmonics. The " fundamental " (sometimes referred
to as the first harmonic) is the first and the lowest frequency
and has the longest wavelength. A harmonic is a mirror image
of the fundamental. Together with the fundamental frequency,
there is an infinite series of harmonics, all vibrating at
different amplitudes, but all reflections of the original
frequency. The frequencies of the harmonics are all integral
multiples of the fundamental frequency. The first harmonic,
following the fundamental, is double the fundamental,
the next is treble the fundamental, and so on. Investigations
of harmonic behavior reveal that amplitude and intensity
decrease with an increase in frequency (B). And it is generally
known that magnetic fields, and consequently their harmonic
vibrations, interact with each other in varying degrees of
attraction and repulsion, varying degrees of "in-phaseness" or
"out-of-phaseness" with each other. The harmonic of a
physical body is seen to be intermeshed with the body itself,
but also extending beyond it.

An illustration will serve to elaborate our discussion of

harmonics. One writer described harmonics this way : "a
string fixed at each end can vibrate at a number of different
frequencies. The lowest of these, F, is called the fundamental
frequency. The other will have values 2F, 3 F, etc. , and are
called harmonics. These frequencies can be excited simultane­
ously and the resulting vibration has a complex waveform.
Thus, the summation of a number of frequencies harmonically
related gives rise to a complex periodic waveform"( l 3 , P. 1 1 ) .
Nor is the phenomenon of harmonics constrained b y physical
dimensions; it ranges the continuum from micro to macro
manifestations. Nuclear physicists have found that all atoms
have a fundamental vibration, along with its series of harmonic
reflections.

36
 Summarily, then, we see that naturally occurring waveforms,
i.e. waveforms emanating from freely oscillating, uncontrived
sources, are complex in their composition. This includes all
waveforms in nature, leaving the production of " pure"
frequencies to be attempted only in experimental laboratory
situations. Waveforms are generally complex for at least two
major reasons :
Each vibration has its fundamental frequency
. Plus associated harmonics, which together
produce a complex frequency.
Any given waveform is invariably a mixture
being comprised of more than one distinct
frequency, thus resulting in another degree of
complexity.
As separate vibrations join to produce a single, resultant
waveform, each vibration carries with it an infinite range of
harmonics which interact with each other in the formation of
the final waveform configuration. This resultant waveform
will, in turn, have its associated harmonics and can combine
with yet other frequencies in an infinite process of combina­
tion and re-combination.

�------ 1 --------�

t
String vibrating as a whole and
in segments at the same time

I
�----- --=�- - �=--- - - ---

- ---- - -=-=:..-=--=--- ·_

Harmonics in addition to the fun·

damental are produced when a string vi­
brates in two or more segments.

l= �>.
7th harmonic

37
BIOMAGNETIC Several years ago, the De La Warr researchers, using specially
RESONANCE devised equipment, found that all matter, that all human
beings, emit a distinct frequency vibration which is an integral
feature of physical existence ( 1 1 , P. 60). It was further
discovered that some aspect of man's somatic vibrations
translates as audible sound frequencies. Dr. Von H. Rohracher
of the Psychological Institute of Vienna University has
recorded sonic micro-vibrations emitted by the skin of
humans and animals. These emissions are complex sound
waves which differ with each individual, as indicated on
recorded graphs made by Rohracher ( 1 2, P. 22).

Recalling our previous discussion of harmonics, it was seen

that any given oscillation has a fundamental frequency plus
its associated harmonics, that the propagation, and the inter­
action of fundamental and harmonic frequencies in three­
dimensional space are such that an infinite number of
frequency combinations, and resonance between separate
frequencies are possible. This concept is meant to embrace all
vibrations - including those emitted by human beings. Thus,
each man, somatically speaking, is seen to generate a funda­
mental frequency peculiar to himself, which, in turn, propa­
gates into space an infinite series of harmonics, all bearing an
integral relationship to the original fundamental frequency.
Based on a series of experiments which he conducted in
Holland, Dr. H. Philippi discovered that every living entity
has a vibratory pattern which is typical of the species which
the entity represents (2, P. 47).

We conceive, then, of each living organism as radiating out

into space, a frequency identifying other aspects of its
physiological (and no doubt psychological) existence.

We know that resonance occurs if the oscillatory sequences

of two or more independent systems coincide, thereby
producing a sympathetic vibratory unison of their respective
frequency patterns. Such a situation establishes a comple­
mentary relationship between independently vibrating sources.

38
 An i l lustration based on the De La Warr findings of nodal point
distribution surrounding the human being. The pattern of nodal points
is reported to change with the individual's thought, thus suggesting an
interrelationship between one's mental energies and the force-field
containing one's nodal points. (Courtesy Astara )

39
 Given these conditions, it seems reasonable to expect that a
given human body, as an independently vibrating source, is
capable of attaining a degree of resonance (or " complementa­
rimiss " ) with other independently vibrating sources. * Accord­
ingly, the De La Warr researchers have postulated that under
certain conditions, a state o f " magnetic" resonance could be
set up between two objects that are distant from each other.
They say that in such a " magnetic" continuum the force­
fields of a distant person could be detected at almost any
point in space and a psycho-somatic diagnosis carried o ut by
means of appropriate apparatus ( 1 1 , P. 7).

Also associated with resonance and harmonics is the

previously mentioned phenomenon of n odal points. The
De La Warr group has found that around every human being
is a " magnetic " force-field with a pattern of nodal points,
vortices of energy, similar to that of a bar magnet. Each of
these points, they explain, is in contact with the person to
whom they belong. Consequently, to be in resonance with
any one of these points is to be in resonance with the indivi­
d ual ( 1 1 , P. 7). Other investigators maintain that nodal points
are resonance bonds which function to bind man, and all
things, to the creative force-field of the universe (7). Phil Alien
in Energy, Matter and Form (45 , P. 1 5- 1 7) explains how
these nodal points occur inside the body as acupoints ; the
high energy bonds at · the acupuncture meridian systems.

* Here we thi n k not only of resonance as being possi ble between two
or m ore human bodies, but of resonance occurring between an indivi­
dual and particular frequencies of sound, color, fragrance, o r other
independently vibrating sources.

l t has further been suggested that if a frequency p roduced by the

human brain is pl aced in resonance with a magnetic field of sufficient
i ntensity, behavior can be modified ( D ) .

40
 A De La Warr demonstration of the symmetrical d istr i bution of some
of the nodal poi nts in the h uman force-field and the i r experimenta l
detection. I nvestigators m a i nta i n that th is field interpenetrates and
su rrounds the phys ical body and that its "magnetic" properties are
present throughout the earth's magnetic field, thereby forming a
conti n u u m wh ich extends i nto a "pre-physica l " state of matter.

41
RAPPORT Closely related to, and practically synonymous with, the
phenomenon of resonance is the concept of "rapport " about
which researchers still have much to learn. The term rapport,
within the context of biomagnetics, may be taken to express
a psychophysical relationship between two persons, or
between an object and a person, in space and time. However,
in 1 852, a Frenchman named M. Benoit used snails in his
experiments, as he felt certain that a form of rapport was
operative in the animal kingdom ( 1 1 , P. 57-58). First, the
researcher paired off 52 snails and allowed them to become
well acquainted by living together in separate pairs. Then on
each pair, he wrote a letter of the alphabet, two A's, two B 's,
and so on. One set of alphabet-labeled snails was sent to
America, and the other retained in Paris. At a pre-determined
time, in Paris, an electric shock was applied to a snail, say
snail E. Simultaneously snail E in America reacted in
sympathy, exhibiting a kind of erratic behavior. Several other
snails were shocked, and it was possible to transmit a simple
message by " snail telegraph " ( 1 1 , P. 5 8).
In 1 965, a modern day corollary to Benoil 's experiment was
conducted at De La Warr laboratories in QXford , England.
But the unique feature of this endeavor was to show that
rapport exists between a physical object and a photograph of
that object. A photograph was taken of a snail and sent to
the town of Evesham, 40 miles away. In Oxford, the animal
was placed in an apparatus whereby histogram* readings
could be taken. In Evesham, which was linked to Oxford by
telephone, the snail's photograph was intermittently exposed
to certain light energies which were successful in producing
responses registered by the histogram in the Oxford laboratory
( 1 1 , P. 58). Similar experiments were carried out with human
subjects and their photographs ; several energy stimuli were
utilized : light, sound, color, ultraviolet and infra-red
radiations, and magnetism.

* A device used to record and measure amounts of energy transmitted

through particular parts of the body; it registers physiolog ical reflex
actions resulting from such changes. Histograms are essentially
amplitu de/frequency graphs of energy transmission through body
tissues. These graphs report m uscular and possi bly vascular changes i n
the subject's body as rapport i s establ ished and broken (2, P. 54),
( 1 1 , P. 38).
42
 NEW Y o R. K

O X FOR D

43
 In each instance histogram readings indicated that a state
of rapport existed between the subject and his photographic
image ( 2, P. 56). Other De La Warr tests suggest that rapport
holds, over great distances, between an individual and his
blood or hair specimens ( 2, P 5 6), ( 1 1 , P. 4-7) Apparently,
some mechanism involving resonance and/or harmonic
relationships is responsible for maintaining a lasting bond
between an individual and certain objects related to that
individual, even when individual and object are separated by
space and time.

Like rapport between an individual and an object,

" magnetic " rapport between two individuals has also been
demonstrated at the De' La Warr facilities. A subject was
made to relax for thirty minutes in a reclined position until
a regular pattern indicating his relaxed state began to register
on the histogram. Some 1 00 yards away, in another building,
a person presumably closely associated with the subject was
situated. At a time· unknown to the subject the distantly
located person began thinking of him ; shortly the histogram
recording changed, apparently reflecting the incoming thought
energy from the thinking person ( 1 1 , P. 5 5-5 7). Of major
significance in this test is that a state of rapport obviously
already existed between the two individuals, or that a state of
rapport could easily be established between the two persons,
in order to best transmit thought energy between them. In
Benoit 's earlier test, it was clearly his purpose in pairing the
snails, to have them first establish rapport by living together,
prior to the actual experiment. Thus, it would seem that
close physical association is a key factor in facilitating a state
of rapport between animals or humans.

It is explained that the product or effect of rapport, is one

of communication, and that this communication appears to
take place without the propagation of electromagnetism
( 2, P. 54), as we presently understand it. Nevertheless, it has
been shown that the state of rapport is affected by various
kinds of known electromagnetic energies, including light and
magnetism.

44
 Moreover, the De La Warr researchers explain that whatever
the mechanism responsible for communication by rapport, it
is apparent that it involves factors outside our normal
concepts of space/time dimensions (2, P. 54).

If, then, we were to try to capsulize a provisional definition

of rapport on the basis of what is presently known, we could
say that rapport is a state or condition existing between two
or more entities, whereby communication between the
entities · can occur; the factors responsible for establishing
rapport are seen to lie outside the known dimensions o f space,
time, and electromagnetism, although various electromagnetic
energies can influence rapport.

It has been further noted that the breaking of rapport

usually produces a large change in histogram patterns. The
De La Warr researchers explain that this phenomenon is
suggestive of a similar situation in some electrical circuits
where there is a rise of instantaneous voltage when the circuit
is broken, bringing about the collapse of the associated
magnetic fields. However, they confirm, in the case o f
rapport, n o magnetic field, a s such, i s evident ; but the
observed effect when rapport is broken seems to imply the
presence of a field of energy, the nature of which is not yet
known (2, P. 54).

We can speculate further on a couple of mechanisms which

may be involved in the establishing of rapport between indivi­
duals. Dr. P. I. Guliaev, a Russian researcher in parapsycholo­
gy, has commented that it is known that certain electric
currents, when applied directly to the brain, cause neural
excitation, thereby evoking various sensations, including
light, sound, and even recollection. He thinks, therefore, that
it is quite possible that cerebrally generated electromagnetic
waves might stimulate another sympathetic brain (27).

45
 If Guliaev's assumption is correct, it could provide an
important explanation for the phenomenon of rapport, as
viewed from the physiological perspective. Such an interpre­
tation would be entirely within the realm of known physical
mechanisms, for it will be recalled from our earlier discussion
of resonance, that two independently vibrating systems can
exert a mutual influence upon each other which tends to
make them more alike. Two or more individuals frequently
brought together in mutual association, might be conceived
of as so many autonomously vibrating cerebral systems
whose close proximity, and consequent interchange of
energies, produces a kind of " communal likeness" among
them. Once a sympathy or likeness of cerebral vibrations is
established, the kind of sympathetic cerebral stimulation
suggested by Guliaev would seem possible. This eventually
leads to communication via thought waves. Phil Alien takes
these discoveries to some surprising conclusions in Energy,
Matter and Form (45, P. 1 02-1 36).
PHIL ALLEN

"Is everything we see really constructed from interfering

wavefields of thought taking place in our consciousness?"
(p. 1 00)

"( Recent research) implies that our body is a three­

dimensional virtual image (i. e. a hologram) formed by
wave interference patterns in our mind-our self-image.
The microtubules (within our cells) may act like fiber optic
wave guides for the transmission oflight waves through us.
If so, it is quite likely that our body is a creation of holo­
graphic thought processes-a psychic hologram-and we

(
self-organize based on the image we have of ourself in our
mind" (p. 1 1 9)

Visualization by Phil Alien

Energy, Matter and Form (p. 1 00)

46
THE MAGNETRON Even more recently in August, 1 977, Dr. Robert Massy gave
a paper at the U. S. Psychotronics Conference in Los Angeles
demonstrating rapport in two practical experiments of very
different natures. The following is abstracted from this paper.

During the great European revival of radiesthesia and radionics,

beginning around 1 920, rapport was discovered to hold over great
distances .between an individual and his blood or hair specimens. Some
mechanism involving resonance is apparently responsible for maintain­
ing a lasting bond between an individual and certain objects related to
that individual, even when individual and object are separated by space
and time.

In October, 1 953 the Servranx brothers published a paper in an

English publication, Radiational Physics Notes, describing the use of
the drawing of the cross section of a Magnetron to establish rapport
between two similar samples. (The Magnetron is a generator of micro­
waves which was later superseded by the klystron generator, the
klystron generator being more pure and the Magnetron more powerful.

This they used for triangulations in map reading for location work
and with anatomical drawings for diagnosis, the witnesses being placed
in the center circle. Another use was in selecting medicinal remedies by
laying each sample separately at the Magnetron center and determining
·the small outer white disc which is in resonance with the remedy tested.
The remedies were then placed in position on the smaller discs and
sympathy with the center witness found.

Three common types of magnetron cavities : slot, hole and

slot, vane.

47
�
00

Dr. Robert Massy sett ing up the M a g netron to broadcast energy of a specific frequency to h i m self. Note how
the plant i n the background has grown so as to be over the energy e m itted from the tops of the small boxes.
These boxes are Pi- Ray Coffers. See " R ays From the Ca pstone" by C hristopher H i l ls for deta i l s on this coffer
and its energies.
 Under the direction of Dr. Christopher Hills, the research team at
the University of the Trees wanted to come up with an apparatus whose
broadcasting distance would be operator independent. Duplicating
the campus radionics set was ruled out due to its inherent disadvantages
in supplying a unit to each team member.

A literature search uncovered a number of instruments which were

finally narrowed down to the Magnetron. Redesigned to incorporate
modern day technology, the Magnetron seemed to offer the advantages
we were looking for.

RADIONICS SET MAGNETRON

DISADVANTAGES ADVANTAGES

Price (a $460.00) Low cost

Not readily portable Light weight

Space user Occupies small space

Operator training needed Easily tuneable

Time consuming set up No training needed

Error prone in set up Set up time minimal

Not legal for services

Unlimited broadcast
distance, independent
of the operator, by
tying into the earth's
magnetic field.
Note:
Because the effective operation of the Magnetron
is dependent on the cooperation of the conscious­
ness of the operator, no commercial claims can be
made for it The instrument is available for
research purposes where students of psycho­
tronics are still testing the results with insect
control, broadcast of bioenergetic signals and
other uses of the Magnetron principle. Univer­
sity of the Trees is collecting actual reports of
results for future publication.

49
THEORY In 1 89 9 Nikola Tesla constructed the world's biggest Tesla coil, near
Colorado, whose primary coil was 80 feet in diameter. Centered within
this was a coil about 10 feet tall and 10 feet in diameter, connected
to a huge metal ball on a 200 foot tower above the building. With
this coil, Tesla proved that the earth itself can be used for the trans­
mission of energy without wires and that the force followed the lines
of the earth's m agnetic field.

These lines have connection with the ley lines which were observed
by the ancients and account for the lines of magnetic variation at the
earth's surface, The earth's magnetic field is influenced by changes
in the sun's strong m agnetic fields producing solar flares and sunspots.
The carrier is the solar wind, a continuous breeze of electrified gas
which arrives here about four days after an event on the sun to create
disturbances in the earth's magnetism. There are holes in the sun's
chromosphere which appear to have alternating polarity, The energy
of the sun travels from one hole to the next along these polarity lines
and thus produces the well known shape of the solar flares. These arcs
evidently trace out lines of m agnetic force.

Making use of this information, magnets were added to the Magnetron.

Their positions were such that their polarities simulated the sun's field
and at the same time o bviously utilized the earth's magnetic force-field.
The Magnetron itself is not the tool, but is only a focalizer. The vast
m agnetic field of the earth provides the invisible wires for broadcasting,

50
 mag n e l r a n

Supersensonic Broadcast & Direction Finder

T.M.
Supersen son i c s
© 1975
University of the Trees Press P.O. Box 644 Boulder Creek, CA 95006

51
 PEST CONTROL IN The Magnetron is simply set up by orientating its long side parallel
ORGANIC FARMING to magnetic north.

A vegetable garden which had previously been divided into nine lots,
each separated by a two foot wide path on all sides, as illustrated, was
chosen for the first experiment, since this garden had a history of
D pest invasion. The previous year, slugs had been eliminated from the
entire area using a radionics set. This left a problem of snails and sow
c bugs as the primary pests. To provide adequate controls, it was decided
F G
to concentrate on clearing the sowbugs from one plot only. Plot E was

[]
chosen. It appeared to be suffering the greatest from these pests.

....____ .....___
A piece of sod and a live sow bug from plot E were placed at the
-

center of the Magnetron. In this position the sow bug was killed, thus
broadcasting his death pangs to plot E. The apparatus was left undis­
H I turbed for two weeks. Within three days there was no sign of sow bugs
in plot E and they have not returned all summer. In the control plots,
A through I, sow bug activity continued at normal rate.

Used in this manner the Magnetron appears to have enormous

potential in the field of organic farming.

COMMUNICATION This instrument carries important ramifications for the future of the
group dynamics field. Its application in a group situation, for example,
would be where communication has become blocked or has completely
broken down because of such conditions as extreme anger or rigid ego
positions. In such cases we have employed the magnetron to balance
the energy fields of each of the participants, thus making effective
communication possible.

During a meeting between two opposing factions, a photograph of the

participants was placed at the magnetron's center and a light was shone
through a green filter irradiating the photograph with energy which is in
resonance with the heart. The result was that the participants moved
away from their strong ego positions and communication between the
parties took place.

52
 Experiment with different colored filters produced the following
correlations of group behavior in meetings.*

COLOR EFFECT PRODUCED

Red A loud meeting

Orange Social atmosphere

' Yellow Intellectual/planning

mood

Green Greater understanding

between participants

Blue Nostalgic mood

Indigo A fast moving meeting

Violet A visionary meeting

HEALING APPLICATION : Dave Ed wards, researcher in human behavior change, reports on his
introduction to the Magnetron. Using orthodox medical techniques, he
had been unable to shake off a flu virus which drained his energies and
left him too weak to work. Using divining, Massy determined that
Edwards needed energy corresponding to the red and green wavelengths
alternately for two and four hour periods each. At 1 0 o'clock a.m.
Edwards started to treat himself using witnesses consisting of a photo­
graph of himself and vitamin C at the center of the Magnetron. He set
up a lamp to cast red light on the Magnetron for two hours and a green
light for four hours, alternating back and forth. The following morning
Edwards stated that "my strength returned and I felt completely
recovered from the virus."

* For further information on the effects of color on our personality,

see "Nuclear Evolution" by Dr. Christopher H i l l s ( Pub. University of
the Trees Press) .

53
EAST-WEST FLOW Our preceding discussion of the principles of magnetism is
largely predicated upon knowledge provided us by the
conventional physical sciences. Now, however, we move
into a somewhat uncommon area of investigation, that of
" Radiational Physics. " Of particular interest to our present
subject is the concept of the " East-West Flow. " The intent
here is to review this phenomenon which popular physics
has not yet integrated into its conventions, to see how the
east-west flow might be associated with certain " electro­
vibratory " influences upon humans. The material presented
in this section is taken from a series of papers published by
" The Commission for Research Into the Creative Faculties
of Man," Centre House, London.

It will be recalled that we mentioned earlier, Dr. Tomlinson 's

explanation that no magnetic field is comprised simply of
north and south polarities, that there are various other rays
and polar opposites contained within a given field. The
De La Warr researchers further substantiate this finding by
their postulation of an east-west axis in a magnetic field
( 1 2, P. 1 2 & 1 8). Expounding on the east-west flow pheno­
menon, the Commission investigators describe it as a wave
radiation, a belt of energy, subject to the laws of physics,
which surrounds the earth's equator and moves in a direction
from east to west, at right angles to the earth 's magnetic
field. This force, it is said, passes through solid matter, can be
reflected by a mirror, and travels long distances at speeds
varying with the density of the substance through which it
passes. The east-west flow apparently acts upon objects, as
well as geometrical forms. The investigators go on to explain
that the east-west flow has a condensing effect which creates
the bipolar forces of attraction and repulsion which are
always to be found at right angles to its east-west axis.

54
 M
a
9
n
e
t
i
c

E a st We st F l ow

..... . �,
.. . w
. .

/ · h.
.. �

·""'
, .- .. . . . .. " \"\
..
·�
. E

From Supersensonics (42, P.96) R eceiving antenna orientation

55
 Taken in this perspective, the east-west flow, then, becomes
the progenitor of the earth's north-south polarity, with which
we are more familiar. The east-west flow is seen to balance
polarity, in reality creating four poles where science normally
conceives of two. This situation conduces to the postulation
that there is no duality in polarity, that polarity, on the
whole, is a state of complementary tensions, and not based
on the logic of opposites. We find further, that the gyratory
nature of wave propagation cannot be explained by the usual
north-south polarity of any entity or field of energy. But
acting in concert, the north-south, east-west force-fields
would cause the gyratory motion in all material bodies on
earth, to the right or left, depending on the polarity of the
body itself. A state of resonance is said to exist between the, ,
east-west and the north-south force-fields. And t here is the j.�
additional implication that the east-west flow of electrons is : .
somehow responsible for conditions o f resonance between
the earth's magnetic field, and the magnetic fields of all
entities inhabiting the earth. The assertion is made that the
principle of resonance is the secret of all galactic formations,
and of the spiralling east-west flow of energy ; and that from
this, it seems to follow that the spin of the earth itself is
owed to the resonant interplay of east-west, north-south
force-fields. Within the earth's magnetic envelope, a balance
of these forces is seen to prevail, and together they account
for the horizontal and vertical orbits of free electrons in all
living organisms.

But we are left with the question o f what, precisely, is the

nature of the east-west flow. It is, apparently, somewhat
different in character from the known electromagnetic
forces. The Commission researchers say that it is a third
force, neither electric nor magnetic, but that it acts upon the
nodal points, the resonance bonds of all systems. It is
concluded, however, that whatever its ultimate nature, the
east-west flow is essential to life , for without it there would
be no rotation of the spheres, no atmosphere, no magnetic
moment, and no life.

56
57
 POLARITIES­
NORTH AND S OUTH
 POLARITIES- NO RTH AND S O UTH

�
·� ------�
..
-------

0
0
--- V) --------:,..

"The Van Alien radiation belts shown as dots are m ade u p of high energy proticity. The
East -+- West flux of electrons which flow between and around them causes all objects
on earth to be interpenetrated with a resonant field of polarized electrical e nergy which
is constantly passing through the h uman nervous system . This energy was called "Prana"
by the ancient seers and diviners; it interacts with the field of consicousness known as
Ku ndal in i energy. Everyone has Kundalini, but not everyone has full biological control
of it." Dr. Christopher H i l ls, Supersensonics.

59
 POLA R DISTINCTIONS If one were to consider physicists and biomagnetic researchers
collectively as that group of scientists perhaps most intimately
concerned with the nature of magnetic fields, one finds that
there is among them no consistent standard for determining
magnetic polarity. But even beyond the question of standard­
ized polarity interpretations, there are some fairly significant
differences between the views of conventional physicists and
biomagnetic researchers, involving the behavior of polar
energies.
What constitutes the negative pole and what constitutes the
positive pole of a magnet appears to be open to how the
individual scientist chooses to defme it. Physics maintains
that negative and positive are relative concepts, and that in
dealing with a magnetic dipole field, we can say that one of
its poles is negative with respect to the other pole. We are
taught, in effect, that there are no distinguishing characteris­
tics which constitute " magnetic negativeness, " as opposed to
" magnetic positiveness. " And in the absence of any clear
personal definition of poles that an individual researcher may
choose to give, the convention in physics is to consider the
north pole as being of positive polarity and the south pole as
negative. This position, however, is not shared by several
biomagnetic researchers who consistently maintain that the
north pole is negative in polarity and the south pole positive.
A bit further on, we examine some of the evidence given in
support of the biomagnetic position. But for the present, we
pursue some of the points of contention between the two
views.
A compass is a small magnet, suspended so that it rotates
freely in response to magnetic influences. In using a compass
to determine magnetic polarity, one has at least two options
for defining what happens : that the end of the compass
marked "N" is indeed the north pole of the instrument, and
that when it points to geographic north, it is actually point­
ing to magnetic south or, that the end of the compass marked
"N" is the north-seeking pole - which means that it is really
the south pole of the compass. Just which defmition one uses
A compass needle in a magnetic field lines up in the
direction of the field. is a matter of personal preference.

60
 Both interpretations seem to b e equally popular. Neverthe­
less, their north-south differences not withstanding, there
appears to be a majority consensus among most researchers
concerned with magnetism, that those who live geographically
north of Huancayo, Peru are under the influence of negative
polarity geomagnetic energy, while inhabitants to the
geographic south of the magnetic equator are exposed to
positive polarity geomagnetic energy. Thus, the point of
debate does not so much involve the polarity of energy which
prevails' in the respective hemispheres, but whether the north
magnetic pole is located in the southern hemisphere , or vice
versa; the biomagnetic position implicitly holds that magnetic
north and geographic north are both located in the same
hemisphere . *

There i s yet another area of difference between the views

held by conventional physics and those of biomagnetic
investigators. This involves the question of the path of move­
ment followed by magnetic lines of force. Popular physics
conceives o f the lines of force emanating from the end of a
bar magnet as being fairly straight lines which travel through
the air from one pole to the other. They further maintain
that electrons entering this field are caused to spiral around
the lines of force, and that the way in which they spiral
depends on the direction in which the magnetic field is
pointing - this particular interaction phenomenon is referred
11 11
to as the angle o f incidence. The electrons, they say,
follow a helical path determined by that of the existing field.
On the other hand, biomagnetic researchers assert, using a bar
magnet as illustration, that the lines of force issuing from
magnetic poles are not straight, but spiralling, with a cork­
screw like motion. Consequently, they explain the spiralling
motion of electrons in a magnetic field as resulting from the
natural spiral of the magnetic lines of force.

* Th is, of course, excepts the d ifferences of a bout 1 2° of the earth's

su rface situated geograph ica l l y south, but fal l i ng withi n magnetic
north, i . e. the difference between Ou ito, Ecuador and H ua ncayo, Peru.

61
 .·

----)
----� -'
M A G N ETIC FIE LD

. .

..

.
.

Electron field manifests at right

angles to the magnetic field. Old
concept depicts magnetic l i nes of
force in straight l i nes. New concept
depicts magnetic forces in spirals* .

/ '
>'\ ,'
...- - -, , -...

, ,-..., /, I \
', I I I \
I I
�
I\ / \I
I \ I
I \ I I
I I
. , \
\

N s

* F rom "The Un iversal Li nk", 1 962, publ ished by the Commission for Courtesy Dr. Christopher H i l ls
Research into the Creative Faculties of Man, Centre House, London.
(44, P. 829)

62
FUNDAMENTAL RAYS Christopher Hills takes this concept further in his book
Supersensonics (42, P. 336-338).

The idea that all matter was one continuous energy but manifested
with different nodal points of energy at different angles in a spiral
spectrum would explain the three-dimensional nature of matter and
give science four poles instead of only two. Not only was there a
positive !lnd negative horizontal and vertical aspect to each particle but
also a positive and negative characteristic of its spiral rotation through
space. That some matter has left-handed spin and some right-handed is
explained by bringing in the concept of East to West flow.

MATTE R H AS F O U R P O L ES

�
w,
TWO P O L ES N-S

TWO P O L ES E-W
horizontal plane.

Vertical plane at
right angle to the
) s

horizontal.
SC I E NCE H AS

POS I T I V E/N E G AT I V E POLES

Finally bringing in the concept of the scattering of particles of energy

according to their number of protons would suggest that any material
element is stabilized at a fundamental angle of manifestation from the
universal field of which it is a part. In other words, each particle is
undergoing creation and annihilation continuously so fast that we do
not perceive it.

63
 Like the sequential action of light photons on the eye such as a
camera projector, we do not see the interval between events. The reality
of matter is decided by its fundamental angle of manifestation and at
any other angle the same universal energy is manifesting as something
else in the periodic table of elements. Each element has its own
resonant frequency with the fundamental frequency of the universal
field which forms itself into patterns which we call material structures
of atoms.

FUNDAMENTAL Following this line of thought, Louis Turenne, a famous

RAY DISC French pioneer of radiesthesia, developed the Fundamental
Ray Disc in 1 93 5 . The following discussion of the use of this
instrument is taken from Hills' book Nuclear Evolution
(44, P. 1 94-1 97).

This color disc divides each segment of color into angles representing
the elements of nature as they manifest to our consciousness out of the
spiral form of the primordial atom. Turenne found that by putting a
radioactive sample at the center of the disc the vertical polarisation& of
any element placed at the center of the disc would radiate its spectral
lines in a horizontal direction and could therefore be plotted for each
element as a series of angles in different sections of the color spectrum,
depending on the complexity of the atom, its atomic number and its
shells of electrons orbiting around the nucleus.

N
I

w -
-

64
 Funda m e n ta l
Ra y Disc

T.M.
Supersenson1cs
•

© 1975

Uranium

University of the Trees Press P.O. Box 644 Boulder Creek, CA 95006

65
 By placing one's finger at the center and holding a pendulum over it,
the angle of the various elements of matter in the human body will
produce a diviner's reaction just like a water dowser gets from a rod
over underground water. The Turenne disc measures any disturbance
or oscillation in the body due to lack of body elements. It measures
imbalance, whether in the aura or in the body, and by treating the one,
heals the other. Or the body may be treated directly by divining the
proper remedy to fill the lack. As a cross check the remedy, when
placed at the center of the disc with a witness of the person, will cancel
out the vibration of the illness it is in phase with.

The ability, using the Turenne disc,* to detect the thresholds of

radiations coming from all objects around us in the environment in
terms of their relation with the calor spectrum, gives mankind a
completely new technique for probing and measuring the vibrations of
matter as they are influenced by light and to understand the natural
state in which they function without the distorted images brought to us
through mechanical devices and sensors which do not give us a correct
picture of causes but only detect effects. Therefore Turenne's calor
rosette is a useful tool for detecting not only visual colors but invisible
colors emanating as auras around objects and people. It is a way of
detecting what the kundalini energy is actually doing inside us and
tracing its effects on our consciousness, and of verifying the work on
the levels of consciousness in Part 11 of this book.

* Complete deta i l s of this instrument are given in " I nstru ments of

Knowing" ava il a bl e from the publ ishers, showing where you can get
the whole range of Turen ne's rules, discs, and the d ivining rods, etc.

66
A NEW LOOK AT THE The biomagnetic researchers believe that the magnetic
EARTH'S POLARITIES equator is a null point* lying midway between the two polar
extremities. The further assertion is made that in the
northern hemisphere (negative polarity) the field spirals to
the left in an anti-clockwise direction, while in the magnet 's
southern hemisphere, where positive polarity is dominant,
the field spirals to the right in a clockwise direction.

-THE NEW-

"€.
yet.
�o"\\1\\

The generally accepted scientific diagram of D rs. Davis and Sierra's concept of how l i nes
the path followed by l ines of force in a of force behave in a d ipole magnetic field.
d i pole magnetic field

* The null point is an area of zero magnetism. A magnet's intensity is

found to be greatest at the poles, th is strength gradually decreasing with
movement towards the magnetic equator, and finally reachi ng zero
value precisely at the magnetic equator. Fol lowing this view, a currently
developing theory h as it that the earth's di pole field strength is of zero
value at the magnetic equator.

67
 In his laboratory, Dr. Davis demonstrated this principle with
a special device he has developed, called the " Magnetophoto­
cronograph" * (E).

The function of this instrument is to present a visual

representation of the lines of force assumed by the field
emanating from a magnet. This device, a modified version of
a color television set, produces, in color, a distinct visual
pattern for each of the poles of a bar magnet. When the polar
end of a bar magnet is held a few inches away from the
instrument, one can actually see the anti-clockwise rotation
of north pole energy as it impinges upon the electronic screen,
or the clockwise movement of south pole energy. The force­
field leaving the pole is seen to generate a circular-moving
vortex, whose speed appears greatest towards the center of
the magnetic field. With the center of the magnetic field
positioned in the center of the electronic screen, there is
produced a black spot exactly in the field 's center; it is here
that the field 's rapid whirling motion is most clearly notice­
able. Surrounding this black spot, is a beautiful geometric
pattern consisting of several bright colors, all intricately inter­
woven with each other. And except for the black spot, this
mosaic of colors blankets the entire surface of the screen
which measures approximately I 7 inches square. When the
pole facing the screen is reversed, the general configuration of
the pattern remains the same, although there is a slight
change of the tint of the colors in the pattern, and a reversal
in the direction of magnetic field rotation is easily seen in the
black spot at the middle of the screen.

There is some controversy surrounding this instrument and

much of Davis's work. Dr. Hills states that this same pattern
alleged by Davis to be magnetic phenomena can be produced
by focusing a video camera on the crystals of a video screen.
This causes a feedback resonance loop by the interaction of
the light with the screen crystals. A picture of the effect
under discussion is shown on the opposite page.

* l t h as been pointed out that the effects observed on Davis's device are

also reproduci ble in physics by other means.

68
Photograph showing the geometric pattern of a m agnetic field emanati ng from a
bar m agnet. The angu l a r dark a rea i n the foreground is the m agnet itself w h i l e
t h e m ore c i rcu l a r d a r k a rea represents t h e center of the m agnetic field a s i t
registers o n Dr. D avis's "Magnetophotoch ronograph ". (Cou rtesy D r. A. R . Davis)

69
 Nevertheless, there was another device in Dr. Davis's labora­
tory that also demonstrated polarity differences and is worth
mentioning. This peculiar instrument converted magnetic
vibrations into audible sonic vibrations. As the small device
was switched on, there was a pervasive kind of humming
noise which Davis described as the combined electromagnetic
frequencies given off by all the objects in that one room of
his laboratory. A bar magnet was then taken and one of its
poles passed quickly back and forth across the surface of the
�device, but without any contact between the instrument and
the magnet. This movement produced a sound with a distinct
tonal pitch. The magnet was then reversed , and its opposite
pole passed over the detection device, just as before. This
time, a different pitch, much lower than that produced by
the other pole, was clearly audible. The sonic frequency
patterns generated by the respective poles of a single magnet
were obviously different.

Dr. A. Roy Davis demonstrat­

Ing one of the many electro n i c
measuring devices used i n h i s
research.
Science has not yet tested this
mach i ne or concept and d i s­
putes most of Davis's research.
In the i n terest of scientific
truth the m atter n eeds to be
carefu l l y Investigated and
proved once and for all.

70
HILLS' MODEL More recent research by Dr. Hills has indicated that the laws
OF MAGNETISM of magnetism follow a combination of the old concepts and
the Davis-Sierra model. Hills' model is illustrated below
(42, P. 1 5 6).

The foregoing arguments and illustrations relating to polar

differences suggest only part of the basis upon which several
leading biomagnetic researchers positively maintain that there
is a critical distinction to be made between the quality of
negative and positive polar energies. If these investigations are
correct in their postulations, it may give us cause to reconsider
much of what is currently being taught regarding magnetism.
However, biomagnetic evidence for a qualitative difference
between magnetic poles does not end with physics -- it
extends to medical, biological, and animal behavioral modes
as well.

71
MEDICAL/BIOLOGICAL On the basis of laboratory experiments, Drs. Davis and
APPLICATIONS Sierra insist that the two energies of a magnet affect biological
systems (and behavior patterns) in different ways. Dr. Sierra
states that "North and south pole magnetism, together,
interpenetrate all life on earth, " and claims "they combine in
a kind of Go, No-Go computer system. Whereas the north
pole acts to restrain growth, the south pole acts to promote
life " (C- l ). The north pole checks, arrests, retards. The south
pole increases, rejuvenates, accelerates. The south pole of a
magnet applied to the positive cell nucleus results in faster
cell replacement, while the north pole applied to the negative
cell membrane, controls and stabilizes excessive cell mortality
(C- l ). North pole energy attracts the potassium ion necessary
to maintain the cell in a healthy condition. The north pole
dissolves cholesterol and fatty deposits limiting blood flow
(C- l ). The south pole must be kept away from all bacterial
infections and viri ; it must not be applied to an inflamed
mucous membrane. Cancer and tumor growths spread rapidly
with south pole energy applied . Conversely, cancer and
tumor growths are retarded by the presence of north pole
energy (C- 1 ).
The pH factor also appears to be related to magnetic energy.
Dr. Sierra reports that, if the north pole of a cylinder magnet
is placed in a glass of water for a few minutes, it will give a
mildly acid reading on. a pH detector, while the south pole,
(positive polarity) when placed into water, shows a slightly
N s alkaline effect (C- l ). In another experiment involving the pH
factor, Dr. Davis exposed several hen eggs to a magnetic field,
while a control group of eggs were left unexposed. Both
groups were carefully broken and the relative amounts of
acidity and alkalinity measured. The exposed eggs contained
slightly less acid in the yolk and more alkaline in the whites
than the unexposed eggs (22, P. 43).

72
 Another illustration demonstrating the differing biological
effects of positive and negative magnetic energy, involves the
use of water. It will be recalled from earlier discussions that
water is easily polarized by a magnetic influence. Dr. Sierra,
as a part of his ongoing laboratory experiments, has what he
calls a "magnetic garden, " the soil of which is irrigated with
polarized water. He reports that plants watered with south
polarized water grow shorter and thicker than plants watered
with north polarized water. South watered plants, he says,
produce· fruits that are larger and sweeter, and that this is
particularly noticeable with plantain and banana plants. In
contrast, north watered plants tend to grow tall and slender,
and are generally weaker than plants watered with south
polarized water (C- l ).

Among the wide range of physical complaints treated by

biomagnetic research* is that of pain due to calcifications
and arthritic spurs. Under given conditions, north pole
magnetic energy acts to dissolve mass deposits accumulating
at bone joints. In other kinds of cases where excessive bleeding
is involved, the north pole functions to restrict blood flow.
In yet other instances, treatment with both north and south
pole can be alternated, for example, in a weakened condition
where infection is also present. A quick exposure to the
south pole will provide needed strength to the organism; this
is then followed by a north pole application to control
infection (C- l ).

* M agnetic fields used by Dr. Davis for biological treatment are

essentially confined to those produced by a permanent magnet, and
usually do n ot exceed 4,500 gauss. Davis expla i ns that when field
strength goes above 3,500 gauss, its abi l ity to render beneficial treat­
ment to a biological system genera l l y decreases. He further points out
that in most treatments using m agnets of 300 to 500 gauss, he prefers
to keep the m ag net about 3 i nches away from the treated surface,
although the measurable energy transmitted may extend fou r to five
i nches away from the magnet's pol ar surface. Some magnets of 1 ,000
gauss or m ore h ave a measurable energy transm ission as m uch as 1 8
inches away from thei r polar surfaces. The distance over wh ich m agnetic
energies can be measured wi l l depend, in part, on the sensitivity of the
measuring device used ( D ) .

73
NORTH-SOUTH Within the context of north-south polar distinctions, it
ANIMAL BEHAVIOR would be well to review some of the laboratory findings
which relate to animal behavioral differences, as examined
under separate polar influences. This information is provided
by Dr. A. R. Davis and results from experiments carried out
in his laboratory.
A series of experiments were conducted using baby chicks.
Fertilized eggs were exposed to a magnet for 1 0 hours, then
placed in a hatcher. The hatcher had previously been fitted
with the south pole of a magnet exposed in a corner opposite
the eggs. First, it was observed that the eggs hatched sooner
than the expected 2 1 -day norm. Then, as soon as the chicks
emerged, still wet, they proceeded immediately for the south
pole of the magnet in the opposite corner. There they all
cuddled up in front of the magnet, apparently sensing a kind
of motherly strength. In another similar experiment, newly
born chicks were placed in a cage with a horseshoe magnet
placed in the far end of the cage. Each chick, in turn, lay
down in front of the magnet for five to seven minutes, then
returned to the farthest end of the cage and remained there
with the other chicks. This experiment, Davis explains, was
repeated several times, always with the same result. When the
real magnet was replaced by a wooden dummy of the same
shape and size, none of the chicks paid it any attention. In
still another situation fertile eggs treated with negative, north
pole energy produced a t aller, more sensitive, more intelligent
bird at maturity. This was contrasted by birds similarly
treated by positive, south pole energy ; up to a certain point
of their growth, they too exhibited advanced intelligence.
But as these south-exposed chicks grew older, they developed
into vicious meat-eaters, quite unlike the normal, timid
character expected of this type of bird.
Dr. Davis surmises that the observed behavioral aberrations
are attributable to changes in DNA, RNA, and the resultant
genetic coding of the fertilized egg. There were no further
appreciable behavioral changes, once the animals reached
maturity. It appears from this that a permanent character
imprinting takes place once the unborn chick is exposed to
the experimental field before hatching.
74
 The result of another group of experiments conducted with
mice paralleled, in some aspects, those carried out with
chicks, though in the case of the mice, Dr. Davis observed
that behavioral patterns were somewhat more complex. The
living habits of separate groups of female mice were observed
- some under the influence of the north pole, others
exposed to south pole energy. South pole mice were seen to
bestow more care upon their offspring, both at birth and
afterwards. They also exhibited cleaner living habits, suffered
less labor pains and had an easier delivery of their offspring
than did the north pole mice (22, P. 60).

Other mice treated prenatally by north and south magnetic

fields, subsequently shawed distinct modes of behavior
attributable to their particular polar influence. Mice in group
(A) were exposed to south pole magnetic influence prior to
birth. As they matured, they exhibited tremendous physical
strength and stamina, but were mentally dull, insensitive,
unclean, and indulged in sexual intercourse to the point of
self-annihilation. Group (B) mice were treated prenatally by
north pole energy. At birth, they were thin and highly
susceptible to diseases, but upon maturing, they showed a
high degree of intelligence. Group (B) mice were neat and
clean in their living habits. Their awareness to light, odor, and
sound vibrations was especially keen. They were, in short,
very much more aware of all that o ccured in their environ­
ment. But with all their intelligence, group (B) mice died
quickly, their life span lasting much less than normal. So in
an attempt to program an animal with the strength of those
in group (A) and the intelligence of those in group (B), mice
treated prenatally under north pole conditions were taken at
birth and placed under south pole influences. The result of
this dual field exposure was to produce an animal that
retained all the intelligence of the previous group (B), while
maturing towards the strength of those in group (A), but as
soon as this animal reached maturity, it killed itself by over­
indulgence in sexual intercourse. At last report, Dr. Davis was
still looking for a solution to his newest problem (D).

75
 About this problem of balancing two extremes into an
integrated whole , Roger Smith says "This principle of
balance is the original truth underlying all of medicine . "
(45 , P. 2 1 1 ) He goes on to report on a radiesthesic instru­
ment developed to obtain balance between the patient and
any of the following : illness, remedy, bioenergetic field,
diagnosis, environment. This account by Smith of the Square
Balance is extracted from Energy, Matter and Form
(45 , P. 277).

Dr. Nebel of Lausanne, Switzerland, a medical radiesthesist famous

for his accurate radiesthesic diagnoses of tuberculosis, is credited with
developing the Square Balance as a diagnostic tool. Orienting the
diagonal north-south he would place a sample of a sick patient, such as
a bloodspot on a tissue paper, in the middle of the two intersecting
diagonals and place various samples of the disease (in sealed vials) at the
end point of the east-west diagonal until he found the disease sample
which elicited a positive response through a pendulum. To find the
properly balanced remedy he would place sample remedies at the east­
west end point and test with a pendulum until he got a positive
ROGER SMITH response. To amplify the field at the center of the square even further
he would put a copper coil there. This excited the signal of the patient's
witness. Dr. Nebel became famous for diagnosing a patient without the
patient's presence. The patient would phone up to say he wanted an
appointment and the minute he walked in the door Nebel would tell
him what his problem was!

Dr. Christopher Hills then came along with more improvements and
turned the square balance into a radiation broadcaster as well as a
diagnostic tool. With this device it is possible to determine what the
problem is, what remedy is needed, and then broadcast the energetic
pattern of the remedy to the patient.

76
HEALTH BALANCE

It is worth noting that as early as 1 924, Dr. Albert Abrams,

a brilliant San Francisco physician and one of the early
pioneers in biomagnetic research, made the following
observation relating to the qualitative differences between
positive and negative magnetic energy : " Let a subject with
normal hearing listen to the tick of a watch at the threshold
of perception and it will be observed that when the positive
pole of a bar magnet is held close to the external auditory
meatus, audition is increased. When the negative end of the
magnet is used the audition is decreased. Both ears show a
like reaction, and this method of differing polar energy is
worthy of further investigation " (2, P. 1 9).

Roger Smith says of Dr. Abrams, "[he ] discovered that disease could
be dealt with as a vibratory phenomenon, and therefore simplified the
whole business of proper diagnosis a thousand times . . . Abrams had
reached the fundamental understanding that the human nervous system
is an extremely sensitive receiver, more so than any electronic device,
constantly taking in all the different vibrations radiating in from the
universe and somehow distinguishing them from each other . . . His
work was a practical example of effective therapy using electro-vibratory
fields instead of a surgeon's knife or massive chemical suppression of
symptoms (45, P. 25 2). "

77
SOMATIC POLARITIES Wherever there · is magnetism there is also, of necessity,
differing polarities -- no system, inanimate or organic, should
be excepted from this rule. Accordingly, while the entire
human structure has its intrinsic magnetization, polarities are
found to vary throughout the body. Dr. Tomlinson has, in
fact, pointed out that the skin is the boundary phase between
the very complex electromagnetic forces of the internal part
of the body and the exterior world ( 1 0, P. 54). We can
conceive, then, of each organ or system as having a magnetic
field peculiar to itself. The field produced by the brain, for
example, would differ from that produced by the heart, and
the liver's magnetic field would be distinct from that of the
lungs, and so on. Following this rationale, it is the aggregate
formation of the fields belonging to each organ that gives the
body its overall characteristic somatic, magnetic waveform.
The strength of the magnetic fields produced by the human
body are said to be in the micro-gauss range (C-2).

Using a very sensitive measuring device which he construct­

ed especially for his work, Dr. Davis has laboriously charted
the human body 's changing electrical polarities (D-3), as they
manifest at the surface of the body. He had found that the
front of the head is negative and the back positive. The base
of the spine, he asserts, is the site of a strong positive energy
point, while the rest of the spine is negative in polarity. The
base of the head is also strongly positive, he says. Thus, the
negative spine is bounded on either end by centers of
considerable positive energy. Davis further indicates that the
testicles are positive, and the urethral tube negative, and that
shoulders that were weak, sprained , or had internal cold
effects, showed a higher than normal positive voltage,
compared to normal systems. His measurements further
indicated that at the site of a broken bone, the body supplies
high negative voltage, but as healing takes place, the normal
voltage of that section of the limb is restored.

78
 Considering body polarities from an overall perspective,
Davis maintains that the right side of the body is positive
with respect to the negative left side, and that the hands,
particularly, give off considerable magnetic energy . *

In contrasting the electrical polarities o f humans with those

of animals, Dr. Davis notes that quadruped animals, large and
small, show remarkable similarities to humans in terms of the
polarity and location of somatic voltages. Both healthy and
sick humans and animals were measured for the electrical
potentials at various locations on their bodies ; a correspon­
dence in both polarity and location was found (D-3). It was
further noted that sick, weak, and old subjects generally
produced lower voltage readings than those of healthy, strong,
young subjects. Davis maintains that while the location and
polarity of the various electrical energies about the body
remain the same for all individuals, their values or strengths
will differ from one person to the next (D-3 ).

fill •..... -� ..
.-_.t. oaol - caMallo
"""'· '- ""'. ...
- .. ....-. •n;• •
� ... .. ..... ...
_ ...... ..... .... lf'O'Uil
- · "'"""'"' '"-'
t o lloo � .... ol iloo lwool
..., u.. ..., - ...... .. :.j
lloo .,OII< OI>•lf
lo t'l••- � ...
_.... .......-. ...,

* Th is e nergy apparently can be transferred to other h umans, to a n imals,

or to plants --- hence a possi ble basis for "heal i ng hands." Some persons
who h ave an exceptional facil ity for effecti ng cures by the l ay i ng on of
h ands h ave reported fee l i ng d rai ned or weakened after a heal i ng session.
Th is is presumedly due to the l oss of their own energy as it flows
th rough their h ands and i nto the body of the person being treated.

79
 Nor are polarity differences unrelated to differences of sex.
Dr. Abrams, in his research, found that the male polarity is
positive and the female, negative (2, P. 22). In his diagnostic
methods of evoking a stomach reflex to determine physical
illness, Abrams was able to distinguish between a female
polarity response and a male polarity response (2, P. 22).

Another peculiarity in relation to somatic polarities and

magnetic fields, involves the position of the body with
respect to the field. Dr. Madeline Barnothy has shown in
experiments with mice that certain biological effects in a
magnetic field depend on the animal's position relative to
the field ( 1 , P. 1 24).

Dr. Sierra assures us that when sleeping or resting in a prone

position, the orientation of one's body in relation to the
earth's magnetic field, matters. The position in sleeping
should be with the head towards magnetic north, and the feet
towards magnetic south. This way, he explains, the flow of
the earth's magnetism follows the natural lines of force of the
human body. In this position, the body offers minimum
impedance to the earth's magnetic flow as it functions to
recharge the body while at rest (C).

To induce relaxation or sleep, Dr. Sierra places the north

pole of a magnet to the front of the head and the south pole
to the back. This placement corresponds to the body's natural
electrical polarity in these two locations. If placement of the
magnets is reversed, i e . positive to the front of the head and
negative to the back of the head, human subjects become
dizzy. The same kind of reversed magnetic polarity if applied
to the head of a small animal can render it unconscious (C),
(C-2).

80
Dr. Ralph Sierra, i n h i s Puerto R ico Laboratory, demonstrated the path fol lowed by the
magnetic l ines of force of a small bar magnet. The magnet is located at the lower end of
the penci l-l i ke device placed in a glass of water. A powdered ferromagnetic substance
previously placed in the water is seen to conform to a kind of "figure-eight" shape
which indicates the force-field configuration established by the magnet.

81
 One way to test the validity of biomagnetic field research
according to Dr. Massy is to use a divining rod or pendulum.
Following in the steps of Turenne and Abrams he points out
that both Moses and Aaron used divining rods to tap into the
knowledge of the universal field. Massy does state that
information obtained in this manner should be verified by
other techniques wherever possible .

In Alive to the Universe ( 48, P. 42-44) Massy shows how to

detect the north and south polarities from a simple compass
magnet. A pendulum tuned to resonate with the operator's
nervous system will rotate clockwise over a north pole and
anti-clockwise over a south pole. " The pendulum, " Massy
states, " acts as an extension of the neuromuscular nervous
system. It is an amplifier of a biofeedback signal. Without
the operator the pendulum is useless, as it is in the hands of
an untrained operator. "

Using a pendulum specifically designed to record life

forces ( 48, P. 89) Massy shows that the energies coming from
a healthy right hand are positive from the palm and negative
from the back, and that the fingers emit energies of alternating
polarities ( 48, P. 60). He also demonstrates how to detect
trouble spots in the b ody from the negative fields they give
off, a technique he calls aura b alancing. When these energies
are removed and replaced with positive healing energies, an
instantaneous sensation of well-being is experienced. This
method of energy balancing involves the chakras as dealt
with in Part 11 of this book.

A good diviner can obtain yes or no answers to any question

via his pendulum or rod and thus quicken the pace of his own
research as well as test the results of others.

82
Roger Smith ( left) and Phil Alien, co-authors of Energy, Matter and Form (45), the second volume in
The Supersensitive Life ofMan series of consciousness research books published by the University of the Trees
Press.

Carrying on from my work, Roger Smith and Phil Allen have

put together an experimental guide to the pioneering work now
being done which offers some radically new visions of our
hidden creative potentials. Their book proceeds step-by-step
through experiments with bioenergetics and chakra dynamics to
the new discoveries which are showing that the material
universe may just be a holographic representation within our
consciousness, an incredible feat of creative imagination. Our
divining faculty, or radiesthesic supersense, is a good example.
The fact that we can tune our electro-vibratory nervous antenna
to someone a thousand miles away and accurately determine
their state of health is a convincing display of these capabilities
we all share.

New equipment and instruments are also described in their

book which enable anyone to test the results of vibrational
resonance on which the new theories of Supersensonic psycho­
physical energies depend

83
 GEOMAGNETI S M
AND
BIOLO GICAL SYS TEM S
GEOMAGNETISM AND BIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS

85
GEOMAGNETIC TRENDS It will be recalled that the main component of the earth 's
IN BIOLOGICAL field, its dipole aspect, is visualized as being similar to that
EVOLUTION produced by a permanent bar magnet, wherein the intensity
of the magnetic field strength decreases from the polar
extremities, where it is always strongest, towards a null area
at the magnet's mid-point, the magnetic equator. There is
abundant evidence which suggests that this basic geomagnetic
dipole field periodically reverses itself, and in so doing,
modifies extant biological systems.

By extracting circular drill cores from the sides of ancient

volcanoes, geologists can determine, by various dating
methods, what the earth's magnetism was like thousands,
even millions of years ago. One report, based on the atomic
dating of volcanic rock, shows that the earth's field has
reversed no fewer than nine times within the last four million
years (22, P. 1 20). Amplifying this position, Dr. P. J. Smith
of England points out that the earth 's field polarity has
reversed numerous times since four and a half million years
ago ( 1 7, P. 25 1 -255). Japanese researcher Dr. T. Nagata
further substantiates this with the observation that one such
reversal occurred about a million years ago, at which time the
strength of the magnetic field was smaller than at present
(3 , P. 440). British Professor E. C. Bullard gives additional
credence to the question of field reversals in stating that
" reversals take place in a surprisingly short time, probably in
one or two thousand years " ( 1 7, P. 7 1 ). And further on the
point of "reversal periodicity," Dr. D. W. Alien of Cambridge
University believes that the earth's main field may have
oscillation periods of several thousand years, and reversals of
the field at intervals of hundreds of thousands of years (D- 1 ).

Within recent years it has been demonstrated that ocean

sediments are magnetized in the direction of the prevailing
earth 's field at the time of deposition. Based on investigations
of fossil magnetism of deep sea sediments, John Foster of the
Columbia University Geological Observatory reveals that the
layers of sea sediments which recorded reversals were

86
correlated with layers that indicated an abrupt change in the
populations of tiny marine animals (22, P. 1 66). Supporting
these findings are Brian Funnel and Christopher Harrison of
the Scripps Institution of Oceanography ; they have reported
a similar correlation of mass extinction of marine life in
mid-Pacific sediments, which dates at 700,000 years ago, the
time of the last geomagnetic reversal (22, P. 1 1 7).
It is explained that during a reversal, the strength of the
field gradually wanes, eventually reaching a minimum, where­
upon it begins building up again in the opposite direction.
The ultimate outcome is a complete switch in the relative
positions of the north and south poles.

In 1 968, physicist Keith McDonald, an environmental

scientist, and Robert Gunst of the U. S . Coast and Geodetic
Survey calculated that the strength of the earth's magnetic
field has decreased by 1 5 percent since A. D. 1 670, and that
if the decline continues at its present rate, the field will fade
away completely in 2,023 years. They estimate that for 500
years before A. D. 399 1 , and for as long as 2,000 years after­
wards, the earth's field will be so weak that it will not
perform its usual function of trapping the high-velocity
radiations streaming from the sun. Such changes occurring
world-wide, the scientists explain, might cause lush valleys to
become barren wastes, deserts to bloom, icecaps to grow and
cover land areas, or to melt, thereby raising sea levels enough
to bring about massive flooding (22, P. 1 1 9).
Another team of investigators, Drs. I. K. Cain and P. C. Cain
of Australia, and Dr. M. G. Plaut of Canada, have traced
magnetic polarity conditions over a period of 3 5 0 million
years. Of particular interest in their findings is the discovery
of a peak period of geomagnetic field strength about 80
, million years ago (D-1 ). From anthropological data, we know
that this date correlates favorably with a flourishing period of
the gigantic mesozoic animals. It has been suggested that
during this time, the earth's field strength measured as much
as 3 00 gauss. Some researchers feel that certain fossil deposits
of land animals also point to a relationship between their size
and the strength of the geomagnetic field at the time of
deposition (C-2).
87
 Drs. Alien Cox and A. Brent Dalrymple, in delineating
periods of polarity reversal, explain that the present earth's
polarity has existed for about 700,000 years. For a period of
1 . 8 million years before that, called the Matuyama Epoch,
the polarity was reversed. Before that, between 3 . 36 million
and 2. 5 million years ago, there was the Gauss Epoch, during
which time the polarity was the same as it is today (D- 1 ).

Polarity Brunhes Matuyama Gauss G i l bert

epochs normal reversed normal reversed

Normal
data
F ield normal

F ield reversed
Reversed t-------;tt--t--t+t-HIHH-IIt-llt--iH---itt-iHH-1+1-+++-+---+---++--111-+--f
Data

0.0 1 .0 2.0 3.0 4.0

Potassium-Argon age, in 1 06 years
Schedule for the Earth's magnetic field reversals over the past four million years, according to U.S. Geological Survey researchers
Cox and Dalrymple.

But the study of paleological magnetic field reversals is not

j ust a straightforward geological matter, for it is further
complicated by biological speculation as to the condition of
faunal life on earth at the time of field reversal. Dr. R.J. Uffen
a Canadian Geophysicist, asserts that evolutionary surges
would occur at every polarity reversal of the earth's magnetic
field. He maintains that the geophysical field is reduced for a
short period, geologically speaking, during which time the
Van Alien radiation belts would spill on the earth's atmo­
sphere, and solar wind would bathe the earth. There would
then be high radiation dose rates and rapid evolution at a
polarity reversal ( 1 7, P. 260).

88
 Expanding on this position, Dr. D. I. Black of England
explains that certain radioactive isotopes, known to be
produced by cosmic rays and solar flares, would increase in
concentration during polarity reversal of the earth's field.
When incorporated in the genes, these isotopes could
conceivably destroy the genes from the violence of their
decay thereby resulting in mass faunal extinctions ( 1 7, P. 260).
But there has yet been no conclusive relation established
between field reversals and faunal evolutionary surges. And
som'e of the more reserved scientists maintain that such
causal evidence is still circumstantial and fragmentary.
Nevertheless, it has been suggested that the earth's magnetism
was of far greater intensity during the age of the great
mammals (ea. 80 million years ago), and that as the magnet­
ism weakened through the ages, the remains of animals found
at various levels in the earth's crust also grew smaller (C-2).

A solar prom i n ence 205,000

m i les h igh, photographed in violet l ight of the
ca lcium K l in e, July 2, 1 9 5 7 . (Hale Observatories. )

gg
 Historical records give additional evidence of the decreasing
strength of the earth's field. C. S . Gauss is the first person
known to have measured the earth's magnetic field ; this was
early in the 1 9th century. Since then, the total magnetic
moment of the earth has been steadily decreasing at the rate
of five percent its total value per century ( 1 6) . This further
means that such a rhythm of decrease would result in the
total disappearance of the field by the year 4,000. Dr. W. M.
Elsasser, however, suggests that there is evidence that in the
last few years, the rate of decline has slowed down, and that
in the near future, the earth 's magnetic field strength may
start a swing upward ( 1 6). Thus, it appears that earth's
inhabitants may not face any immediate, dire biological
consequences resulting from the extinction of the magnetic
field, or even of its reduction below tolerable limits.

If, then, the mounting evidence in favor of geomagnetic

polarity reversals as the causal factor in mass faunal changes
is accurate, we are provided with an important explanation of
how entire species of new life forms might be generated. The
lowering of the earth's field, it seems, would not only permit
harmful biological mutations to occur among extant fauna,
but could, at the same time, produce genetic mutations
conducive to the proliferation of entirely new species. Given
the foregoing conditions, we might conclude that those life
forms currently inhabiting the earth are those which through
the eons of evolution have become selectively adapted to the
present strength of the earth's magnetic field.

90
BIOLOGICAL SENSITIVITY Within the past decade, various research teams headed by
TO GEOMAGNETIC FORCES Dr. Frank A. Brown Jr. of Northwestern University have
made very significant discoveries regarding the sensitivity of
biological systems to weak magnetic fields. Working primarily
with planaria and snails, Brown has established conclusively
that even these simple biological systems readily respond to
changes in a weak magnetic environment of the order of the
earth's own. In the tests with snails, the following field
strengths were used : .04/0. 1 /0. 2/0 . 8/2/5/ 1 0 gauss (28). The
snrul s proved sensitive to all those field strengths, but beyond
certain limits, the animals apparently became confused and
no longer responded normally. It seems the snails became
saturated when the field strength exceeded certain limits.

Based on his experiments with planaria, Brown observed

that the degree of demonstrated sensitivity suggests that
planaria are steadily appraised of the earth 's natural field.
Brown reports that the degree of sensitivity is seen to surpass,
by many times, that required for the organism to become
aware of a thundercloud several miles away. Speculation is
that the magneto-receptive mechanism is in some way
associated with the photoreceptive apparatus (29). Following
a series of experiments co-authored by Dr. F. H. Barnwell,
the two researchers offer these observations :

"There remains no reasonable doubt that living systems are extra­

ordinarily sensitive to magnetic fields. By extremely simple experiments,
it is shown that highly diverse types of plants and animals may have
their orientation modified by artificial fields of the order of strength of
the geomagnetic field. The systematic and periodic alterations in the
strength and character of biological response suggest a highly differen­
tiated response mechanism within the organism . . . the nature of the
response properties suggest that the organism is normally integrated
with its geomagnetic environment to a striking degree. Clearly, the
perceptive mechanism for weak magnetic fields is not an independent
system functionally isolated from the remainder of the living organism"
( 1 ).
\

91
 .
On the basis of current research, it is now fairly certain that
the intensity of magnetic energy required to evoke behavioral
changes in most biological systems is relatively little. In this
connection, Dr. Jeno Barnothy has observed, "It is not far
fetched to assume that living creatures become not only
accustomed to the geomagnetic field as part of their natural
habitat, but that in some of them, biological processes have
evolved which could be influenced by fields of the order of
the geomagnetic field, i. e. a few tenths of an oersted " ( 1 , P. 1 1 ).

A classic demonstration in physics is to illustrate that the

- - mere movement of a coil of wire through space will set up a
flow of current in the coil ; this occurs because, as the coil
cuts through the earth's invisible lines of magnetic force, a
current flow is naturally i_n duced.

An analogous, neural mechanism is thought to be responsible

for the homing pigeon 's accuracy in flight. With a network of
sensitive nerve fibers throughout the bird's body, correspond­
ing to the experimental coil of wire, minute electrical signals
would be relayed to the brain as the pigeon flies, cutting the
geomagnetic lines of force. The character of the signals reach­
ing the brain would indicate to the bird if his geographic
bearings are correct, until he reaches the vicinity of his
destination, whereupon his visual familiarity with local land-
marks would guide him to his fmal perch. It has been noticed
_
-- ����.--------� that when a homing pigeon is released away from home, it
immediately soars upwards and swoops around in large
circles, as if sensing for the proper direction for its homeward
flight. Only after this ritual does the bird head off on its
course.

When a wire loop rotates in a mag­

netic field, the induced current
flows alternately in opposite
directions.

92
 Early investigations with pigeons suggested that their
homing apparatus was affected whenever a radio station was
established in the vicinity of their usual flight paths. Many
birds became confused as to which course of flight to take.
This led researchers to speculate that the pigeon's homing
instinct was somehow dependent upon vibrations of an
electromagnetic nature - undoubtedly those o f the earth's
magnetic field. The effect, then, of a new radio station
transmitter was that it probably presented the birds with
strange vibrations which overrode those of the normal earth's
magnetic field.

If the neurological network of planaria, snails, and pigeons

is sophisticated enough to offer an acute sensitivity to the
presence of the geomagnetic field, what then must be the
limits of human sensitivity to extremely subtle electro­
vibratory phenomena? It would be difficult to conceive of
man, with many miles of sensitive nerve fibres lacing his
entire body, as being any less responsive to very weak electro­
magnetic vibrations than are his fellow creatures of much
lower phylum.

Several investigators have commented on the acute sensitivity

of the integrated human organism to subtle electro-vibratory
energies. Dr. Henry Tomlinson, a leading British researcher in
Radiesthesia, points out that " there is no man-made instru­
ment so sensitive as the human body, which reacts to all the
forces of nature, each in a specific way" * ( 1 0, P. 45). The
early biomagnetic work of Dr. Abrams, Tomlinson says,
showed that the sensitivity of the muscular system, both
voluntary and involuntary, surpasses any human-devised
detector. Also, the findings of Dr. Kholodov seem to support
the position held by both Abrams and Tomlinson. In experi­
ments he conducted with isolated organs and tissues in a
static magnetic field, Kholodov found that a greater field
strength was required to elicit a biological response than in
experiments with an integral organism ( 1 , P. 1 96).

93
 The De La Warr researchers further substantiate the concept
of an integrated organism's extreme sensitivity to magnetic
radiation, with their discovery that magnetic effects are more
likely to be amenable to detection in terms of a whole
organism 's response in vivo, rather than in isolated tissues in
vitro (22, P. 1 2 1 - 1 22). It was this rationale, the high sensitivity
and complexity of the human nervous system, which led the
De La Warr group to prefer human subjects (as opposed to
animals) in most of their biomagnetic experiments. They
point out that the human organism has evolved as a system of
great precision, constantly adjusting itself to changes, and is
incredibly sensitive to all energies. Accordingly, the
De La Warr-invented " Reflexograph" , records · the actual
physical change that takes place when the human body is
subjected to various kinds of energy radiations, including
light, sound, and magnetism. When a magnet is held near the
seventh cervical vertebra, the reflexograph detects a reflex
movement at the wrist. A single 7 5 ampere solenoid placed
at the neck was sufficient to elicit a reflex response as remote
as the ankle - so sensitive is the body to magnetic radiation
(8, P. 1 7). Because of their findings, the De La Warr investi­
gators have been led to postulate that all human tissue is
capable of responding to some sort of magnetic influence,
even though the complexity, or strength of the field may
vary in many instances.

* Some physicists may challenge Tom l i nson 's statement on the grou nds
that the body does not register radio frequencies or other such subtle
radiations; however, Tom l i nson is speaking as a trained radiesthesist
with a high ly developed sense of perception.

94
A De La Warr photograph sh owing th ree magnetic fields being applied simu ltaneously to
different parts of the body. The apparatus i n use, cal led the MT/3, is capable of handling
as many as ten solenoids at one time. R esearchers claim that body tissues in proxi m ity
to and d istant [Link] the fields show a response to externally appl ied magentism.

95
 Leonard P. Corte, Director
De La Warr Laboratory

Demonstrating the sensitivity of the human being to magnetism.

A bar magnet is held one inch from the 7th cervical vertebra and
the reflex action is recorded by the reflexograph.

96
 Continuing, this same group of scientists reports that human
tissues have the capacity to transduce pressure waves, e. g.
sound waves into electrical stimuli primarily by means of the
pacinian corpuscles (also known as "mechanoreceptors" )
located in the body tissues. The frequency range of the
human body 's transducing cells is said to lie between 5 0 and
800 cycles per second ( 1 1 , P. 1 3). It is suggested that
combined sonic frequencies can effect a state of resonance
with specific cell structures, particularly for therapeutic
purposes. The De La Warr group explains that the frequency
transmission faculty of tissues will vary with their state of
health, and with whatever extraneous energy that happens to
be acting upon them at the time of transmission ( 1 1 , P. 54).

Researcher-writer George Lakhovsky believes that the

human organism is very delicately balanced within the matrix
of natural radiating forces present in the earth's environment.
He maintains that because of the irregular distribution of
mineral constituents within the earth's surface some radiations
of extraterrestrial origin, when they strike the earth, are
absorbed, while others are refracted, causing criss-cross
vibrations or " interruptions" to be set up. These apparently
affect the organism, disrupting normal cell division, and
producing various diseases, including cancer, which is seen to
be particularly prevalent on certain soils (25 , P. 2 1 3 ) .

And then, there is a very curious report of organismic

sensitivity to magnetic fields related by Dr. Bhattacharya,
that at a certain magnet manufacturing company, all of the
married male workers have produced only male offspring
since their employment with the firm. For over seven hours a
day, the men are engaged in the production and processing of
various types of magnets. Bhattacharya suggests that this is a
phenomenon worthy of closer investigation (22, P. 98).

In attempting to assess the sensitivity of biological systems

to electro-vibratory forces we should be clear that there are
many kinds of geophysical forces, each with its own peculiar
rhythm, to which a living system can respond.

97
 The biological rhythms of all life forms are found to be
inseparable from light, gravity, barometric pressure, and ion
density, to mention only a few of the known causative forces
operative in our environment. Thus, one is well cautioned
not to ascribe to geomagnetism, as such, all rhythmically
recurring patterns in living systems. The sun, aside from
sending forth magnetic emanations, also produces thermal
oscillations and a whole host of additional vibrations which
undoubtedly contribute, in some way, to both somatic and
behavioral changes in life forms. A particular system which is
photosensitive, for example, would respond to relative
degrees of light and darkness, whereas a change in the external
magnetic field might fail to trigger its mechanisms. Some
biomagnetic researchers, however, feel that in any considera­
tion of the various geophysical forces which can be identified
as responsible for shaping habits and behavior patterns, the
prevailing magnetic field plays a predominating role in
relation to other geophysical factors.

That there is linkage of an electro-vibratory character

binding together biomagnetic, geomagnetic, and extraterres­
trial magnetic forces, is a fairly certain proposition, which
few who have investigated the matter would dispute - the
question is one of deciphering the nature of the interconnect­
ing mechanism. Veteran philosopher-scientist Professor Oliver
Reiser has commented on the difficult task of finding a
bridge between the various. dimensions of " electro-vibratory "
energies present in the universe. He feels that " there are
certainly genic terrestrial, and celestial force-fields involved ;
but the precise relations between the bioelectric fields of the
human body and the geomagnetic and solar fields are not
clear" (3 , P. 430). Reiser has also speculated that the broad
spectrum of electro-vibratory forces associated with our sun
as well as with our galaxy as a whole, might affect the
behavior of human populations (3 , P. 463-466). He further
suggests that the sun acts as a mediator, a kind of relay
station, in conveying vibratory influences from other planets
into earth (3 , P. 436).

98
 MAGNETISM AND The use of magnetic energies to prolong and enhance life
AGING was not unknown to ancient societies. Various accounts have
come down to the present day of Asian and Egyptian rulers
who wore magnetic jewelry next to their skin, the " Divine
Force " of the magnet supposedly imparting to its wearer,
longevity, virility, and certain increased men tal powers.
Cleopatra is reputed to have used a magnet tiara on her fore­
head, which was intended to help her maintain her beauty.
And one of the Kings of Zeiland (Ceylon or Sri Lanka) is said
to have had all his meals served on plates made of load stone,
believing that this practice would preserve the vigor of his
youth. Several early writers and philosophers are reported to
have commented on the magnet's mysterious power. Homer,
Aristotle, Lucretius, and St. Augustine all left written
references to that strange " Binding" force associated with the
loads tone.

But the use of magnetism in controlling aging processes is

not limited to royalty of ancient times. In 1 964 Dr. E. K.
Maclean, a New York Gynecologist and cancer researcher,
was 64 years old, but was said to have looked 45 ; he had
been exposing himself daily to a 3 ,600 gauss magnetic field
for about 5 years. Maclean had a full head of dark brown
i hair. And he further claimed that many of his cancer patients,
T- QIMI, Or. Slwo 0<1<1 l'mlctoln Cepodo, woorlng his bt..elet-M/IIIAO t
most of them elderly individuals, had experienced a restora­
tion of their original hair pigmentation, changing in most
cases from silvery white to its natural color of their younger
years. About his research, Maclean maintains " Cancer cannot
exist in a strong magnetic field " (23).

In private conversations with Dr. Sierra, he revealed that

before he began biomagnetic research several years ago, his
hair was thinning and greying, and that he himself was
weaker and older-looking than at present. To some extent,
the writer was able to verify the truth of Dr. Sierra's claim,
by comparing his present appearance with that of an earlier
photograph which he had in his laboratory - there was a
visible difference along the lines he had indicated. The effect
of magnetism in relation to aging, insofar as humans are
concerned, has been largely confined to observational
accounts, like those related above.

99
 But a much closer look at these processes has been taken in
laboratory experiments, using small animals, particularly
mice. Dr. Jeno Barnothy reports that in one experiment the
effect of a magnetic field was to slow down mitotic cellular
activities in general ( I , P. I 00). He further points out that
magnetic influence has retarded the growth of young mice
and lengthened the gestation period of pregnant mice
( 1 , P. 1 00). Supporting this position is Dr. Leonid Repin, a
Russian scientist, who asserts that a strong magnetic field
inhibits the development of the fetus. The stronger the field,
the greater the inhibiting effect. New-born mice which had
been prenatally exposed to a magnetic field weighed 20
percent less than normal. Mice exposed to a magnetic field
when young grew bald later than those which had not been
exposed (24 ).

From a wide variety of sources, there is an amazing consis­

tency in research findings relating to the influence of magnet­
ism on the aging processes of laboratory mice. Dr. Harold
Alexander, North American Aviation Corporation, found that
mice increased their life span up to 45 percent when exposed
to magnetic fields. In one case, a mouse attained an age
equivalent to 90 years in humans (D-1 ). Dr. Robert Becker
reports that one of the early biomagnetic researchers,
L. Tchijevsky, probably by experimentally causing a decrease
in the earth's natural magnetic field, brought about a rapid
onset of death in rats beingiested under these conditions ( 1 8).
Dr. Madeline Barnothy found that animals treated in their
youth in a magnetic field reached their old age with a far
lower number of genetic errors. She claims that treatment at
an advanced age, when the genetic errors are more or less
incorporated, tended to be less effective ( I , P. 87). Dr. Sierra
reports on a pair of rats which he maintained under the
simultaneous influence of both magnetic poles. These rats, he
says, seemed as if they would never die, they acted very
friendly and were full of life at all times. The animals
eventually died when taken out of the 600 gauss field to
which they had become accustomed. Sierra concludes that

1 00
their systems had become accustomed to a high level of
magnetic energy radiation, which was transferred to all the
vital centers of their bodies, and that the rats could, therefore,
not exist in the 0. 5 gauss average of the earth's field (C- l ).

Dr. Davis, who over the years has done extensive experi­
mentation with various animals in magnetic fields, states that
the life span of a mouse can be extended or shortened by
direct and continuous exposure to certain magnetic fields. A
short exposure does not cause death, he confirms, but
prolonged exposure to high magnetic energy can cause
saturation of the animal 's body, thereby producing chemical
changes for the worse, and eventually resulting in death
(22, P. 67). Davis goes on to explain that a mouse normally
grows old in 1 1 /4 years, its activity is lowered, health fails,
aging processes set in and it usually dies within a short time.
If at the time aging processes begin, the mouse is treated with
a magnetic field of 3 ,000 to 4,200 gauss for 2 hours a day,
once in the morning and again in the evening for 3 or 4
months, it looks younger. Mice which were treated in this
way become more active, gained weight, shed all aging
symptoms and finally appeared like mice of 6 or 8 months
old. One mouse who had reached an age of 625 days, was
treated as described above and lived for another year
(22, P. 69).

On a visit to Dr. Davis' facilities, the writer saw his "labora­

tory mice, " several of which were incredibly large rodents.
These hefty creatures, Davis explained, ranged in age from a
few months to one which, at the time of this writer's investi­
gation, was almost 4 years old. Both their size and their
longevity were attributed to the specialized magnetic environ­
ments under which they were conceived and developed.

101
AUTONOMIC NERVOUS SYSTEM
AND
MAGNETIS M
AUTONOMIC NERVOUS SYSTEM AND MAGNETISM

Cerebrum �---- M idbrain

Thoracic cord

Lumbar cord

PARASYMPATHETIC SYMPATHETIC
(crania - sacral) (thoraco-lumbar)

Diagram of the autonomic nervous system. The parasympathetic system

is shown on the left, the sympathetic system on the right. Roman
numerals refer to the numbers of the cranial nerves.

1 03
BRAIN RESPONSES The total human nervous system is a network of unimagin­
able complexity, regulating varied life processes extending
from subtle glandular secretions to the more gross motor
activity of the limbs, and even to the determination of
behavioral patterns. From a biological point of view, it is the
central nervous system which administrates these disparate
functions, combining them into a coherent whole. Consequent­
ly, if magnetism is capable of affecting the central nervous
system, we might expect a concomitant influence upon those
processes dependent upon the central nervous system.
Dr. N. S . Hanoka of Harligen, Texas, has reported on some
of the Russian research fmdings in connection with the brain
and magnetism. He points out that it is definitely known that
powerful magnetic fields slow down some basic life processes,
and increase the sensitivity of certain nerves (D-1 ). There is
the further effect of lowering the brain 's responses to some
stimuli, and raising the level of reaction to other influences.
A rather disturbing effect noted by Hanoka is that of some
magnetic fields affecting the brain's ability to control normal
body motions. But a discovery of even greater magnitude,
and with farther reaching implications from a behavioral
standpoint, is that powerful magnetic fields can act directly
upon the highest center of the human brain - the cerebral
cortex (D- 1 ). *

In another area of investigation, Dr. Hanoka reports that

Russian space researchers have found that changes in the
magnetic fields of outer space can produce a decrease in the
rate of mental processes, cause weariness and distress, or
induce sleep. Additional experiments have been conducted
with fighter pilots and space ship crews in an effort to
control, by means of magnetism, emotional distress and panic
during in-flight emergencies (D- 1 ).
Animal experiments, too, have contributed to our present
understanding of magnetic-neural interactions. Working with ·
fish, Dr. M. N. L. Livanov, of the Institute of Higher Nervous

* Dr. Christopher Hills has based a whole area of study on the fact that
brain cel ls grow towards areas of greatest stimulation. (46 ) .

1 04
Activity and Neurophysiology, Moscow, found that as the
fish learned to detect magnetic force, profound changes in
brain responses occurred (D- 1 ) . In a related development,
Dr. Y. A. Kholodov, Livanov's colleague of the same institu­
tion, demonstrated, also with fish, that a magnetic field has a
biological effect, which most easily manifests itself in the
brain. The brain, he suggests, is the first organ of the body to
respond directly, without any intermediate stages, to the
app�arance of a magnetic field (24 ). Kholodov says that the
fact that a magnetic field has such an especially strong effect
on fish, can perhaps be explained by the peculiar structure of
their central nervous system, as well as by the probable
influence of the magnetic field on water ( 1 , P. 1 97).

Dr. Kholodov has also conducted experiments on other

animals in order to determine brain responses to magnetic
fields. In one test, he placed rabbits and cats in a magnetic
field for several hours, after which he studied microscopic
sections of the brain. He found that the glial cells (cells
associated with the brain neurons) were enlarged and had
increased in number apparently because of the magnetic
field. After some time, the cells regained their natural state.
The conclusion drawn was that the magnetic field somehow
interfered with the metabolism of the glial cells (24). This
same Russian researcher reveals that ionizing radiation and
high frequency magnetic fields exert direct influence on the
diencephalon of animals. In a series of experiments with
rabbits, he found that the structures of the forebrain and
diencephalon, deprived of nervous connection with the
receptors, react to a static magnetic field more often, more
rapidly, and more intensively than an intact brain ( 1 , P. 1 99).
It was assumed, on the basis of these findings, that a static
magnetic field exerts direct, non-specific action on the
central nervous system of vertebrates. Further studies at the
Moscow Institute suggest that some center in the brain acts as
a receptor of magnetic force, and that the animal's brain can
be permanently changed by magnetism to develop a magnetic
sense (D- 1 ).

1 05
 Returning to references on the human brain, it is suggested
that properly applied magnetic fields can provide beneficial
stimulation to the brain, and that some research efforts
have given rise to speculation about subtle differences between
the sexes and the magnetic orientation of the brain (D- 1 ).
Dr. Becker, speaking on the interrelationship between neural
structures, magnetic fields and human behavior, says that
" we have discovered tlrat the electromagnetic field in our
environment has a profound effect on behavior and biological
cycles. We believe the mechanism for its action is within the
central nervous system. " Becker, and a fellow biomagnetic
pioneer, Professor F. A. Brown, seem convinced, on the basis
of numerous investigations which they have conducted
independently of each other, that the bioelectric field is the
link between celestial forces and human somatic and psycho­
logical functions (23 ) * .

medulla oblongata

"The diagram shows "the Cave of B ramha" at I l l referred to

i n the Sanskrit texts as the seat of resonance with the ON E
ocean of cosmic vi brations. l t manufactures the cerebro­
spi nal fluid in IV which floats the whole brai n and spinal
nerves. The chemical Ph of the flu id determi nes the
resonance." Ch ristopher H i l ls, Supersensonics.

1 06
 Several biomagnetic investigators have verified that if the
natural polarity of a dog's brain is reversed by attaching
electrodes connected to a low voltage battery to the skull -­
positive in the front and negative in the back - that uncon­
sciousness results. Researchers maintain that a similar reversal
in the case of the human brain can cause a state of depression,
while electrodes placed in accordance with normal brain
polarity induce feelings of serenity and contentment. In
fact, it is speculated that the day is not too far off when
the manipulation of brain currents will be used as a means of
general anesthesia for surgical operations. Upon completion
of surgery, normal polarity would be restored with patient
feeling a minimum of post-operative pain.

The possibility of using magnetic therapy to correct

behavioral abnormalities caused by neural dysfunctions has
not escaped biomagnetic investigators. Dr. Bhattacharya of
India reports on two cases in particular, one of brain palsy and
the other of epilepsy, where magnetic energy provided relief
(22, P. 7 7 , and 78-90) . In both instances, a serious deviation
from normal behavior was evident when Bhattacharya first
examined the patients . But with the placement of pe �anent
magnets at certain locations of the head and/or spine, the
pathological symptoms were eliminated, without recurrence
(22, P. 77).

Together with the brain, the spine, as part of the central

nervous system, cannot be excluded from consideration as a
possible mediator of magnetic-influenced behavior, although
its role in this regard is presently much less clear than that of
the brain.

1 07
 Medical research by Dr. Aaron Friedell, M . D . and others
has shown that spinal fluids are largely alkaline in composi­
tion, and that alkalines are electrically negative, while acids
are positive. Further investigations reveal that there are seven
energy vortices located along the spine. When the individual
is ill, these centers appear to slow down in their movement,
b ut are said to speed up with the application of magnetic
energy. The locations found to respond in this m anner are
1 st, 5th and 7th cervicals, 2nd, 4th and 6th d orsals, and the
5th lumbar spine ( 2 2 , P. 1 43 ) . A m agnet applied to these
spots supposedly energizes the nervous system as a whole.

Dr. Aaron Friedell, M .D.

Author of " May You Live in

Health", $3.95, available from
University of the Trees Press.

1 08
 BRAIN RHYTHMS We have discussed the interaction of the central nervous
system with magnetic fields, mainly from the perspective o f
external fields being imposed upon the neural structures. But
it is not to be forgotten that the brain itself generates regular
energy waves of an electro-vibratory character, which are
detectable by the electroencephalograph (EEG). In the
parlance of the medical field, these brain waves are termed
" bioelectric" , and the method by which they are recorded is
quite similar to oscillatory wave detection by the electrocar­
diograph device, in that the waves emitted are first amplified
and then recorded as graphs (F).

It is generally accepted that the brain 's complex functions

are overwhelmingly electrical in nature, several different
frequencies being emitted from distinct parts of the brain's
surface. And while there seems to be some minor difference
b etween authorities as to the precise limits o f the main
recognized oscillations, the table on page 1 1 1 can be taken
as representative of the principle frequency demarcations.

1 second

N ormal rhyth m (about

10 cycles per second).
Such regular bra i n
waves, characteri stic
of the rel axed state,
are cal led al pha waves.

A l pha brai n wave

activity is here bl ocked
when the subject o pens
his eyes (arrow).

Brain waves d u ri n g
rapid eye movement ·

(REM) sleep.

1 09
 The strength of these emissions ranges from about 2 5 to 1 25
microvolts (F) . * Each individual is recognized to have a basic
oscillatory pattern peculiar to himself. This individualized
pattern will alter slightly from the brain's frontal region, to
the occipital region, to the parietal region, and so on, thus
producing minor frequency differences at each section of the
brain, but all the while retaining its overall identifying charac­
teristics. Consequently, a brain wave reading on the EEG for
a particular individual would be shown as a single waveform,
but representing the combined oscillations of all the brain 's
distinct areas.

It is also generally established that one 's rate of breathing,

as well as sound vibrations and externally imposed magnetic
fields, can considerably alter brain-generated frequencies (F).
And according to some authors, every mental activity can be
identified with its own peculiar frequency. Thus the modes
of altering, orientating, and discriminative behavior would
each have their specific rates of vibration, just as would fear,
joy, love and hate. * * Following this view, no human emotion
or mental activity should be without its associated and
characteristic vibration.

* I n an ex perimental situation at the M . l . T. , D r. David Cohen has a

room shielded from the earth's magnetic field, i n which he can study
m agnetic fluctuations as small as that produced by the Alpha R hythm
of the human bra i n . This frequency is detectable just outside the head
and is said to measure about one ten-bi l l ionth of a gauss ( C-2) .

* * Current research does not fu l l y su pport th is claim, since apparently

under some circumstances different mental activities have s i m i l ar
frequencies, and since the same frequency is someti mes associ ated with
different mental activities.

I nventor Lee Tracy and the B ritish E lectronics firm of Alien I nterna­
tional h ave produced a mach ine designed for control l i ng riotous crowds
or u nrul y i nd ividuals. The device reportedly emits u ltra-son ic sound
waves, i n conjunction with u ltra-visibl e l i ght waves, wh ich interfere
with the normal Alpha and Beta wave patterns of the human brain.
Persons exposed to these emissions are said to experience i l l ness, vom it­
i ng, and a general disorientation of the i r wi l l fu l behavior ( 2 1 ) .

1 10
 BR A IN W A VE FR E QU ENCY
IN HERTZ

Delta Rhythm 1 to 3 1 /2
Theta Rhythm 4 to 7
Alpha Rhythm 8 to 13
Beta Rhythm 1 4 to 30

Characteristic output freq uencies

of E E G waves i n various regions
of the scalp (1 Hz = 1 cycle p e r
secon d ) .

Dr. Christopher Hills in his book Nuclear Evolution : The

Discovery of the Rainbow Body, carries these ideas over into
the theory that the human nervous system is both an absorber
and radiator of light energies and cosmic rays and that these
are controlled by the level of consciousness of each individual.
He explains that the brain operates as a small radio transmit­
ter and receiver, the wavelength or frequency on which it
operates varying with the individual 's physical and mental
development. He feels that what we call intelligence is largely
governed by the stage of the brain's development, and its
consequent frequency potentials.

Davis considers that the magnetic fields produced by the

human brain, in effect, act as invisible receptors, antennae,
which pick up various signals from the environment and
translate them into emotional attitudes, moods, and intuitive
responses.

Ill
 Nevertheless, the four major frequency plateaus known to
be produced by the human brain are also known not to travel
more than a few inches, or at most, a few feet away from the
surface of the skull. Hence, any information impressed upon
these carrier frequencies would also terminate just beyond the
brain's outer boundary. However, the Russians are reported
to have recently discovered a brain-generated frequency of
one hundred million (1 00,000,000) cycles per second, and
have named it the " Ultra-Theta" . Vibrating at this rate, in
excess of the rate of television waves, Davis confirms that it
would be capable of extending around the world, and could
provide an explanation for telepathic transmission from brain
to brain, over extremely long distances (D)* . This then,
suggests an incredible range of frequencies attainable by the
human brain - vibrations extending from 1 to 1 00 ,000,000
cycles per second - truly an astounding thing to ponder!
And if, indeed , this latest alleged discovery is fact, then it
suggests that the popularly recognized rhythms detected by
the EEG are merely the beginning, that there may be multitu­
dinous frequencies intervening between the Beta Rhythms
and the " new Ultra-Theta. " One can only imagine to what
behavioral modes or states of consciousness such frequencies
would correspond.

Having mentioned brain rhythms, a brief consideration

should be given to those structures thought to be responsible
for their production. The popular view held by most EEG
specialists is that the hypothalamus and the reticular forma­
tion are major emission centers of brain waves, and that the
cerebrum has a damping effect on the vibrations emitted by
these lower parts of the brain.

* Physicist Zoltan Tarczy-Hornoch points out that not only frequency

but also field strength must also be considered i n this i nstance and that
the l ow field strength of known brainwaves would make it u n l i kely that
they would be transmitted far from the surface of the head .

1 12
 The cerebrum, then, acts as a kind of modulation center,
gathering distinct oscillations from several sections of the
brain into a single waveform, the end product (F). Com­
menting in connection with work carried out in his labora­
tory, Dr. Becker explains that galvanomagnetic effects, how­
ever small, are obtained in the human nervous system ; these
effects, he explains, are the result of interaction between the
flow of direct current electricity and steady or pulsating
magnetic fields. Becker believes that the brain stem reticular
formation is responsible for the creation of these neuro­
biological currents. He further suggests that the magnitude
and perhaps the polarity of cerebral current-flow directly
determines the level of consciousness. ( 1 8).

It is curious to note that our level of consciousness

( "awakeness"), and possibly our level of intellectual or
mental awareness, is associated with definite brain wave
patterns. EEG investigators know that when the subject
being tested is sleeping, the brain frequency is slower and the
amplitude higher than when awake (F). Dr. Becker has
elaborated on animal experiments which positively show that
a magnetic field of proper magnitude and orientation can
reduce consciousness to levels associated with general anes­
thesia, as judged by the EEG ( 1 8) . In every instance when
field strengths of 2 ,500 gauss or more were applied, the EEG
pattern changed from that of a moderate amplitude Alpha to
a high amplitude Delta type wave, which is characteristic of
moderate to deep anesthesia. In such cases, the animal
remained immobilized within the field of the magnet ( 1 8) .
An additional implication growing out o f these same experi­
ments was that certain magnetic fields might be capable of
changing the level of neural irritability sufficiently to
produce a deterioration in the performance of complex
tasks. And in this connection, we are reminded of the
magnetic researcher's claim that one's level of mental develop­
ment is greatly governed by the brain's frequency potentials.
If this assessment holds, it may eventually be possible to
evolve a system of determining certain mental faculties
according to cerebral frequency emissions.

1 13
 Dr. Christopher Hills, in his book Supersensonics, sets out
the specific frequency of each chakra which he claims operates
in a "subtle matter" range and outlines new instruments
which record the neuro-muscular detection of these energies.

NEURAL STIMULATION Various kinds of instruments and procedures have been used
DEVICES to administer magnetic treatment to the human nervous
system. The three situations described below involve perma­
nent magnetic or geomagnetic energies, and are reportedly
effective therapeutic approaches.

In 1 92 1 , A. E. Baines first described his therapeutic invention,

called 1 1Vitic. 11 This device consisted of two horseshoe-shaped
magnets mounted several inches apart so that their poles
attracted each other. In the middle of the field created by the
two magnets, a steel rod was mounted. For treatment, a
subject merely placed his left hand around the steel rod,
while his right hand grasped a rod of graphite, which was also
an integral component of that Vitic apparatus. Once the
hands were in position, waves of magnetic energy were said
to suffuse the entire body . It was recommended that Vitic
treatment be administered once a day for ten minutes only,
as excessive use of the device was supposed to cause over­
stimulation, with insomnia as a result. The beneficial effects
claimed for Vitic were both biological and psychological.
Aside from the toning and generally increased vitality of all
'
the b ody's internal organs, the Vitic was thought to stimulate
the body's "nerve force, 11 thereby yielding positive results in
cases o f nervous break-down (22, P. 1 25-1 3 1 ).

The picture shows a Hefigar, a modern

version of the Vitic apparatus, that i ncor­
porates concepts of stimu lated wave propa­
gation. (42, P. 1 3 1 )

1 14
 I n conversations with Dr. Sierra, h e revealed that i t is
possible to use magnetism in the treatment of irritability and
depression associated with menopause. And in b asic concept,
Sierra's application of the magnetic force is similar to that
. described above with the "Vitic" device. The subject is
situated so that five magnets of 3 ,000 gauss each can be
placed at various locations surrounding the body ; she remains
relaxed in this field for a half hour. Sierra explains that either
abnormal depression or elation, represents a disturbance of
the optimum frequency of the woman 's own biomagnetic
field. The objective of the magnetic treatment is to restore
the individual's normal somatic magnetic balance. As a rule,
treatment of emotional disturbances require that both negative
and positive polar energies be applied simultaneously. To
\.'- ,,
V lT l C 'P£'V t C E: accomplish this, Sierra uses permanent horseshoe-type
magnets (C).

Another technique, but involving a preventative rather than

a correctional therapeutic approach, was related by the
Russians. Apparently, in some of their hospitals, they have
constructed special rooms shielded with nickel, cobalt, and
steel . * At times o f solar disruptions or solar-generated
magnetic storms, all critical heart and mental patients are
moved into these shielded rooms. Evidently, doctors had
observed over a period of time that patients suffereing from
mental and heart conditions, experience particularly violent
reactions during solar disturbances. The effect of the shielded
room is to cause the magnetic energy emitted by the sun, to
flow around the patients, rather than to penetrate their
bodies, as it otherwise would, thereby worsening an already
precariously balanced condition.

* Dr. Reiter of the Physi kal isch Biokl imatiszhe Forschungsstel le,
Skistadion, Westtor, 8 1 -Garmisch-Partenkirchen, Germany, refutes this
claim and says i n B iometeorology, volume 5, part I l l , that such
shielding makes no d ifference.

115
BIOCLIMATOLO GY
AND
IONOTHERAPY
BIOCLIMATOLOGY AND IONOTHERAPY
The effects of air ions

Biocl imatology is a vast new field of medical knowledge, which demon­

strates that the air we breathe has a profound infl uence on our wel l­
being. Air ions can affect our endocrine, vegetative and autonomous
reactions. Dr. F. G. Sulman, Health, Weather and Climate (4 7).

1 17
 Man's notion that his meteorological, geophysical surround­
ings impinge upon the shape and direction of his social
behavior, has probably persisted for as long as has man himself.
Oral and written folk traditions of many cultures and many
ages speak of regionalized personality differences between
groups of people, owing to variations. of environment. Plato
is reported as once having expressed the idea that people
from areas of abundant sunshine exhibited more buoyancy
of spirit than did individuals from areas of persistent cloudi­
ness. Even today, such axiomatic expressions as "hot-natured
Latins, " "the cold British," carry with them the inherent idea
that climatic phenomena somehow condition human person­
alities and behavior.

Researchers of our scientific age have compiled voluminous

data and theories suggesting that the industrial and intellect­
tual activity and creativity of homo sapiens bear an intimate
association with such meteorological parameters as temper­
ature, environmental air pressure, and sun-spot cycles. But
establishing infallible scientific evidence for a causal relation­
ship between isolated meteorological features and general or
specific aspects of human behavior is a fairly complicated
business. The innate truth of colloquial folk axioms is one
thing, but the truth demanded by science is quite another.
Dr. Reinhold Reiter, Chairman of a Study Group of the
International Society of Biometeorology, Lied en, Holland,
and Director of an Institute for Atmospheric Environmental
Research in Germany, has pointed out that a causal connec­
tion between atmospheric phenomena and human biological/
behavior processes is by no means clarified, not even now in
the era of large-scale explorations of our atmosphere (I), (I-1 ).
For Reiter, atmospheric forces are complex and interde­
pendent - likewise are the multitudinous variables deter­
mining human behavior. And thus far, no experimental
research model has been devised which is capable of control­
ling all the variables involved except those under investigation.
He explains that the human organism is exposed to the total
complex of the "bioclimate, " and that the concept of bio­
climate cannot accurately be isolated into individual groups
of elements for separate scrutiny (I-1 ).

1 18
STATIC FIELDS Experimental scientific evidence for an environmental
electric field influence directly upon human behavior is very
sparse. And what few investigations there have been in this
direction seem to be generally incomplete, and are sometimes
conflicting. Based on available research findings, Dr. Reiter,
a Physicist, thinks that science cannot, at this point, make a
conclusive interpretation o f electric field effects upon human
behavior. In fact, he remains somewhat sceptical that any
direct causal tie-in between electric fields* and behavior
might be found - and he talked about some of the principal
reasons why (I).

In both outdoor and indoor situations, Dr. Reiter explained,

naturally existing static voltages can be detected - but
because of the nature of non-alternating charges, no static
electric field will penetrate into areas enclosed by solid or
liquid substances - this includes the human body. According
to Reiter, any static field existing within such enclosed areas
must originate from inside the area itself. Consequently, no
static field exterior to the human body would be expected to
produce internal physiological changes and thereby bring
about altered behavior (1). However, in his laboratory, Reiter
demonstrated to the writer that very sizeable static electric
discharges caused by the friction of clothing can be measured
at the surface of the skin. Using a voltmeter designed to
register static charges, Reiter showed voltages o ccurring as
high as 1 0,000 volts per centimeter, just by the friction of
clothes against the body. This factor, he feels should not be
overlooked in any assessment involving possible causal rela­
tions between static fields and human biology/behavior (1).

Additional evidence from Dr. S.W. Tromp, President, Inter­

national Society o f Biometeorology , suggests that electro­
static charges at skin surfaces may be important to human
biology. In his book, "Psychical Physics," Tromp observes
that several experiments have established that some persons,
more than o thers, are sensitive to electromagnetic currents.
This phenomenon, he says, is related to the electrical resist­
ance of the skin, which varies with the individual, and varies

*An "electric field " is usually associated with a static charge, as

contrasted to a m agnetic fiel d which is produced by charges in motion ;
although static m agnetic fields are known to exist wherein charges do
not h ave to be motion ( A ) .

1 19
 for different parts of the body, the resistance being lowest in
the center of the palm of the hand (3 5 , P. 1 8 5 , 260, 3 28).
According to Tromp, it seems theoretically possible that
under special atmospheric conditions where there is a high
amount of electric tension present within a given area (the
potential gradient), together with increased air-earth electric
current,* certain nerve endings in the skin of people with low
resistance are stimulated (35 , P. 260). Reiter explains this
skin receptivity to environmental electricity by the fact that
under certain static field conditions, ions (discussed later) can
attach themselves to the surface of the skin, whereupon
neurological sensitivity could be affected (I). About static
fields, Reiter further commented that the topographic
configuration of the earth's surface can modify the strength
of the environmental electrostatic field. In a steep valley, he
noted, the normal electric field of the atmosphere does not
penetrate fully, while on a mountain top the atmospheric
Topographic d istribution
forces are at maximum. But as this fact might relate to
of negative ions.
behavior, Reiter thinks it is too simplistic an answer for why
some people are reported to feel " great " on a mountain top,
but depressed in a valley (I).

* The positively charged electric field of the atmosphere and the

negatively charged earth's crust together create an air-earth electric
current wh ich continuously neutral ize, or balance each other (35, P. 248),
According to Tromp, it has been demonstrated that the u pper part of
cumulo-n i m bus clouds practically always has a positive charge, the base
being negative. If the electric charges at d i fferent parts of the clouds are
sufficiently great, a flash of l ightning occurs, reach ing earth usually as a
negative charge. The negative base of n i m bus clouds i nduces a positive
charge on the surface of the earth which, as a direct result, repulses the
positive ions of the atmosphere (35, P. 249) .

1 20
ALTERNATING FIELDS Dr. Reiter also discussed the possibility of alternating fields
influencing human behavior. It is certainly theoretically
possible, he expanded, that alternating electric fields, e. g.
disturbed atmospheric conditions or high power lines, can
penetrate the body and affect the nervous system, thereby
affecting reaction time. The human body, he explained, is a
semi-conductor, which means that the proper vibration could
set into motion certain electrolytic ions inside the body. In
this instance, biological/behavioral effects could be produced
(1). 'In fact, one researcher, Hammer ( 1 969), reported an
influence of low-frequency alternating electric fields upon
the human faculty of decision-making (I- 1 ). Similarly, Tromp
reveals that ultra-short wave transmitters have been alleged to
cause behavioral disturbances in men working in front of
them. The head, he says, seems to be the most sensitive part
of the body in this connection.

Among the notable human reactions to Hertzian phenomena

are : fatigue, apathy, nervousness, distress, and insomnia, the
symptom depending, in part, on the frequency and the length
of time one is exposed to it (3 5 , P. 284). But as his position
requires that he keep abreast of the work done by researchers
in this field, Reiter feels that previous reports are unsatisfac­
tory, and that improved research techniques need to be
devised and experiments conducted wherein all environmental
conditions are kept constant. The experimental evidence so
far, he cautioned, is neither convincing nor conclusive - it is
still very much an open problem (1).

Dr. Reiter, who displays a very deliberate scientific

approach, generally agrees that environmental electromagnetic
parameters may, under given conditions, have a very significant
effect on human biology, particularly as regards charged
small ions. Invariably, he explained, the question of electric
field force influences upon the human system is ultimately
reduced to ions, i. e. what the field is doing to the charged
aerosol particles (I). But before turning to a fuller considera­
tion of air ions, another branch of Reiter's investigations
merits review.

1 21
SPHERIC PULSES In 1 960 Reiter, using about one million bits of data,
revealed with statistical certainty that certain tropospheric
frequencies termed " spheric pulses , " do exert a meaningful
influence upon human behavioral patterns. Spheric pulses are
described as electric discharges in the troposphere -- not
necessarily lightning in a strict sense -- which emit electro­
magnetic pulses that are known to enter into biological
systems, including the human body, on a wide front (1- 1 ).
It was discovered that an increase in spheric pulse frequency
in the range between 1 0 kilocycles and 1 00 kilocycles bore a
positive relationship to increases in births, deaths, and traffic
and industrial accidents. It was further revealed that human
reaction time was influenced by these same spheric frequency
p atterns. Reiter, however, maintains that even with such
abundant and compelling statistical correlations it is not
permissible to consider spherics as a causative factor with
absolute certainty, pending further experimental confirma­
tion (1- 1 ). Spherics, according to Reiter, are of a large-scale
nature, spreading along the surface o f the earth at the speed
of light, and moving within a wide spectrum between a few
kilocycles and several hundred kilocycles. Spheric pulses
easily penetrate into buildings of stone and concrete, and to a
lesser extent, into structures made of metal. Spherics, Reiter
asserts, are clearly connected with large-scale meterorologic
developments (1- 1 ).

DR. REINHOLD REITER

1 22
IONS IN THE Electrical charges of the atmosphere are called " ions" . An
ENVIRONMENT ion is an atom which has gained or lost an electron. If the
atom loses an electron, it becomes positive, while the addition
of an electron makes it a negative ion. Generally speaking, air
ions are classified according to their size : small (molecules),
medium (tiny particles), and large (dust). Of most immediate
concern to us here are the small ions, for it is they that are
the most mobile of the three categories and, for that reason,
play a central role in atmospheric influences upon the human
system.

+ e- � O.x�gen
Ox�gen
Atom � electron
�
A.
-7' � ;on
nega tivei!:J charged

It is useful to review some of the main sources of air ioniza­

tion within the earth's atmosphere. Small ions, those
electrically charted clusters of molecules of atmospheric
gases, of both positive and negative polarity, are naturally
generated by radiation processes, radioactive fallout, cosmic
(non-solar) sources, natural radioactive materials in the
atmosphere, and some aspects of solar radiations lying
beyond the ultraviolet range, particularly during solar disrup­
tions (I). Dr. S. W. Tromp has pointed out that the ionization
capacity of different properties of radioactive substances in
the upper part of the earth's crust seems to be of importance
for living bodies (3 5 , P. 236). Extending this concept, Tromp
explains that the air present in the pores of the soil and in
larger subterranean cavitites is continually ionized by external
radiations in combination with local mineral deposits. In this
connection, radium-examination is a main ionizing factor in
the soil (3 5 , P. 238). This, plus other localized conditions,
e . g. the presence of large airborne mineral components (dust
and precipitation), can alter the rate of air ionization from
one geographical position on the earth to another (3 5 , P. 246).

1 23
 The production of air ions varies not only in space, but also
in time. Dr. Reiter advises that the rate of ionization is
influenced by air pressure. As air pressure changes from day
to day and from season to season, the rate of ionization due
Nu n'\ber of i one. per to solar and cosmic sources also varies (1).
cubic centim eter of air
In addition to identifying natural air ion-producing sources*
and their variation with time and geography, investigators
1 0 00
pay close attention to the relative values of ion concentrations
and ion ratios - how these two factors differ under varying
circumstances. The period of time over which small ions
maintain their effective radiation (their "half-life " ) depends
on the amount of pollutants in the air. The cleaner the air,
the longer the half-life of small ions, especially on high
mountains (I). Clean air means high concentration of small
50 0 ions, providing there is an ionization source present. A simple
rule given by Reiter is : the lower the visibility the lower
the small ion concentration ; this is because low visibility
means the presence o f many large particles onto which the
small ions very readily attach. Foggy or dusty environments
are low in small ion concentration (1). Usually small air ions
exist in a proportion of 5 positive to 4 negative ions. In the
10
open country in conditions of sunshine, 400 to 5 00 air ions
1\\\\\1 3
crowded open su nn.Y mou nttll i n
per cm are found. Values can go up to 1 ,000 in the
c i ties countr� t-ops mountains and down to 1 0 in crowded cities (K-2).

Air ion ratio variations, Dr. Reiter reveals, occur in the free
atmosphere under normal conditions, the ratio depending on
the strength and polarity of the environmental electrostatic

* According to researcher Charles Topley, there are several places in the

world where cascades or waterfalls are capable of producing a fine spray
which holds a negative charge. The inhalation of such a spray can have a
curative, cal m i ng effect ( K ) .
Another author, Joseph B. Davis, M . D. , reports o n repeated measure­
ments, taken at the health spa, Bad-Gastein, which revealed that in the
v ici nity of waterfalls there were up to 37,000 small negatively charged
ions/cc of air, whereas control measurements on the same days of a
d istance from the falls were consistently 800 or less ions/cc of air ( K-6 ) .
Based o n measurements h e has taken, Topley also confirms that
coniferous trees give off a considerable amount of negative ions i nto the
surrounding atmosphere, more than does any other tree he has yet
investigated ( K ) .

1 24
 field. The normal electrostatic polarity of an outdoor
+ + + + + + environment is that of a positive charge in the air space above
+ + Po s itive + + the earth, and a negative charge at the surface of the earth
itself. Between the two polarities of this electric atmospheric
Atmospher i c Cha rg e field, there is a continuous movement of ionic charges, both
+ + +- + + + towards the positive air space above and the negative earth
below. The ratio of positive to negative ions is known to
remain fairly constant under normal conditions. * But with a
disturbed atmosphere, such as a thunderstorm, the polarity
of the atmospheric field can be reversed, which correspond­
ingly reverses the flow of ionic charges. Under these condi­
E a rth . tions the ratio of positive to negative ions is altered, with the
negative ions gaining in activity, as compared to normal (I).
Reiter further pointed out that the electrical conductivity of
the atmosphere is related to the small ion concentration. Any
reduction in small ion concentration results in a correspond­
ing reduction in atmospheric conductivity (1).

It is obvious that air pollution is an anathema to small ions.

If one begins with a clear air mass having a relatively high
+ + + -t +
concentration of small ions and adds to it a pollutant, e. g.
cigarette smoke, the concentration of small ions drops
extremely (1). Large ions predominate where the air is most
polluted, viz. the smog and dust of factories and cities. Large
ions tend to have a long half-life and low mobility (1). In
Earth
many instances large ions are formed at the expense of small
Negatively charged cloud induces
ions (3 5 , P. 243 ). Measurements taken by Reiter at various
positive charge on Earth's surface.
factory sites confirmed the predominance of large ions. All
types of combustion, Reiter clarifies, yield charged particles
which tend to be large ; the polarity* * of the charge, however,
depends on what is being burned (1). Reiter believes that air
pollution is a major cause of changing ion ratios in the
environment, disturbed atmosphere being another.

* The ion ratio, though more or less balanced in natural production, is

affected by the fact that negative ions are more mobile than the
positive ( 1 ).
* * Air brushing past a metal surface is positively charged. Positive ions
increase if the surface is heated. As a result, air in the neighborhood of
a functioning iron stove or central heating pipes is rich in positive ai r
ions (35, P. 243) . E nclosed spaces i n bu ildings, automobiles, airplanes,
etc. are thought to be frequently over-saturated with positive ions.

1 25
IONS AND HUMAN Our knowledge of air ion behavior in the open environment
BIOLOGY receives further illumination from clinical, laboratory
findings involving human subjects accumulated since the
1 920 's. In Moscow, around 1 9 1 9, Prof. A. L. Tchyevsky
began the first systematic large scale investigations of human
responses to air ions. Then, in about 1 920, Prof. F. Dessauer
of Frankfurt, Germany began similar studies. Subsequently a
number of researchers in several countries embarked upon
such investigations. Basically, what both Tchyevsky and
Dessauer discovered was that individuals alternately exposed
to negative and positive ions under experimental conditions,
reported effects to the nervous system, the blood stream, the
respiratory system, and the endocrine glands. And the large
majority of the subjects tested evidenced beneficial effects
when exposed to negative ions, but undesirable effects*
when inhaling positive ions (26, P. 29), (3 5 , P. 2 5 9).

Those first air ion discoveries have been superseded by more

contemporary investigations, the results of which, broadly
speaking, confirm the earlier findings. One of the foremost
authorities on air ion effects is Prof. Albert P. Krueger,
Microbiologist, who resigned his position as head of the
Department of Bacteriology at the University of California,
Berkeley, to form an ion research group. He writes that upon
initial observation,

" . . . there is something of an intellectual effort involved in accepting

the idea that an atmospheric ion can exert any sort of biological effect.
After all, it is only a group of 4 to 1 2 gaseous molecules clustered at
random around an electrically charged atom or molecule of gas ; it
moves slowly, and as a consequence, wreaks no physical damage on
impact. Furthermore, it occurs in strikingly sparse numbers. In an
artificially ionized atmosphere, for example, the ratio of ion groups to
non-ionized molecules is of the order of 1 to 20 trillion. That the body
can detect these ionic clusters among the astronomically more prevalent
ionized molecules and react with them seems something more than
improbable at the first glance. Nevertheless, one can advance reasons
that make this possibility a good deal more· acceptable. . . "(K- 1 ).

* l t has been found that the law of opti m u m stim u l ation, wh ich seems
to dom inate all electro-biologic phenomena, is also appl icable to the
i nfluence of air-ion currents. The effect m ight be favorable up to a
certai n max i m u m value, but this changes i nto a reverse effect if the
optim u m is surpassed (35, P. 259).

1 26
 Enlarging upon his position , Krueger observes that negative
air ions have been demonstrated to have an accelerating
effect in certain physiological processes associated with
breathing. By contrast, inhalation of positive ions has been
found to produce swelling of the nasal mucosa and irritation
of the upper respiratory tract (K- 1 ). Krueger asserts that all
trachael changes attributed to positive air ions can be
duplicated by the intravenous injection of the neurohormone,
serotonin . Like positive ion effects, the serotonin effects can
be reversed by treatment with negative air ions (K- 1 ). On the
basis of these facts, Krueger thinks it is reasonable to postulate
that positive ions are " serotonin releasers, " and that a local
accumulation of serotonin in the trachea is the immediate
cause of positive ion effects (K-1 ).

DR. ALBERT KRU EGER

1 27
 Sparked by Prof. Krueger's results, Prof. F. G . Sulman,
Pharmacologist, the Hebrew University, Jerusalem, has gained
international recognition for his experimental work involving
air ion effects upon human biology and behavior. Sulman
relates that both positive and negative ions in the lungs are
taken up into the blood stream, and whereas the erythrocytes
of the blood pick up air oxygen, thrombocytes react to the
positive ions releasing their neurohormone serotonin (K-2) .
Sulman also refers to the findings of two other researchers,
Winsor and Beckett ( 1 958), which showed that the inhalation
by humans of air containing 3 . 2 x 1 o4 positive ions/ cm 3 ,
reduced maximal breathing capacity by about 30 percent (K-2).

Further clinical .evidence for the physiological effects of

ionized air comes from Dr. I. H. Kornblueh, who has been
engaged in experimental work with air ions for over 20 years.
During this time he has treated hundreds of patients and a
variety of complaints with air-ion therapy. In conversation
with Kornblueh he maintained that there are constitutional
differences in the way that various humans respond to
ionized air, i. e. that natural physiological biochemical
differences between individuals can cause different individual
reactions to ionized air, and that there are some persons who
do not respond at all.

However, of those who do respond, the vast majority

respond to negatively ionized air; a small percentage respond
only to positive ionization. Thus, from his research evidence,
Kornblueh concludes that "not all people have the same
electrical sensitivity ; it is a very peculiar thing for which we
have no satisfactory explanation " (L). Continuing, Kornblueh
pointed out that the following categories are particularly
sensitive to the inhalation of small air ions ; children ; the old ;
the sick ; persons under stress . And in treating patients for
burns with negative air ions, it was discovered that mental
alertness had also increased.

Dr. Kornblueh offered an interesting observation on the

effects of air ions upon gatherings of people. According to
him, where there is a number of people, e.g. in an enclosed

1 28
 space, the number of negative small ions gets used up quickly,
leaving a preponderance of positive ions. The concentration
of positive ions tends to make people feel uncomfortable .
The introduction of negative ions, he says, improves substan­
tially the environment wherein a group of people are
congregated (L). At present, Kornblueh explained, most
places in the world do not keep a record, nor have any idea
of their environment ion count . Nevertheless, he reckons that
within the next few years ion counts will be made routinely
at all meteorological stations in the United States. But for the
moment, reliable instruments for good measurements are
lacking (L).

DR. IGHO KORNBLUEH

1 29
 IONIZING WINDS It is recognized, and generally accepted by many researchers*
of 11 ion phenomena, 11 that a certain type of wind present in
several areas of the world, but known by different names,
depending on the country, is associated with significant
physiological and psychological effects upon local human
populations. Typically, this wind is hot and dry and brings
with it an invasion of positive ions. Listed below are several
geographical locations showing the name by which the wind
is known in that area :

�
D ip ole. moment

(a) LOCATION NAME OF WIND

Germany Foehn & Tramontana
Austria Foehn
(b) Israel Sharav
Egypt Khamsin
Positive Ion ization Is the main cause of Italy Sirocco
suffering from Foehn, Sharav, Sharklye
Central France Autan
and similar hot dry winds. Formation of
positive Ions Is facilitated by friction California Santa Ana
between the Incoming wind and the
existing air layers: (a) depicts a water Argentina Zonda
molecule with dipole m oment, changing
at (b) Into a model of a small ('primary') Canada Chinook
multlmolecular atmospheric water vapor
Ion, consisting of a positive H2o Ion with
Malta Xlokk
three attached neutral polarized H2o Java Koebang & Gending
molecules. The overall resu lt Is that their
conglomeration displays a positive charge Northern Sumatra Bohorok
towards the environment.
Libya Sharkia
New Delhi The Desert Wind
Australia The Desert Wind (K-3).

* Dr. R . Reiter feels that many of the claims made by some of his
colleagues are inadequately supported by rigid scientific experimenta­
tion. He is, nevertheless, scientifically objective in his skepticism, as he
does not say that the findings reported by others bear not truth, but
only that, in order to be accepted with scientific certainty, these
reports should be supported by a larger number of experiments and
greater control and precision in experimental methodology ( 1 ) .

1 30
 British Research Engineer and Inventor Charles Topley, who
works in close liason with a team of medical researchers on
various uses of air ion therapy, believes that the effects of the
"ionizing winds" are mainly of " mental" (psychological)
significance (K).

During a visit by this writer to Topley's laboratory, he

explained that as a result of exposure to the ionizing winds,
human mental processes are slowed down. This occurs, he
maintains, because the "negative feedback " mechanism of
the body 's metabolic process is affected (K). Symptoms
begin, says Topley, as a kind of " nervous sickness, " excess
migraine and sick headache. Everyone, ill or healthy, is to
some degree affected. In illustration of his point, Topley cites
a situation apparently present in parts of France where, with
the coming of the Autan, a certain increase in anti-social
behavior is anticipated among local populations, irritability
and short tempers being recognized concomitants of the
Autan (K).

For many years inhabitants of mountain areas, particularly

in the vicinity of Germany, Austria, and Switzerland, have
talked and complained about " mountain sickness, " a peculiar
assortment of depressive illnesses believed to accompany the
cyclic appearance of the Foehn winds. It has even been
suggested by some that Foehn-type winds have, on occasions,
reached London, causing ill health and discomfort to unwary
victims in that city ( 1 4 ).

But Dr. Reiter, who manages an ion measuring station just

at the foot of the Alps outside the small town of Garmisch­
Partenkirchen, Germany, holds a more conservative approach
towards the many claims attributing ill health to the Foehn.
Elaborating upon his position, Reiter explained that originally,
earlier this century, it was thought that Foehn might bring
high concentrations of positive and negative ions which could
affect man, but that recent measurements show that there is
no specific variation of the small ions (I). Foehn, in Germany,
descends from the Alps and is characterized by high tempera­
ture (25°c) and low humidity (20 percent). It is a clear wind ,

131
 with most of the particles having been washed out by precipi­
tation on the southern, Italian side of the Alps before enter­
ing Germany. The concentration of ions both positive and
negative, is relatively high, but the ratio of positive to
negative is normal. The same, Reiter says, is true of any clean
air mass, for example, a polar air mass has a high concentra­
tion of small ions. Foehn, Reiter maintains, cannot be
regarded as an isolated meteorological situation because there
are associated with it other phenomena, e. g. squall lines, cold
fronts, or thunderstorms, which might also affect certain
human biological responses. Consequently, he feels that any
biological/behavioral effects attributed to Foehn cannot be
explained solely in terms of ion concentration (1).

Mr. Topley, however, does not fully share Dr. Reiter's view
about the effect of Foehn winds. Topley explained that the
electro-environmental conditions of the city of Munich are
such that they attract the Foehn to it. By contrast, nearby
open country areas around Munich, like Garmisch­
Partenkirchen where Reiter's ion measuring station is located,
may not feel the effects of Foehn so intensely because of
their different electro-environmental circumstances. (K).

HUMAN WEATHER The Sharav of Israel represents an ionizing wind occurring in

SENSITNITY a different topographical and climatic setting from that of
the Foehn of Germany. This Sharav, named after the desert
weather referred to in the Bible, is prominent mainly in the
mountainous areas such as Jerusalem and Safed. It is a dry,
warm wind with a strong positive ion concentration with
" low " air pressure. Dr. Felix Sulman is both a medical doctor
and a department head in Jerusalem and as such is in an
excellent position to observe the Sharav's effects, since
Jerusalem has up to 1 50 days of Sharav a year. Half of the
city 's population suffer. For many, the misery is minor, such
as swellings of the extremities. Others develop headaches,
nausea and occasionally become violent. With this problem
on his doorstep, Dr. Sulman has become a pioneer in this
field.

1 32
 Over the last nine years he has conducted controlled experi­
ments, as well as general empirical observations of persons
exposed to Sharav, and describes typical complaints associat­
ed with its presence : depression, irritability, insomnia, and
tension - these, together with a multitude of additional
physiological complaints (K-4). Even among healthy persons,
Sulman has reported decreased altertness during Sharav (K-5).
"Weather-sensitive " people studied by Sulman and his
research assistants started suffering one to two days before
the · onset of Sharav (K-4). From this, researchers surmised
that their complaints were due to changes other than heat.
Suffering began at a stage where there was neither increased
heat nor decreased humidity, which, to the researchers,
meant that subjects were probably reacting to the weather
front with its typical changes of air ionization (K-2).
Positive ionization always precedes the weather front by
one or two days because electricity moves faster than air.
This, Sulman states, accounts for the particular sensitivity
to weather of many people who maintain, and with reason,
that they are weather prophets. * The resultant diagnosis of
the research team was that reactions may be due to hyper­
thalmic serotonin hyperactivity, or hyperproduction provoked
by a steep increase in ionization of the air which the changing
weather front pushes ahead before it arrives (K-4). Sulman
concludes that the underlying problem of Sharav is a stress
reaction exerted on the entire endocrine system, and in this
connection he especially notes the adrenal cortex and
medulla (K-5).
Referring to the behavioral effects brought on by the
Khamsin (the equivalent of Sharav, in Egypt) Time Magazine
has reported that " . . . the Khamsin can also madden men.
Automobile accidents are far more frequent when it is
blowing, crime rates increase by as much as 20 percent . . .
judges in some Arab countries take a lenient attitude toward
Beersheba during the Khamsin . crimes committed during the Khamsin (26, P. 73).
Excess of positive ions.
* Christopher H il ls, who l ived i n the West l ndies for several years,
confirms these resu lts and maintains that one to two days before a
hurricane or tropical storm he always experienced depressive headaches
or dull feelings as subjective indicators of an oncomi ng weather change.
He also reports restriction of the nasal sinuses.

1 33
NEGATIVE ION THERAPY For an indoor environment, the artificial production of
negative ions has been found to be an effective means of
counteracting the effects of excessive positive air ions.
Mr. Charles Topley, who worked for many years on aircraft
electrical and mechanical design in England and who has
patented several inventions, has developed a negative ion
generator which he believes is the most effective yet devised .
The ion generator, which Topley says took him seven years
to develop, is a rectangular-shaped, self-contained unit, just
a little larger than a conventional table-model radio, and is
powered by standard home voltage. ln explaining some of the
theory underlying the therapeutic value of his invention,
Topley points out that it is the negative small ions which
are the most beneficial to all forms of life -- botanical, as
well as animal and human. With most existing ion generators,
Topley continues, the ions do not travel much beyond the
emitting orifice of the device. Consequently, to receive any
benefit, subjects would have to sit close to the machine for
long periods of time.

From an engineering point of view, Topley says, the chronic

problem has been that " ion recombination " takes place so
close to the source of generation that little or no effect was
realized several feet away (K). Thus, a unique feature of his
machine is that the negative ionized air-gas molecule it
produces is contained within an " envelope " of moisture. The
advantage of this is two-fold. First, it enables the negatively
charged air ion to be carried throughout the room rather than
be dissipated soon after its emission from the generator. And
second, the " moisture envelope " facilitates a more effective
negative ion assimilation by the respiratory system and
ultimate absorption of the ions into the blood stream (K).

The University of the Trees research team does not hold to

this view, since Drs. Sulman, Krueger, etc. have found that
even small generators fill an average size room with negative
ions in about 3 0 minutes to a density of 1 ,500 to 2,000 ions
per c.c., which is an ample ratio.

1 34
 Mr. Topley's assertion that negative ion therapy has no value
unless a hydroxyl ion is used is only half the story. Whereas in
some areas of medical work it has been reported that the water
coated ion has a more beneficial effect in relieving ailments such
as asthma and bronchitis, other researchers report they can
reduce bacteria, fatigue, irritability, tension, migraine, nausea
and hay fever without coating the ion in a water envelope (see
later work in the chapter). ·

Sonie people ask whether negative ions can be detected with

the nose. The answer is no. The odor is ozone, which affects the
mucous membranes and the alveoli ( airsacs in the lungs) and
over a long exposure damages these membranes, causing them
to operate ineffectively. The toxic rate for ozone in air is 0.05
parts per million (ppm). Exposure to ozone over a long period of
time causes emphysema. If you can smell the ozone from a
negative ion generator this often means your nose is too close to
the ion emitters but the toxic level should be tested in all cases.
It is a fairly simple matter to contact a local university Gr air
pollution control authorities who are quite likely to have an
ambient air monitor for testing ozone concentrations in air.

What happens in a negative ion generator is that the ions

stream off the tips of several " emitter'' needles. The cause of
this stream is what electronics people call a high voltage corona
discharge of electrons into the surrounding atmosphere. When a
material more conductive than air, such as the human body with
its large percentage of water, is close to the emitters it attracts
more current than the surrounding air and thus intensifies the
corona discharge. (Generally speaking it is best not to get one's
nose closer than seven or eight inches from the tips of the
emitters). This leads to an increase in the production of ozone
and consequently its distinctive odor intensifies. Naturally
occuring ozone such as that produced by the action of solar rays
ionizing the atoms of iodine in seaweed are not harmful and are
produced by a different process.*

• Publishers note: See p a g e 2 7 5 for detai l s on the U niversity of the Trees N e g ative Ion

Generators.

135
 Dr. Sulman states that a preponderance of positive ioniza­
tion of the oxygen molecules in the atmosphere is also a
feature of foggy and polluted city air, because the water
drops and the dust particles are primarily positively charged
and thereby quickly neutralize the negative oxygen ions.
Sulman suggests a solution would be to apply negative ioniza­
tion to the air conditioning of modem high-rise blocks, in
which the air to be breathed is enriched with negative ions,
thus actually representing a social step forward. *

Even the air in open country areas, Mr. Topley feels, is

predominantly positive because it probably received wind­
carried pollutants which originated in distant industrial zones
(K). One electric power station alone, he says, produces
enough sulphur-dioxide (S0 2 ), with its affinity for positive
electricity in the atmosphere to extend over vast areas of the
earth 's surface (K). In the home, Topley explains, the viewing
surface of a television set gives off into a room, electric
emissions ranging in magnitude from about 7,000 volts to
about 1 1 ,000 volts. These emissions, he says, have the effect
of producing a positive charge into the air and on the surface
of all items within immediate range of the T . V. set (K). But
upon switching on his negative ion generator and measuring
the ratio of small air ions in the room on a special device
which he designed for that purpose, Topley claims that the
meter moves gradually away · from a positive reading towards

0,
neutral, and eventually registers a full negative reading as the
negative ion saturation of the room becomes complete (K).
His negative ion generator functioning in a T. V. room,
Topley says, neutralizes positive emissions as they are
produced by the T. V. set (K). The medical director for the
Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) in Washington told
Christopher Hills in 1 963 that it has been well known for
many years that T. V. screens produce harmful X-rays up to
two inches from the surface of the screen. The effects of this
radiation are cumulative.

* Karger Gazette, publ. S. Karger, Arnold-Bocklin-strasse 25, Ch-401 1

Basel, Switzerland.

1 36
 Most ion researchers corroborate an observation given by
Dr. Kornblueh to the effect that sick persons evidence a
quicker biological response to the presence of negative ions
than do healthy persons (K), (L). Topley 's explanation for
this is that illness constitutes a kind of deficiency, an
imbalance of the body's bioelectric energies, which negative
ions help to restore (K). As a supportive example, he offers
the complaint of insomnia, particularly among older people,
who as a group apparently have difficulty remaining asleep
0 10 2D 30 '10 110 40 10 10 'IO roo
through the night. In an atmosphere of negatively ionized air,
Topley asserts, a full night's sleep is virtually guaranteed.
E J(posu re T;rne Cm ins) Topley, who is himself a vibrant 73, says that since he
developed his negative ion generator he no longer has diffi­
culty in getting adequate sleep (K).
Dr. Massy, while working with a negative ion generator for
over three years, found for healthy young people with no
sleeping problems that short exposure to negative ions -­
between 20 and 40 minutes - increased their vitality, enabling
them to work longer and sleep less. For them, sleeping in a
negative ion atmosphere had the effect of producing too
much stimulation. They awoke several times during the night.
Topley maintains that the most important application of
negative ions is its prophylactic aspect, treating "well " people
0 w � � � � � � � � �
by preventing illness before it occurs. The obvious advantage
Exposure. T;rne ( m ;ns) of negative ionization to healthy persons, he asserts, is to
strengthen those organs in the body which are responsible
for natural immunization and protection against disease, for
Topley believes that in a large majority of people such organs
are sluggish and malfunctioning (K). "We go about," he said,
" thinking that we are well, but we are not generally as well as
we could be" (K). Dr. Sulman and Mr. Topley both conclude
that negative ions have both prophylactic and therapeutic
applications. It prevents as well as restores.
There is yet another provocative dimension to the experi­
mental work now underway by Mr. Topley and his medical
associates, and which could have direct behavioral implica­
tions from both a psychological and a sociological standpoint.
This concerns a theory which seems to be evolving, centered
on what Topley calls the "recalcitrant child " .
1 37
 Such a child is defined as "badly behaved, " and differs from
the autistic child, or from children whose abnormal behavior
is due to obvious physiological impediments. Topley is
satisfied, on the basis of clinical evidence yielded by British
medical researchers, that the causal factor for bad behavior
in recalcitrant children is an excess of the lead deposits
retained in the body. These findings, Topley says, revealed
that when lead deposits were reduced, behavior improved (K).
Elaborating, Topley holds that the bioelectric charge of the
human body is basically more positive than negative, but that
recalcitrant children are even more positively charged than
normal. This excess positiveness, Topley feels, is somehow
responsible for the retention of greater amounts of lead (and
to some extent nickel and other elements) for long periods
of time within the circulatory system (K). Topley contends
that pollutants which make our bodies over-positive enter our
systems primarily through eating, drinking, and breathing ­
some foods, and some environments being more detrimental
than others.

The therapeutic solution which Topley proposes for this

situation is exposure to the negative air ions produced by his
generator. This, he says, will have the effect of neutralizing
the body's over-positive condition and returning it to a more
natural bioelectric state, which he believes is slightly more
negative than positive (K). ·

As an outgrowth of his findings with " recalcitrant children, "

Topley is inclined to believe that to a certain extent even
some adult anti-social behavior* , including some crimes,
might have a basis in excess lead deposits retained in the
body (K).

* Experimental use of Topley's negative ion generator i n some mental

i nstitutions i n E ngland is yet i n its i n itial stages. Consequently, there is
no experimental evidence l i n king psychopathic disorders with lead
deposits i n the body, nor any clear assessment of how mentally i l l
persons respond to negative ion therapy.

1 38
 Another compelling observation concerning atr tons and
social behavior was offered by Mr. Topley. According to him,
a negative ion generator unobtrusively operating in a
conference room would tend to produce a calming, soothing
effect in such a setting where nervousness and conflicts are
often manifest. If, for example, two different groups, e. g.
labor and management, had convened to discuss particularly
difficult issues wherein considerable tension could be expect­
ed, the presence of a negative ion generator could not guaran­
tee an amicable consensus of opinion, but it would lessen the
amount of tension during the meeting. This application of
negative air ionization, Topley feels, would be useful in any
social gathering where negative ions can be made to saturate
the environment (K). After extensive tests the University of
the Trees research team has also verified the above statement
to be true.

Considering the foregoing evidence for an air-ion/behavioral

tie-in, particularly in light of his latter observation, this writer
queried Topley as to whether or not, by altering the natural
concentrations and ratios of ambient air ions, human behavior
was in any way controlled or manipulated. Topley responded
emphatically that the human will, that human behavior, is in
no way controlled, but that what negative ionization helps
achieve is the creation of a physical environment wherein the
most difficult issues between opposing parties can be handled
with greater rationale and tranquility, and with less
emotional tension (K).

SULMAN'S IONIZATION Professor Sulman states that of 300 people who applied for
TREATMENT help, 1 29 were suffering from tension, migraine, swellings,
palpitations, dyspnea, asthma, flushes, vasomotor rhinitis,
hyperperistalsis and pollakisuria, due to the Sharav causing
large amounts of serotonin to be secreted in the nervous
system. Of the 1 29 subjects tested, 96 reacted favorably to
negative ion treatment. Of these 96 patients, 1 6 found equal
benefit from positive air ionization. Thus 80 of the 1 29
subjects found relief from their serotonin complaints by
negative ionization treatment, i . e . 7 5 percent. *
* I n k . J . Biometeor, 1 974, Vol 1 8, number 4 , pp. 3 1 3-3 1 8.

1 39
 Later, in 1 97 5 , Dr. Sulman reported that not only did
negative ionization cure 75 percent of serotonin cases, but it
also cured 45 percent of hyperthyroid cases * . The data for
this conclusion was gathered over five years on over 500
patients. The following table summarizes his results.

The problem of the weather-sensitive patient is so acute in

Jerusalem that Dr. Sulman and his colleagues have, over the
years, developed a complete system of patient management,
the success of which is controlled by urinalysis.

CONTROLLING In 1 974, Dr. Sulman exposed bacteria of escherichia,

DISEASE proteus, pseudomonas, klebsiella, staphylococci, strepto­
cocci, and candida to a negative ionized atmosphere. His
results showed the germ counts are reduced by 50 percent
within six hours and 70 percent within 24 hours * * by the
negative ions. This suggests that negative ionization is a way
of controlling disease.

Effect of Ionizing Treatment of Room 4 x 4 x 3 m

on Bacterial Count of Agar Plates.
Each measurement represents the result ofeight experiments (means +S. E.M. ).

Number of colonies counted before and after ionization

Exposure Ionotron 20 with air filter lonotron SO, no air filter

( h) Before After Before After

6 23 ± 2 12± 1* 20 ± 1 . 5 10 ± 1*
12 19 ± 2 12 ± 1* 22 ± 2 1 1 ± 1*
16 36 ± 3 1 2 ± 1 ** 49 ± 3 1 2 ± 1 **
20 17 ± 2 9± 1* 14 ± 1 5 ± 0.5 * *
24 19 ± 2 6 ± 0.5 * * 17 ± 1 5 ± 0.5**

Significance of difference from respective control *P ( 0. 01,

**P < 0. 005.

** Sul man F . G . et a l . I R CS 2, 1 452 ( 1 974).

* I n k. J. Biometeor, 1 975, Vol 1 9, n u m be r 3, pp. 202-209.

1 40
 Three types of reactions to heat stress in 500 weather-sensitive
patients and their improvement by negative air ionisation.
Evaluation by Student's t-test.

Percent of patients improved

Syndrome Symptoms by negative air ionisation
Good Fair Poor

Serotonin hyper- Sleeplessness, irritability,

production : tension, anorexia, electrified 75% 1 0% 15%
hair, migraine, nausea,
Irritation vomltlng, scotoma, amblyopia
syndrome tinnitus, oedemata, rheumatic
pain in scars, muscles and
(Urinary seroto- joints, palpitations, precordial
Din and 5-HIAA pain, dyspnoe, flushes with
ncreased) sweat or chills, vasomotor
rhinitis, conjunctivltis,
215 patients laryngltls, tracheitis, vertigo
tremor, hyperperistalsis,
polyuria, pollakisuria, photo-
phobia, olfactophobia, audio-
phobia.

!Adrenal Hypotension, fatigue, apathy, 1% 1% 98%

�eflciency : exhaustion, blackout,
!Exhaustion depression, confusion, ataxia,
�yndrome adynamia, psychic impedl-
Urinary adren- ment to perform tasks, hypo-
�line, noradren- glycaemic spells
� ine, 17-KS, ·
�7-0H decreased)
�20 patients

iHyperthyroldlsm Asomnia, irritabillty, tension, 45% 3% 52%

'Forme Fruste'' nausea, vomiting, palpitations,
Urinary precordial pain, dyspnoe,
hyroxine and sweat, tremor, abdominal
histamine in- pain, diarrhoea, polyuria,
creased, seroto- pollakisuria, allergic react-
nin sometimes ions, reddening of skin,
ncreased) alopecia, orexia with weight
65 patients loss, overactlvlty, fatigue,
exhaustion, depression,
adynamia, confusion.

Good - objective : serotonin and 5-HIAA reduced to normal values;

subjective : abolition of most complaints (p<: 0. 005) .
Fair - objective : serotonin and 5-HIAA diminished;
subjective : degree of suffering less incapacitating than before (p C::.O . 05) .
Poc?r - objective : serotonin (56-9 5 l'g/d) and 5-HIAA (10-15 l'g/d) stlil high;
subjective : no improvement of symptoms (p> 0 . 05) .

141
ALPHA WAVES In a paper dedicated to Dr. lgho Kornblueh, the original
pioneer of ion therapy, who passed away in 1 973 in
Philadelphia, Dr. Sulman reported on a carefully controlled
experiment in which electroencephalogram records of human
subjects exposed to negative ions showed a drop in the
frequency of the alpha waves. * This appeared to be of the
order of 0. 5 to 2. 5 cycles and represented a decrease of
about 20 percent. Sulman reports the decrement of alpha
frequency began in the earliest case after 1 0 minutes of
negative air ionization. It reached a maximum after 30
minutes and persisted as long as air ion exposure was applied,
then followed with one hour of gradual return to the indivi­
dual rhythm pattern of the subject. Professor Sulman feels
that the decrease in alpha frequency is a manifestation of the
general relaxation induced in the patients by negative air
ionization.

There was also an amplitude increase in the EEG of about

SO percent or 1 0 to I S microvolts which Sulman interprets as
an improvement of perception and apperception, i.e. intensity
due to negative air ionization.

Subjectively, Sulman continues, all subjects experienced the

following reaction during exposure to negative ionization :
initial relaxation, followed by alertness connected with the
moving of the alpha-waves from the occipital to frontal brain
areas.

Swami in the laboratory Since this last effect is also observed with accomplished
from Newsweek magazine meditators while meditating, one might surmise that negative
ion atmosphere is beneficial to good meditation. * *

* l nt. J . Biometeor, 1 974, Vol 1 8, number 4 , pp. 306-31 2.

** Dr. Basu K. Bagchi, a professor at the University of M ichigan Medi­
cal Center, Ann Arbor, conducted E EG readings in "Newsweek
Magazine" on Swami Shantananda and concluded that the Swami was
genuine. See "N uclear Evolution : Discovery of the Rainbow Body"
(pp. 494-496) .
1 42
 Effects of exposure to negative air ions (3 . 5 x 1 05 ions/(cm3 . sec)
at 1 m distance) on EEG parameters . Means of .the analysis of a
100 sec epoch of each of 8 EEG channels .

Exposure to air ions

Subjects before I after before I after before

1 after

Frequency Amplitudes Spreading of alpha

Hz pV waves area

Normal

1 9 7-8 20 30-35 temp . - parlet . -

occlp. front .
2 9 8 20 30 temp . - pariet . -
occlp. front .
3 10 8 20 30 temp . - pariet . -
occip . front .
4 9 7 20 35 temp . - pariet . -
occip . front .
5 10 8 20 30 temp . - pariet . -
occlp . front .
6 10 8 20 31 temp . - pariet . -
occip . front .
7 11 9 20 34 temp . - pariet . -
occip. front .
8 10 7 20 30 temp . - pariet . -
occip. front .
9 9 8 20 32 temp . - pariet . -
occip. front .
10 10 7 20 33 temp . - pariet . -
occip . front .
·-

... ....,
... . ... ,
.
V -.

'"' - �'
.....!:!. V"
• 1./':T �....-
. .M.
I""'
..., . ....., .... T • IIIO•T
A
..A. .A
,
-·-

�t · .....,
.A ..,..,. • j;:'...._ IIJ .A ..J.
.. "
....., . ....'( """ ' . ....
j J .l
'""""'1 - .. -9·· .... , • • ,., • •
•
"l
Llt-T •.£"T
..._ ..r.
UO•T ·. rT
. ... .., ,. .....
...L
,.

RP•-. • ltO .P.. T • ltO

.lA. .J.
..
L�T LO
..,., . 1.0 .I�.
•

"''·l. I.�'I& ....;f. 1.1-"r.l

�Jt..
�� �

E E G of normal subject (S. G. male, 65 yr) .

left : before; right : during negative air ionisation .
Note four effects : (a) alpha frequency slowed down in all leads,
(b) amplitudes increased in all leads, (c) spreading of alpha
rhythm from the occipital to [Link] frontal area, {d) marked syn­
chronisation of right and left hemisphere .

143
 These findings confirm the beneficial effects of negative air
ionization observed in serotonin-engendered diseases, such as
hay fever and stress due to positive atmospheric conditions.
Relief from these serotonin ailments appears within ten
minutes after starting negative ion treatment. The findings
that these changes are transient is of practical importance,
says Dr. Sulman, since it suggests the need for long-term
application of negative ionization if a thorough anti-serotonin
effect is desired. In Sulman 's laboratory a negative ion gener­
ator is in operation the whole working day, and the people
involved find much relief and improved working capacity on
days when they are harassed by the positive ions of incoming
desert winds.

Electrode
Fan Dust filter for corona discharge

Air
stream --+-

Insulator
10 kv

Design of a sim p l e I o n i z i n g app aratus w h ic h from m ai n s of 1 1 0-220 V . b u i l ds u p a 1 0 K V

tension. I ts outlet p roduces p ositive a n d n e gative I o n s. T h e p ositive I o n s are retained by
a n e g ativel y c h a rged net and a l l ow the e m ission of n egative i o n s, the so-c a l l e d 'co r o n a
d i sc h a rge'. T h is i n I tse l f p roduces a n I o n a i r c u rrent u p t o a distance of 2 m eters a n d , if
req u i red, can be extended to 4 m eters.

1 44
 SUMMARY
AND
DI S CU S SION OF PART I
SUMMARY AND DISCUS S ION OF PART I

lnt �ra: Nat urce . fp e [Link]� uc ima�o

147
 Part I has sought to explore the concept that there exists a
level of "electro-vibratory " reality to man 's physical being,
to examine the possibility that the entirety of matter - our
material, biological universe - upon which all subsequent
behavioral/social systems are necessarily predicated, might
share in a common and fundamental network of electro­
vibratory forces.

Each electron, each atom, each cell, is seen to have its own
magnetic environment, balancing and intermeshing within
that single Energy-Matter continuum, "vibration," as postu­
lated by Einstein and others. At the atomic level there
appears to be a sustained interaction between the magnetic
properties of matter and other field forces present in the
environment, thus suggesting both a continuou3 and a contig­
uous inter-relationship between all physical substances, an
inter-relationship facilitated by, and mediated by, field forces
of an electro-vibratory nature.

Biochemically speaking, the electro-vibratory reality of

human biology is apparent in the body 's high percentage of
water, wherein the hydrogen proton is thought to be especially
responsive to magnetic influence. This electro-vibratory per­
spective is also supported by the presence of charged particles
Dr. Albert E i n stei n flowing in the bloodstream, which should produce a certain
degree of " somatic magnetism. " Too, the transmission of
messages along neural pathways, by means of sodium and
potassium, which discharge electric voltages across cell
membranes, adds further to the body's electromagnetic
character. Then, there is preliminary experimental evidence
which suggests that certain damaged enzymes, which could
impair biological functions, can be restored through the use
of electromagnetic energies.

Viewing human biology from a slightly different angle, we

find that basic electrodynamic principles such as frequency,
resonance, and harmonics, apply to all matter, and conse­
quently to all biological systems. Thus, each man's physical

1 48
body emits its characteristic electro-vibratory fields which
apparently surround and interpenetrate that same body,
making for a kind of self-contained field complex for each
human body, but one which can also attain resonance with
other systems. It is conceivable, then, from a behavioral point
of view, that the phenomenon of harmonics wherein each
entity is said to radiate infinitely into space a series of
associated frequencies capable of achieving resonance with
other independent sources of electro-vibration, could account
for the distinct, but non-rational impulses (intuition?) which
one often senses towards individuals, or towards other stimuli
present in one's environment.

Other researchers have postulated the existence of "nodal

points" within the force-fields produced by all vibrating
entities. Nodal points· are said to be vortices of energy and to
function as resonance bonds between different life systems
throughout the universe of physical/biological substances.
This concept is expanded by the theory of an ' ' east-west
"
flow of energy which Hills claims facilitates resonance
between systems by acting upon the nodal points, thus
enabling each entity in a kind of sensing of its surroundings,
a balancing of its field force within the total complex of
electro-vibratory forces present in the environment. The
east-west force-field is not thought to be electromagnetic
itself, but it apparently acts upon, and conditions electro­
magnetic energies. Following this view, the east-west flow
would be responsible for one individual achieving vibratory
resonance with another individual or for an individual
experiencing resonance with other sources of vibration
external to himself.

Looking further into evidence which argues for biological

man as an electro-vibratory entity, we find experimental
results which indicate that the central nervous system gener­
ates distinct electro-vibratory patterns, and that this system
is capable of responding to force-fields imposed upon it from

1 49
external sources. Specific brain centers including the cerebral
cortex, hypothalamus, and reticular formation, seem to be
involved in the transmission and reception of electro-vibratory
energies between the brain and external energy fields. Even
one 's level of consciousness is found to be expressible in
electro-vibratory terms, as measured by the electroencephalo­
graph. And, experimental evidence with b oth animals and
humans suggests that properly applied magnetic fields of the
correct strength and frequency can reduce consciousness to
levels of sleep or even general anesthesia. One experimenter
has treated such bio-emotional conditions as irritability and
depression resulting from menopause with electromagnetic
energies.

It is claimed that recently discovered brain-generated

frequencies, measurable in the range of 1 00,000,000 cycles
per second, are capable of extending over vast distances. If
this claim proves to be accurate, it could provide an electro­
vibratory explanation for the non-verbal, telepathic trans­
mission of information between two or more individuals.
Over the past several years investigative attempts to under­
stand the phenomenon of telepathy in electromagnetic
terms have generally concluded that all the oscillations
known to be emitted by the brain travel only a short
distance (usually less than 1 8 inches) away from the surface
of the head, and could not therefore, be responsible for the
long - distance communication of information. Moreover, it
was suspected by researchers that telepathic thought trans­
mission involves energies which cannot, according to popular
scientific definition, be called electromagnetic. Nevertheless,
this alleged new brain-generated ' 'ultra-theta, ' ' if not strictly
electromagnetic, is certainly "electro-vibratory" in nature,
given the brain 's overwhelming electro-vibratory modalities.

Still other possibilities for biological/behavioral tie-ins

with electro-vibratory forces are suggested in the recent
evidence supporting the theory of periodic reversals of the

I SO
 earth's geomagnetic field. Indications are that the occasional
reversal of the earth's field could bring about mass fauna!
extinctions, cause mutations in existing biological systems,
and usher in entirely new species. Other researchers have
gone on to suggest that there might be a positive relationship
between the size of the earth fauna and the strength of the
earth's magnetic field, that millions of years ago, during the
mesozoic era, the strength of the basic geomagnetic field
was far greater than its present average of 0 . 5 gauss. It is
thought, moreover, that there may be a continuous pattern
of oscillation in geomagnetic field strength with the fre­
quency measurable in thousands of years.

H 2.4 gauss
=
There are provocative, though indefinite, experimental
findings hinting that human behavior might be subject to
some degree of influence from localized geomagnetic force­
fields. The independent findings of Abrams, De La Warr,
Brown, Barnothy, and others seem to have established the
acute sensitivity of biological systems, including humans, to
the presence of subtle magnetic field forces having strengths
in the neighborhood of the earth 's 0 . 5 gauss average. Added
to this is the explanation that in certain geographical locations,
the strength and complexity of field forces can be modified
considerably, owing to localized conditions of soil, ore
deposits, and topography , together with the presence of
assorted extraterrestrial field influences. Could it be, as
implied in Lakhovsky' s observation, that certain environ­
mental vibratory conditions are responsible for cancer, that
likewise, certain other physical/behavioral abnormalities
might result from an imbalance of those electro-vibratory
forces operating within and upon particular human popula­
H = 0.5 gauss tions?

Yet another dimension of possible geomagnetic field

influences upon human biological/behavioral systems may be
foreshadowed in the preliminary findings of biomagnetic
researchers and relates to the qualitative difference that they

151
claim exists between the energies of the north and south
magnetic poles of a single, unified field. Their laboratory
results reveal that the cognitive, temperamental, and be­
havioral modes of small animals can be predetermined, and
permanently modified, by exposure to specific north or
south polar energies.

Extrapolating directly from experimental results obtained

with animals to possible effects upon the human system is
usually a risky and unadvisable procedure. But perhaps with
due caution we might be allowed brief speculation in that
direction. Although humans are thought to be sensitive to
very subtle electro-vibratory energies, as yet there seems to
be no firm evidence that the north and south polar emissions
of the earth 's magnetic field could produce noticeable and
distinct effects in human behavioral patterns.

But the idea is not to be lightly dismissed. One wonders

what might be the human biological/behavioral response
(perhaps already subtly built into the existing geophysical/
biological network of nature) to geomagnetic field forces of
differing polarities. Might people of a given geographical
area exhibit biological/behavioral patterns peculiar to them­
selves, owing to the unique character of the geomagnetic
field which exists in their region?

There is a b affling report which borders on this area of

speculation. During 1 973 , Reuter's London international
news service (20), carried a story about a British Anthro­
pologist, Dr. David Davies of London's University College,
who was engaged in research in a remote mountainous
region of Ecuador, called Vilcabamba ( "The sacred valley").
According to reports, Davies had authenticated proof that
an inordinately high percentage of the villagers lived to be
1 00 years old. In fact, Davies is supposed to have met and
talked with men of 1 23 and 1 40 years of age, still active
and who had records of baptism in the Catholic Church to

1 52
verify their d ates of birth. The report went on to explain
that the whole p attern of longevity in Vilcabamba was
completely uncanny, with sizable sections of the population
in their 90's, 8 0 's, and 70's. A life span of 1 00 was regarded
as " unexcep t ton
' a1 . "

In looking for possible explanations for this incredible

phenomenon, diet and living habits were closely examined -
b ut revealed no answers. In fact, inhabitants engaged in some
practices not recommended by modern medicine to increase
longevity. They smoked heavily (40 to 60 cigarettes per day),
and drank liberal amounts of alcoholic beverage, on the
average, 2 to 4 cups of rum per day. But even more con­
founding was a report which reached Davies that there were
other villages nearby where the incredible longevity of Vilca­
bamba was reversed ! Where most people lived much below a
normal life expectancy, and " a man of 3 7 looked like a man
6 7 " ! At last report, D avies was returning to Ecuador to pur­
sue his investigations.

Could it be that there 1s some unique electro-vibratory

or radiational phenomenon in the valley of Vilcabamba,
which accounts for the astounding longevity of its inhabi­
tants? Perhaps some strange combination of radiations from
the local terrain, in conj unction with extraterrestrial radia­
tions? The fact that there seem to be nearby other villages
where the average life span is less than normal is suggestive
of the laboratory results obtained with animals using
alternate n orth and south pole energies. But whether or not
some peculiar geomagnetic field condition predominates in
these remote villages of Ecuador, still awaits more detailed
investigations.

Perhaps the most salient message contained in this chapter

on bioclimatology is that the human biological/behavioral
apparatus seems to have the inherent faculty o f responding
to certain very subtle electro-vibratory forces o ccurring in

1 53
one 's natural, day-to-day atmospheric environment - that
possibly, under given conditions, even some aspects of social
behavior might b e shaped by such forces.

Thus far, there seems to be no experimental or observa­

tional evidence indicating that static electric fields, of them­
selves, have a direct effect upon human behavior. But the
m agnitude of some static charges at the surface of the body
(as high as 1 0 ,000 volts per centimeter) suggests that these
fields should be further investigated for possible biological/
behavioral influences. However, other alternating atmos­
pheric frequencies, "spheric pulses, " have b een established
theoretically and statistically to enter the human body, and ,
to some extent, to modify behavioral modes. Understandably,
researchers may want further experimental confirmation of
spheric effects; but meanwhile, on the basis of present
information, it would not seem premature to speculate on
spheric pulses as being a kind of built-in geophysical control
mechanism for biological systems, an electro-vibratory means
whereby homo-sapiens bio-behavioral modalities are geared
into an evolving, cyclic pattern of planetary forces.

The whole question of the human response to various types

of force-fields is an engaging one. In the context of this
present work, we have the affirmation of science that the
degree of human neurological sensitivity to certain electro­
vibratory forces, electric fields in this instance, varies from
one person to the next. Later, in our discussion of clair­
voyant faculties, the idea is again advanced that clairvoyant
individuals realize a higher than normal degree of sensitivity
to a different range of "electro-vibratory" frequencies . A
significant point here is that the groundwork for compre­
hending what o ccurs in clairvoyance seems to be, in part,
contained within current scientific theory. In one sense,
science may have laid excellent foundation for a single
edifice of unified human understanding which, at base, is
founded upon laws governing physical matter, but which at

1 54
 its upper regions, extends into esoteric realms - still main­
taining the integrity of the whole .

Reflecting further upon possible geophysical/bio-behavioral

tie-ins, we fmd that the ion researchers agree that the electro­
vibratory force-field of a given geographical area largely
determines the character of air ions in that area. Thus we see
that · there is a direct link between the nature of geomagnetic
force-fields and the character of the ionized air inhaled in
a given geographical region. In fact, areas such as waterfalls
producing a fine spray, or of abundant coniferous trees, are
claimed to have curative, calming effects because of the
higher ratio of negatively charged small air ions generated
in such environments. Ionized environmental air, then, would
seem to be yet another means whereby the human bio­
logical/behavioral system is intermeshed with, and perhaps to
some extent even governed by, the naturally occuring electro­
vibratory forces of nature.

The ion researchers are in further agreement that air

pollution is a major cause affecting the quality and quantity
of atmospheric air ions. Certain indoor and outdoor environ­
ments are found to have an over-abundance of positively
charged air ions which, tests show, can produce undesirable
physiological and behavioral effects upon humans. It is
common knowledge to ion researchers that crowded cities,
areas of industrial combustion, fog, or dust, have a relatively
high concentration of heavy air ions existing at the expense
of small air ions. It is also believed that the natural and
correct balance of these electro-vibratory forces throughout
nature - including the human body - is slightly more
negative than positive, but that generations of industrial
1 ndustr,'a / · Po 1 1 u tion pollution have resulted in a relatively more positively charged
earth environment, to the biological/behavioral detriment of
humankind. Thus, while the precise extent to which environ­
mental air ions affect human behavioral systems is still an
open question, the preponderance of available evidence
indicates that, under specified conditions, the inhalation of
ionized air can produce significant modifications in behavior

1 55
patterns.

Experimental evidence further indicates that depending on

the polarity of the predominant air-ion environment,
behavioral responses also differ, with irritability and
depression being the general symptoms of an over-positively­
charged environment, while calm and relaxation are
associated with a more negatively charged air-ion ambiance.
Again, this differential response to polar influences, in this
instance air ions, lends added support to the findings of
biomagnetic researchers who consistently maintain that each
polar force-field imparts its own biological/behavioral
influence, as distinct from that of the opposite pole.

Various regions of the world during certain seasons of

the year experience "ionizing winds," hot or warm periodic
winds which apparently usher in large amounts of positively
charged air ions. Behavioral symptoms attributed to ionizing
winds include a slow-down in human mental processes, de­
pression, irritability, tension, and a general increase in anti­
social behavior. It has been found that the cyclic appearance
of ionizing winds occurs with predictable regularity, and still
other measures of small air ions indicate that their concen­
trations vary over a 24 hour period, with the highest quantity
occuring during hours of daylight. This again reinforces the
concept of periodicity as a central feature of nature 's geo­
physical - bio-behavioral interrelationships; and at the same
time it suggests that there is a positive relationship between
solar energy and abundant health-giving small air ions.

In this connection, one is reminded that most deaths

resulting from "natural causes" occur during hours of
darkness, between sunset and sunrise. It is also during this
period that existing illness tends to become worse. One
wonders if this phenomenon might not be explainable as
follows : for sick people, whose life forces are in a state of
delicate, precarious balance, the diminishing of the sun's
life-giving radiations and associated small air ion concen­
trations mean that these people no longer have that critical

1 56
 amount of environmental electro-vibratory energy to draw
upon and thereby to sustain the force of their own electro­
vibratory organism. In a kind of reverse situation, something
akin to the foregoing explanation is suggested in the Russian
practice of placing critical mental and heart patients in
shielded rooms so as to guard the deleterious effects of
excess solar radiations during solar disruptions.

There is a consensus of opinion, among those researchers

+ +
-1- + interviewed for the present work, that the behavior of groups
of people can be beneficially altered by the artificial intro­
duction of negatively charged small air ions into an enclosed
living space. The over-abundance of positively charged air
+
ions, which seems to frequently prevail when many people
are congregated in an enclosed space, is thought to contribute
\ to feelings of discomfort and irritability which often occur
Positive 10n9 Negative ron_, under such circumstances.
p r o d uce produce
i r ri to bi l i +� cal m " e ss Thus, a practical application would be the introduction of a
negative ion generator into enclosed living spaces, and high­
rise office buildings. This could create an ambient atmos­
phere wherein a stuffy , over-positively-charged room or com­
partment would not be a contributing factor to abrasive
human relations. Under these conditions any ill tempers
manifesting in conference rooms, offices, large commercial
passenger vehicles, and the like, would not be further magni­
fied by a deficient ion component of the inhaled air. To the
contrary, both improved health and improved social relations
would be expected in environments properly saturated with
negatively charged small air ions.

But even with these impressive pioneering efforts, it would

be of great benefit to both the physical and the social
sciences to have more exact experimental data available as to
the extent to which ionized air influences human social
behavior. Are we continuously and unconsciously influenced
by the character of the air ions we inhale? If so, what is the
most desirable air ion atmosphere for human well-being, and
how can this best be maintained in both indoor and outdoor

1 57
situations? Is it possible to establish specific limits and
threshold values for determining possible social/behavioral
effects o f ionized air upon inidividuals or populations? Are
there cultural or natural behavior p atterns which are gov­
erned by the air ion environment? If so, to what extent do
these behavior patterns influence the quality of international
relations? What is the feasibility o f establishing regularized
remedial treatment schedules for behavioral disturbances,
using negatively charged small air ions? These are some o f
the questions which await the o utcome o f future investiga­
tions, by today 's new age researchers.

Cl imatic Heat Stress : Na l Kt Sharav, Foehn

Therapy : Salt Sugar Prevention

R eaction Therapy

L i th i u m carbon ate
fol l owed by :
Prop y l th lou rac l l
Meth y l th iou rac i l
d ____�M Thyro x ine t Meth i m azole
Thyro l ..., ..____

-.,., T r l l odoth y ronlne t Ca rbimazole

(
Beta-B iockers

Adrenal Med u l l a ----tc

tr....- atech o l am l nes
newcomerd': { M A 0-Biockers
X a nth ines
oldtlm ers '

Cou rtesy D r. F.G. S u l m a n

1 58
Boehme accepted the old belief that man is a
miniature copy of God and the universe, hence
the symbols of planets as the vital centres of
the human body in this illustration to an 1 8th
century edition of his works

1 59
 PART 11
DIMENSIONS O F HUMAN BEHAVIORAL
FIELD s-PHYSICAL AND META- PHYSICAL

" Vibration was everywhere present, but it was

nowhere fathomable. It was past, it was presen t -­
and yet, too, it was future. A force ? A field? A n
in telligence? A n essence - elusive y e t substan tial
. . . Man himself yet distinct from himself . . .
Divine yet worldly. In termeshing dimensions of
whirling p ulsations throbbing to the cadence of a
single universal tone, so bearing witness to the
layered plateaus of truth -- the tiered realities of
man and his men tal makings. The produce of his
yet hobbled mind manifesting in the stupor of his
social vehicles, in the unenligh tened torpor of his
mundane doings. The Grail ever-presen t but
constantly receding from his insensitive grasp. So it
was in the darker days of h umankind, before man 's
perception cleared - before the fullness of Cosmic
vibrations emerged. " ( V. R. B. )

161
INTRODUCTION In this section are presented various data obtained through
the use of clairvoyance. It might be useful, therefore, to take
a brief instructive look at the faculty of clairvoyance, as
understood by the clairvoyant himself. We are reminded that
clairvoyance is but one of several faculties often contained
under the heading of "extra-sensory perception " (ESP), and
that psychometry, psychokinesis, telepathy, clairaudience,
and precognition also come under this general category.

Mr. Geoffrey Hodson, widely recognized as one of the most

competent contemporary research clairvoyants, has noted
that clairvoyance operates under the same laws which govern
ordinary sight, and is, indeed, an extension of the standard
means of cognition ( 3 8 , P. 59). The difference, he claims,
between ordinary vision and clairvoyant vision lies in the
faculty of developed vision to detect the vibrations of the
" sub-ethers" which underlie the ordinary electromagnetic
ether. Or stated differently, the clairvoyant is one who
possesses a considerably wider range of vibratory response
than is normal for most persons (38, P. 2 6).

,
/'
"
"
,
,
;
/
"
"
,
/
,
"

1 62
 Hodson goes on to point out that the effect of tuning the
consciousness to sub-etheric wavelengths is roughly analogous
to a similar effect achieved with the better known energies of
the X-ray. According to his reckoning expressed in terms of
difference in potential, the ordinary electromagnetic vision of
light rays corresponds to a quantum energy of 2 electron
volts, and the X-ray corresponds to a potential difference of
a few hundred volts to 300,000 electron volts. But there is
reason to believe that the vision of the clairvoyant employs
exceedingly short wavelengths and corresponds to a difference
of potential of about 1 20,000 million volts, or 800 times
greater than that of the cosmic rays* (3 8, P. 24).

Dr. Christopher Hills states that the background radiation

with wavelengths of 1 3 cm to 80 cm is absorbed by human
beings according to the working of the chakras. He likens the
human absorption of cosmic rays to that of a black hole
sucking in the radiation of the stars and the 2 1 cm hydrogen
radiation as an illuminating beam for a hologram of conscious­
ness. This 2 1 cm radiation is considered by most astronomers
and astrophysicists to be the residue of the creation of the
Universe in the primordial big bang. The clairvoyant sees the
functioning of the seven psychic centers and their radiations
as the human aura (44, P. 1 60).

Mrs. Phoebe Bendit, another contemporary research clair­

voyant of established ability, once commented that " the seer
requires to be as critical, impersonal, and objective as the
scientist . . . . metaphorically, science and seership are like
two separate pillars, each of which can rise to a certain
height, but they are completed only if they support the arch
of total knowledge which rests equally on both" ( 1 5).

* Physicist Zoltan Tarczy-Hornoch notes that from the point of view of

classical physics such a large amount of energy being associated with
clairvoyant vision is viewed with skepticism.

1 63
SUBTLE ENERGIES
 SUBTLE ENERGIES

* Subtle energies include L-fields, radionic and radiesthesic wavefields and supersensonics.

1 65
THE L-FIELD* " So far as our present information goes, there is unequivocal
evidence that wherever there is life, there are electrical
properties " (P. 47). This is an assessment made by the late
Professor Harold Saxton Burr, the distinguished Neuro­
Anatomist, who, for 43 years, was a faculty member of the
Yale University School of Medicine.

Measurement by modern electric instruments developed

within recent years has " revealed that man - and , in fact, all
life forms - are ordered and controlled by electro-dynamic
fields which can be measured and mapped with precision "
(P. 1 1 ). And according t o Burr, " It does not make any differ­
ence whether these fields are called electro-static, electro­
magnetic, or electro-dynamic. The name is always a conse­
quence of the methods which are applied to its study" (P. 95).

What is important is that these bioelectric changes relate to

overall biological functioning. As early as 1 93 5 , in his
Electro-Dynamic Theory of Life, Burr proposed that all
living organisms have electric fields which govern their
growth and decay. For the next 3 8 years until his death in
1 97 3 , he proceeded to prove his theory. Since these fields
control life they are called Life fields or more commonly
L-fields.

Though complicated, these L-fields are of the same nature

as the simpler fields known to modern physics and obedient
to the same laws. Like the fields of physics they are a part of
the organization of the universe and are influenced by the
vast forces of space . " Like the fields of physics, too, they

* A l l the i nformation and i deas contai n ed i n th is section on L-fields

resul t from the research findings, concepts, and projections of D r. H. S.
Burr, as found in his book "Blueprint for I mmortal ity " (39). The
totality of Burr's i nvestigations extends over 4 0 years and embraces the
broadest spectrum of l ife forms, rangi ng from u n icel lular a n i mals, to
the complex human neural system with its myriad behavioral nuances.

1 66
DR. HAROLD BURR

have orgamzmg and directing qualities, which have been

revealed by many thousands of experiments " (P. 1 2). Burr
maintains that L-fields are invisible and an integral part of the
cosmos (P. 1 2). " But these field properties are not mysterious
phenomena; they are measurable characteristics not only of
the universe but of the immediate environment of the earth "
(P. 1 06).

1 67
 Diagram shows a spherical
segment of the observer's
Antakarana consisting of
groups of interconnected
nodal points of subtle
energy as mapped by the
radionlc Instruments of
Supersensonics.

As an example Burr points to the human body. Its molecules

and cells_ are constantly being tom apart and rebuilt with
fresh material from the food we eat. But, thanks to the
controlling L-fields, the new molecules and cells are rebuilt as
before and arrange themselves in the same pattern as the old

Evidence collected over several decades of study confirms

that an "organism possesses a field as a whole which embraces
subsidiary or local fields representing the organism's
: component parts" (P. 80). Additionally, the body's L-field
· "serves as a matrix or mould which preserves the 'shape' or
arrangement of any material poured into it, however often
the material may be changed " (P. 1 7) . Burr says that numer­
ous experiments substantiate that the behavior of living
systems is a consequence of the pattern of organization
provided by the L-field (P. 1 06) ; he points out that an illustra-
tion of this is seen in the fact that abnormalities in L-field
voltages can give advance warning of future symptoms before
these are evident.

For example, malignancy in the ovary has been revealed by

L-field measurements before any clinical signs could be
observed. Such measurements, therefore, could help doctors
to detect cancer early, when there is a better chance of treat­
ing it successfully. This applies not only to the early detection
of cancer, but also to the forecast of certain psychological
and psychiatric conditions (P. 1 6).

Inspection of L-fields is done with special voltmeters and

electrodes which reveal different patterns or gradients in
voltages in different parts of the field (P. 1 7). Measurements
are taken of the "difference in voltage between two points on

'
- or close to - the surface of the living form. " For example,
•
•
'I �
# �
" In men and women, L-field voltages can be measured by
placing one electrode on the forehead and the other on the
chest or the hand " (P. 1 4). The L-field, Burr affirms, is a true

, //
/
\ field and not just a measurement of surface potential (P. 1 7) .
I
•
\ .· . . ""' 'I
/
/
/ 1 68
 Burr found the precise moment of ovulation in a woman
can be measured by these voltage gradients. Ovulation is
preceded by a steady but substantial rise in voltage, which
falls back to normal after the egg's release. Burr's recordings
have shown why the rhythm method of birth control is
inadequate since they have revealed that some women may
ovulate over the entire menstrual period ; ovulation · may
occur without menstruation ; menses may occur without
ovulation.

L-field measurements make it possible to measure the

effects of various stimuli to the nervous system (P. 93). And ,
as Burr intimates, whatever we do to the human nervous
system we cannot change its individual and inherent design as
determined by the L-field (P. 1 29). " Human behavior, " he
says, "is the consequence of the activity of the nervous
system - not the result of the imposition of legal and moral
laws upon the biological laws of the organism " (P. 93). " In
the case of man, . . . to the physical factors of environment,
the ideological environment must be added, because an idea
is just as valid a stimulus to the nervous system as a kick in
the teeth. " In fact, Burr asserts that it can be shown without
much question that ideas are actually more important as
stimuli to the human nervous system than are other types of
stimuli. " Ideas are - or induce - emotions which evoke
energy in the nervous system " (P. 90). The well-known
Research Psychiatrist Dr. Leonard J. Ravitz, emphasized this
fact with his observation that, " Both emotional activity and
stimuli of any sort involve mobilization of electric energy as
indicated on the galvanometer. Hence, both emotions and
stimuli evoke the same energy. Emotions can be equated with
energy " (P. 89). In fact, Dr. Ravitz has discovered that strong
emotions recalled during hypnosis can cause a voltage rise of
as much as from 1 5 to 50 millivolts. This, Burr feels, suggests
that psychiatrists of the future will be able to measure the
intensity of grief, anger, or love, electrically (P. 1 7), and that
consequently, electro-metric study of this phenomenon
seems relevant to the study of human behavior.

1 69
 According to Burr's findings, L-field voltages reflect mental
and emotional states as demonstrated in the fact that for
healthy, normal people, voltage rhythms can be plotted as a
steady curve which alters little over long periods (P. 1 8). By
contrast, with emotionally unstable people, voltage variations
cannot be plotted as steady, regular curves ; Burr confirms
" they display an erratic pattern which, in many cases, can be
detected within a few days" (P. 1 8). From these curves, then,
it is possible to predict in advance when the individual will be
at his best and when he will be feeling "below par" (P. 1 8).

Burr highlights one test situation wherein, in the group

under investigation, there was a particular student who
consistently showed a higher L-field voltage than all the rest.
It was subsequently learned that the boy had a history of
emotional instability. A few months after the experiment, he
became definitely psychotic and had to be remanded to an
institution (P. 8 5-86).

As part of the same experiment mentioned above, Yale

psychiatrists divided patients into three groups : ( 1 ) obvious
deviates from normal behavior, (2) those that were reasonably
normal, and (3 ) an intermediate group. L-field measurements
were carried out, but without the electro-metric investigator
knowing to which group an individual belonged. At the
conclusion of the experiment, the patients were again divided
into three groups : ( 1 ) those with markedly changed electro­
metrics, (2) those with relatively little change, and (3) an
intermediate group.

Finally, the groups selected by the psychiatrists were

compared with the groups selected by the electro-metric
investigator who - it should be emphasized - knew nothing
about the psychiatric diagnosis. Burr notes that the "results
of the study showed clearly that the group consisting of
those markedly deviated from normal behavior by psychiatric
examination also showed a similar deviation in electro-metric
examination " (P. 86).

1 70
 But beyond conditions peculiar to specific groups or indivi­
duals, L-fields, Burr asserts, " . . . by their very nature must
be influenced by the all-powerful fields of the cosmos* and
must, therefore, be an integral part of its overall design. In
other words, L-fields are links in a 'chain of authority. '
This starts with the simplest living forms, runs upward
- -
"
through all life on this planet to the most complex form we
1 W know - man - and then extends outward into space and
upward to an infinite authority, about which we can only
N speculate" (P. 1 1 4). And, "since it is common knowledge
that one field cannot exist within another field without an
interaction between them, and that the field properties of
the ionosphere are modified by the bursts of sunspot activity,
the effect of these extraterrestrial fields on the electrical
s characteristics of the environment of the earth are really no
more than might be expected "(P. 1 OS).
E
"J' Burr proved this by measuring the change in voltage
gradients of a number of trees over a 30 year period. He
found that the L-fields of the trees fluctuated with sunlight,
darkness, sunspots, magnetic storms and moon cycles. From
this we can extrapolate that human L-fields are similarly
affected.

"Since the field of a living system is an ordered pattern,

it must be a part of the overall or general pattern which
represents the Universe. It can be argued, therefore, that the
Universe is an electrical field and that everything that exists
in it is a subsidiary or component part of the total field"
(P. 1 27). Thus, it is submitted, "That we are fully justified
in regarding the fields of life as the instruments of physical
evolution, of which - on this planet at least - the human
nervous system is the masterpiece" (P. 1 29).

* Dr. Oliver Reiser, with concepts and language very similar to that of
Dr. Burr, has written about the possible effects of guiding fields of
influence which emanate from a cosmic source, and which direct the
architectural pattern for earth's organisms (3, P. 442) .

171
RADIONIC ENERGY The theory underlying Radionic Energies, or the practice of
Radiesthesia, embrace some of the same key principles upon
which Dr. Burr's L-field theory is founded. A further consi­
deration of Radionics and Radiesthesia should serve to
illumine this point.

Radionics is a branch of Radiesthesia ; and Radiesthesia

may be defined as "sensitivity to radiations" - to radiations
from any source - living or inert* . Dr. Robert Massy explains
that since the atomic and molecular structures of all
substances are in a state of motion they emit radiations that
can be detected by the radionics operator and the radi­
esthesist. (48 , P. 1 4).

The late George De La Warr, a veteran radionics pioneer,

once explained that "a basic idea in radionics is that each
individual, organism, or material, radiates and absorbs energy
via an energy-field peculiar to itself. The more complex
the material, the more complex the waveform. Living things,
like humans, emit a very complex wave spectrum of which
parts are associated with the various organs and systems of
the body" (9).

Radionics differ from other branches of Radiesthesia, e.g.

Divining and Dowsing, in that electronic equipment is used to
help the human "[Link]" detect the particular radiation
under investigation. Mark Gallert, N.D., an American, is
internationally known as one of the leading authorities on
the use of radionic equipment. He explains that the elec­
tronic parts used in the "Radionic Analyzer" are essentially
the same as those found in most popular electronic equip­
ment, but that the circuitry is quite different from conven­
tional electronic systems, since the "analyzer" works on
principles not generally known to electronics or electricity
(G).
George de la W arr

* I n the present context, the term "radiation" embraces the concept of

"rate of vibration" and thus is taken to be virtually synonymous with
the term "vibration."

1 72
 Dr. Gallert reveals further that radionic energies are subtle
energies which are not usually considered by conventional
science, and that the nerve tissues of the hands of the
"operator" are used to detect these energies which have been
"tuned in" by the Radionic Analyzer. Dr. Gallert explains
that to successfully operate the Radionic Analyzer requires a
kind of "sensitivity " latent or undeveloped in most people.
Each person in a healthy state, Gal�rt elaborates, has his own
electro-chemical balance. When illness or disease occurs,
this balance is upset (G). The radionic equipment, when used
for treatment, "tunes"radionic energies to the individual and
thereby restores a healthy balance. According to Gallert,
the outstanding principle of radionics is that of ' 'resonance,' '
i.e. establishing resonance with the radiations of the indivi­
dual, measuring their amplitude and then finding the remedy
which best resonates with a particular malady. Thus the
organ or system is returned to its healthy vibration (G). The
strength of the energies used in radionic treatment is on the
order of nerve currents, and not the large currents normally
used for therapeutic treatment (G). Gallert maintains that
one big advantage of radionics is its ability to go beyond the
effect and find the cause of complaints.

Dr. Mark Gallert

1 73
 While much of radionic diagnosis and treatment deals with
physiological conditions, there are vast and significant non­
physiological domains of the human personality into which it
also delves. Particularly, Dr. Gallert 's equipment, which is
unique among radionic devices in that it has a much larger
tuning panel ( 45 separate tuning dials), is capable of a broad
scope of diagnostic work. The "analyzer", Gallert reveals,
detects emotional stress by revealing the relation between
the conscious mind and the sub-conscious mind. Under
normal waking conditions, he explains, the rate of activity
.
o f the conscious mind should exceed that o f the sub-conscious
mind, but within certain definite limits. But Gallert maintains
that seriously disturbed people show a reversal of this rela­
tionship with the sub-conscious mind showing a high rate of
activity as compared to that of the conscious mind (G), (G- 1 ).

Another behavioral aspect of radionic energies involves what

Dr. Gallert terms "white light. " This phenomenon was origin­
ally discovered by A . Stanley Rogers under whom Gallert
studied.

Dr. Gallert 's "Radionic Analyzer"

1 74
 One of the means by which Gallert detects the presence of
"white light" is by placing the pick-up electrodes, connected
to the "analyzer", directly in the sunlight. With the proper
dial setting on the instrument's tuner panel, a maximum
"white light" reading is established. Maintaining this dial
setting over a 24-hour period, it is discovered that some
amount of "white light" , albeit less in intensity, is continu­
ously present, even in darkness (G). From this Gallert
concludes that, while the sun is the continuous source of
"white light " its presence is not restricted to the visible wave­
lengths of solar radiations, but that some additional, all­
pervading, sun-generated energy factor is present upon earth
at all times (G), (G- 1 1 ).

Elaborating on this phenomenon, Gallert asserts that all

of the earth's organisms, all humans, absorb varying amounts
of "white light, " depending on factors apparently inherent
within the organism itself. Moreover, the amount of "white
light" will also vary depending on factors apparently inherent
within the organism itself. Moreover, the amount of " white
light " will also vary depending on geographical location (G).
Gallert, who has been engaged in radionic research for over
2 7 years, says he has confirmed this latter peculiarity over a
period of years by taking readings as he travelled throughout
the United States and abroad, and that some cities, towns,
and communities do not have as much " white light " as do
others (G).

Dr. Gallert explains that the biological significance of

"white light" is that it is a constructive energy and helps to
insure good health. But "white light" is not associated with
physical well-being alone, it also has a bearing on one's
emotions and mental state. Gallert reports, on the basis
of results obtained on his Radionic Analyzer, primarily with
adults, that a happy, constructive person measures greater
"white light " than does one who is morose and negative in
attitude (G- 1 ).

Thus far, we have reviewed aspects of radionic energtes

as they might pertain to the physical and psychological
dimensions of human behavior - but the matter does not
1 75
 ,,
• -
... -
-
..
•

� ,. ...
�\. ... .... :..
...
.. . ...
...-_ ......
.... . -:-­
... -- -·--· •
.. ...
...... -'::;. .. · ·--
... ....... ... .... ..
... ...
·:

Photograph of the standard radionic d iagnostic instrument used by the De La Warr

Researchers. (Courtesy De La Warr Laboratories).

1 76
end there. Dr. Gallert points out that besides the visible
physical body, man has a series of fmer bodies (not normally
visible) - the Auric Bodies. These are graduated according to
the density of their constituent material - the lower the
density, the higher the speed of vibration of the atoms
forming the material of a particular auric vehicle (G), (G-1 ).
After man's physical body, and in order of decreasing density
and increasing ' 'fineness,' ' the names given to the various
auric bodies are :

1 ) etheric body (or vital body)

2) astral body (or emotional body)
3 ) mental body
4) causal body (G- 1 )*

Gallert notes that auric bodies interpenetrate the physical

body and each other, and that there is no spot inside the
physical body that is not also inside and a part of each of
the auric bodies (G-1 ). It would be an error, Gallert says,
to think that auric bodies are only nimbuses that surround
the physical body. Weaknesses or adverse conditions existing
in an auric body, which hamper the flow of energy at that
level, can have a corresponding adverse effect upon the
physical body or upon human behavioral modes (G- 1 ) * * .

The "tuned electronic analytical equipment" devised by

Gallert can be used to determine the auric level at which
any trouble or damage is located, ¥·and treatment directed
selectively to the appropriate auric'"level (G), (G- 1 ). Gallert
confmns that the principle of ' 'vibratory resonance' ' applies
to man's auric bodies, just as it does to the grosser (denser)
physical vehicle (G). A term which Gallert has used in con­
nection with radionic analysis and treatment of human auric
levels is ' 'Esoteric Electronics' ' (G-1 ).
* Other aspects of human auric functions are discussed i n succeeding
pages, where we see that the human aura consists of seven bodies,
according to Dr. Christopher · H i l ls.

** D r. R a l ph Sierra has suggested that electromagnetic factors associa­

ted )Nith some weather conditions m ight also affect human auric bodies
(C-2).

1 77
 An obvious and perpetual question that arises in Dr. Gallert's
work is, "What kind of energies are being de'alt with? "
Gallert replies, "That is difficult to say," but, "in my view it
is a complex of energies including some known factors and
probably some unknown ones" (G). Gallert explains that
radionic energies interact with a number of known energies -­
magnetism, light, static electricity, and radio waves - but
cannot be identified as belonging to this group of electro­
m agnetic forces (G). An,� further to this, he observes that
radionic energies manifest differently at each level of the
human make-up. Concluding, Gallert says, ' 'I know how to
use it, I know how to get the effects I am after" (G). But
precise details of what radionic energy is, and exactly how it
is governed, still elude Gallert, even after 2 7 years work in
the field.

Interpenetrating Auric Bodies

. .

1 78
RADIESTHESIA* Radiesthesia differs from radionics in that the operator
realizes that the instrument of detection is his 3 7-mile long
nervous system, which in turn is tuned to different vibrations
of this subtle energy by the power o f his consciousness
)*
(48, P. 24 . The radiesthesist does not shun radionics but
realizes that the radionic analyzers are merely extensions of
the operator's consciousness. In this regard the radiesthesist
chooses to use the more convenient pendulum as his ampli­
fier and selector of this subtle energy.

Unfortunately, most people, on first use of a pendulum, do

not know the above principle, nor are they aware of the
necessity of tuning the pendulum to resonate with their
own nervous system, and hence their results are not consis­
tent. Dr. Robert Massy 's Alive to the Universe is a handbook
which leads the reader step-by-step into becoming a radies­
thesist, including the tuning of the pendulum with the aid
of a compass ( 48, P. 40) and the detection of positive and
negative magnetic energies from the north and south poles
of the compass (48, P. 42).

In extensive tests over a ten year period, Dr. Christopher

Hills has shown that 80 percent of the population can
readily develop the sensitivity needed to t une into these
subtle radiations (42, P. 68 ). He has made this easier by
developing a line of selective pendulums pre-tuned to
specific energies and containing amplifiers inherent within
their design. The pendulums and their specific wave fields
are shown in the following table. The success of this
approach is summed up by Yanni Toussulist who, on
completing a weekend seminar on Aura Balancing by Massy,
noted that, to his amazement, everyone of the eighteen

* The ideas presented i n these pages are taken from "Al ive to the
Universe" by Dr. Robert M assy (48) .
* * G eorge and Marjorie De La Warr are the first to admit that con·
sciousness is the power beh i nd their instruments.
t Yanni Toussul is is a counse l i ng psychologist and i nstructor i n trans·
personal psychology at Antioch College West.

1 79
PENDULUM WAVE FIELD USES 48, P. :

Merkhet Thought waves Thought reading and 101

insight validation
Spectrum Mirror Auric energies Positive & negative 97
conditions of the chakras
Hills Positive Green Life force & Charging with life force 89
pyramid energies & measuring organic
qualities of foods
Left-hand Spiral Mirror Negative fields Evaluating teachers, authori- 94
ties, political leaders, etc.
Pi-Ray Supersensor Cells, Tissues Disease, cancer 99
and biophysical electricity
Plain Wood, Point Below Emotional fields Changing moods, recording 92
the chemical secretions froni
the endocrine system
Turenne Magnet-fitted Horizontal magnetic, The radiesthesists basic 86
Pendulum Vertical electric & research tool for subtle
East-West flows energies

1 80
 participants accomplished :

a) use of the Hills Positive Green pendulum to

detect life forces from people, plants and foods,
b) use of the Ankh divining rod to locate under­
ground streams of water,
c) use of the Spectrum Mirror and Positive Green
pendulums to detect and balance auric fields,
d) visual ability to see each other's auras and the
subtle changes in the aura colors with mood.

Massy states that although he carries a complete set of

pendulums, as pictured on the previous page, some of their
functions overlap. He cautions beginners to choose their
pendulums according to their needs.

MASSY'S LAWS I asked Massy to explain his laws of radiesthesia in terms

OF RADIESTHESIA of the content of this work. The five laws are :

First Law
IF IT EXISTS, IT IS KNOWN.
Since everything vibrates it gives off radiation. The radia­
tions of all thoughts and all entities from the past or the
present are contained in the universal field. Radiesthesists
can tap into this storehouse of knowledge (48, P. 1 27 ) .

Second Law
THE PENDULUM WILL RESPOND TO WHATEVER
CONCEPTS ARE IN YOUR MIND.
Words convey different meanings to different people
depending on their experiences. So seeming inconsistencies can
arise due to different levels of consciousness ( 48,P.53).

Third Law
WHAT WORKS FOR ONE PERSON DOES NOT
NECESSARILY WORK FOR ANOTHER.

181
 Fourth Law
IF IT WORKS FOR YOU, USE IT.

In laws three and four, Massy is referring to technique.

Their purpose is to allow the radiesthesist to become his
own authority and not be under pressure to conform to
another's reality (4 8 , P. 5 7).

Fifth Law
THE ACCURACY OF YOUR RESULTS IS PROPORTION-
AL TO THE QUALITY OF YOUR CONSCIOUSNESS.
Doubt, anxiety, overconfidence, wishful thinking, etc. in
the radiesthesist all create wave fields of the same order as
those being detected and hence interfere with the results.
Clear consciousness gives pure results. (48 , P. 1 04).

DR. ROBERT MAS SY

182
AURA BALANCING Using a Spectrum Mirror pendulum, Massy detects the
rotation of the vortex of energy emitting from one chakra
at a time. If the rotation is clockwise indicating a positive
field he leaves it alone. Anticlockwise rotations of negative
energy are interpreted on a proportional scale, e . g. two
swings indicate a problem of the same order of magnitude
as a common cold, four swings : flu, twenty : breakdown of
tissues, continually negative : cancer. These readings are
taken over each of the seven chakras corresponding to the
physical, social, intellectual, emotional, conceptual, intuitive
and imaginative parts of the aura. For each reading the
pendulum is tuned to the color that resonates with that
chakra, and the energies recorded. Then the radiesthesist
tunes into the person 's subconscious to determine the true
cause of the manifested problem. Massy says, " There is no

Pos; tive Com b;n a t; on E q_u a l emission s

Pen dul1.1m
swin.9 of p�sitive a!'d
fol lows vortex chak ra e n erg� pen � u l u m
ne.9ot"'e energ•es
S w,1 n 9 s

As viewed C h a n g i�g
[Link] h ea l th cond i+•on
from top
Serial S w i n g s
2} Lf . • • • cP

N e,gat ive.
il'l'lbolanc e

1 83
 point in removing the negative energies and replacing them
with positive ones and making the person feel great for a
few days, if a few weeks later the problem returns because
the cause has not been worked on. "

Once the cause has been determined the energies are

changed using the Hills Positive Green and the person feels
a tingling, light, peaceful sensation over his entire being. The
process of problem identification is so fast it has been
likened to two years on the psychiatrist's couch. More and
more medical doctors and psychologists are using this
technique with or without the patient present since a
witness of the patient in the form of a bloodspot, photo­
graph or hair gives the same results.

LOCATION EXPERIMENTS When asked about location of missing people, places and
objects by map dowsing, Massy comments that there is a
difficulty with scientifically documenting the results, because
of the human variable and the fact that most people do not
report back the results to the diviner.

The most recent person who did report back was Delores
Crayton who consulted Massy with a map of the Washington­
Vancouver, British Columbia area and asked where she would
find a new home for her and her children. Divining over the
map, Dr. Massy pinpointed a corner of Orcas Island. Three
weeks later, he received a note from Mrs. Crayton from
which the following is extracted.

. . . "My new home is exactly where you said it would be . . . . We

found the house the first day and also a place to live for a few weeks
while we are in escrow - both happenings apparently considered
 SUPERSENSONICS In his book Supersensonics Hills takes the subject of subtle
energies into the deeper realms of consciousness. He says,
11 Supersensonics is a practical tool for developing direct
perception into the mysteries of Nature. This new science is
an awesome tool limited only by the user's own conscious­
ness. If this Aladdin's lamp should fall into the hands of
one whose consciousness has been refined and purified,
Supersensonics can bring him close to omniscience. 11 Hills
continues in his book Nuclear Evolution,

"Throughout history there have been few diviners who developed

the Supersense and found the secret of calor and the chakra functions.
For probing the nature of our self we can save ourselves years of work
by using the colors of our aura as an indicator of our evolutionary
level, the lev:els of light and calor intake we lack and need to work on,
plus the levels we can relate to others on effectively and ineffectively.
We can learn how to extract from light the particular colors we need
Supersenson ics -- the to synthesize for health and growth of the Supersense in us.
radiesthesists' encyclopedia

Colors have been associated with chakra

functions for centuries, but all ofthis mater­
ial has been contradictory and based on
unreliable opinion unsupported by research.
Christopher Hills maintains that the theory 6 I ndigo ( i ntuition )
of Nuclear Evolution is the first systematic
correlation of chakra functions with the 5 Blue (concepts)
spectrum and the first to prove that levels of
consciousness not only have direct corres­
4 Green (emotions)
pondence with specific personality patterns
but also with colors. Various tests and
3 Yellow ( i ntel l ect)
checks with clairvoyants who see the colors
agree that the Hills system is the only
reliable outline, since most traditional
2 Orange (social )
chakra colors were used as teaching devices.
Hills arrived at his results by Supersenson­
ic methods which were then checked out All these rep resen t d ifferent levels of p h ysi·
with psychologists and other scientists. cal a n d mental function i ng wh ich i n terface
with o u r spiritual levels of perception.
Hence he has come up with a completely
original system which corresponds to the
realities of physics and the experience of
time and the nature of light

1 85
 By taking a Supersensonic instrument and measuring our own color
emanations, divining our physical needs and psychic needs, we can
learn to mix all the light colors in our environment as well as the
inner worlds of psychophysical energies. The e ffects of reflected
colors from walls, flowers and objects in the environment can pro­
foundly affect the flow of psychic electricity through the chakra
system even though they do not have the power to condition and
create our level of consciousness the same way light colors do. We can
actually take in the vibrations of color like we take in food to nourish
the b ody. So it is important to be able to detect with the Supersense
just what colors we need at different times of the day and whether
they are the colors of light from radiant sources such as sun or lamps
or stars, or are reflected from pigment light sources.

The neu ro-muscu lar response of the

d iviner's i nstrument is caused by a
resonance phenomenon with l ight.
The aura pendu l u m reacts when the
cursor is set to a pigment color
because the u nconscious mind can
sense the different colors of the
· chakra functions when the thought
of that color is held. I n the same way
a witness of the color can be held i n
the hand. l t enables anyone to use
their sixth sense (the Supersense)
which is h ighly developed i n ani mals,
bi rds, i nsects, etc. and latent i n man.
D r. Ch ristopher H i l ls
"Supersensonics"

1 86
 Hills' research shows that the human body is a resonating
system whose aura can be measured according to the excite­
ment of the electron shells around the atoms of our bodies.
Various reactions can be detected with the instruments of
Supersensonics, such as dowsing rods, rules and pendulums,
which react at specific distances away from a psychic center.
These centers set up edges or outlines of spherical wave­
fields depending on the health of the person and the number
of chakras functioning. In a healthy person, Hills states, the
pendulum reacts at approximately 1 3 , 1 9, 2 5 , 50-5 5 , 62, 68
and 80 ems. away from the center of a sphere around each
chakra center.

L-field of L- 1 3 to L-80 nodal

points around a healthy human.

80 68 62 55 50 25 19 13

1 87
 The earth itself receives light from the cosmos like a giant
chakra and within its magnetic field there are subsidiary
vortexes spiralling around several centers which resonate
with different types of crystal structures upon the earth.

According to Hills the spherical field which surrounds the

earth corresponds to the universal field that surrounds the
human body showing an L-field of 1 3 to L-80 - resonant
nodal points which make the pendulum " come alive " when
passed over the invisible field edges at seven points which
correspond to one of the colors of the spectrum. Horizontal
or vertical polarity of the color is determined by its being in
phase with the vertical electric plane at right angles to the
horizontal magnetic plane. The human consciousness
resonates to vertical electric energy at mental levels of mind
energy and horizontal magnetic relates to emotional chemical
energies in the human body. These in turn correspond to the
nervous system 's seven plexus electromagnetic energies and
the endocrine system's seven chemical hormones.

THE E N D O C R I N E G LA N DS
SEX GLAND S : Endocrine glands regulate many vital body
OVARIES processes. The thyroid helps control
energy production; the parathyroid distributes
calcium between blood and bone. Adrenal
glands regulate salt and water levels
and secrete stimulants; cells in the pancreas
control blood sugar. Sex glands govern
reproduction and secondary sexual
characteristics. The pituitary controls some
of the other endocrine glands.

1 88
DR. CHRISTOPHER HILLS

1 89
CHAKRA ENERGIES
 CHAKRA ENERGIES

=�:::
I
physical body
etheric body
dy

The traditional idea that man had five bodies or sheaths of different states of subtle
matter did not take into account man's abil ity to use the Su persense which adds two
more dimensions of consciousness on the intuitional level and the imagination level. lt is
now known that energies in the electromagnetic spectrum vibrate in bands. Different
individuals are tuned to different parts of this spectrum and therefore may disagree in
thei r descriptions of reality. The continuum of consciousness extends the electromagnetic
spectrum and is divided into transpersonal bands which correspond with these seven levels
of energy which can be called bodies or vehicles. --Dr. Christopher Hil ls, "Nuclear Evolu­
tion" (44, P. 35).

191
THE ENERGIES Earlier, in our discussion of radionic energies, mention was
made of man's auric bodies. A predominant aspect of the
human auric structure, particularly of the etheric body, is
that of the Chakra System. * The term " chakra" is derived
from Sanskrit and means a revolving wheel. Researchers agree
that there are seven principal chakra centers located along
the spine and they are generally described as a series of wheel­
like energy vortices in the surface of the etheric body of man,
force centers of a saucer-like depression which provide points
of connection at which energy flows from one of man's
vehicles or bodies, to another. The late Bishop C. W.
Leadbeater, noted clairvoyant and Theosophical investigator,
observed that these chakra " wheels " are perpetually rotating,
and into the hub or open mouth of each, a force is always
flowing, and that without this inrush of energy the physical
body could not exist (4 1 , P. 5 ) .

Swadl11sthana. theAbdomma/Cakra

* Throughout the remainder of this volume, reference is made to

numerous accounts given by i ndividuals possessing the "psychic"
faculty of clairvoyance, The writer feels that to try and "make a case"
for the existence of supra-normal perception is not with in the intent of
this work. Thus, should the reader desire further "proof" of the exist·
ence of clairvoyance, he is referred to some of the sources l isted in the
present bibliographic reference, or to the authors or publ ishers of those
works for additional explanative texts. Some observations on the
faculty of clairvoyance are offered in the i ntroduction to this section.

1 92
 According to reliable clairvoyant observations, the chakra
has numerous lines of force radiating outward from a
common center - this is seen to result from a " primary"
force of external origin which enters the center of the chakra
(4 1 , P. 7). The words of C. W. Leadbeater continue the
narrative of the effects of this incoming force :

'The energy which pours into each chakra center from without sets up
at right angles to itself, secondary forces in undulatory circular motion,
·
j ust as a bar magnet thrust into an induction coil produces a current of
electricity which flows around the coil at right angles to the axis of the
magnet. Each of the secondary forces which sweep round the chakra
has its own characteristic wavelength, just as has light of a certain color;
but instead of moving in a straight line as light does, it moves along
relatively large undulations of various sizes, each of which is some
multiple of the smaller wa"Xelengths within it. The secondary force
weaves itself under and over the radiating currents of the primary force,
just as a basket-work might be woven round the spokes of a carriage
wheel. The wavelengths are infinitesimal, and probably thousands of
them are included within one of the undulations. As the forces rush
round in the vortex, these oscillations of different sizes, crossing one
another in this basket-work fashion, produce a flower-like form. "
(4 1 , P. 7-8)

As previously indicated, the seven major chakra centers are

located along the etheric counterpart of the physical spine,
and the energy which flows between these centers ties them
into a single system with constant interaction between each
unit. Moreover, Dr. Christopher Hills, · a widely recognized
authority on chakra energies and their effects, reports that
the whirling vortex of energy within each chakra is actually a
spiral, and that the energy passing through that spiral does so
at a different angle for each chakra. Although it is the same
energy coursing through the system, this difference of angle,
Hills claims, produces a different manifestation of the energy
in each chakra (J). Continuing, Hills reports that there are
also present and flowing within the human chakra system,
polarized energies : positive and negative. These are comple-

1 93
 mentary forces which exert a mutual stimulation, one upon
the other; once the flow is completed for one side of the
chakra system, the energy then moves back down the
opposite side of the system, thus continuously alternating
between the positive and negative channels (J). Further,
according to Hills, in each chakra there is a definite cross­
over point for the positive and negative flows of energy. If, at
this cross-over point a balancing of the two energies occurs,
an " exalted state of consciousness" results, the nature of
which depends on, in which chakra the balancing occurs. But
to achieve such an effect, both forms of energy must flow at

. _· _-

.
� _ � �
equal amplitude and frequency (J). Balancing at the root
chakra is a result of climaxing during exual inte course.

- · - · - · - _ . ·_ ·
·
.. .'� Dr. Htlls has also contnbuted observations regardmg the
·

: � '.:� interaction between the chakras and the external environ-

�
·
- - · - _ - _
.

ment. He explains that chakra energy of many fine bending

lines spirals outwards from the center of the chakra creating a
force-field which is constantly interacting with the environ­
ment and detecting electrical tensions therein. Consequently,
when clouds pass overhead carrying static charges, these
forces are naturally but unconsciously picked up by the
human body. In a like manner, Hills maintains that, as the
sun 's rays impinge upon us at different times of the day, we
are affected differently by them, the chakra system being the
detecting apparatus in botli above instances (J). The fact is,
Hills expounds, an individual's intake and utilization of
incoming solar and cosmic radiation is determined by the
internal conditions of energy flow within one's own chakra
system. Thus, if an individual is properly " polarized, " he
soaks up more of the cosmic radiation than one who is not
properly " polarized, " in which case the cosmic energy simply
passes right through this latter person's body (J). Hills'
observation is corroborated by the work of Bishop Lead beater
who has pointed out that the efficiency of the chakra system,
e. g. how much energy is taken in from environment, how
well this energy is distributed and utilized within the system
itself, varies with the individual (4 1 , P. 5 ).

1 94
The second chakra is a six-petaled lotus. It has six whorls of energy, whereas the bottom
chakra has four and the top chakra has one thousand. The movements of this energy in each
chakra are you. If the vortices are swirling to the left, the entire lotus will also spin to leftward
.
like a turning ferris wheel, and the life-force of the universe will be sucked in negatively. The
arrows of the left-hand diagram show this sucking in or absorbing of the light of consciousness:
the "getting" or "taking" vibration of a selfish person. The same chakra with its energies
spinning in right-hand spirals and turning like a wheel to the right, takes in the light of the
universe in a positive way and radiates it out in love and selflessness. Such a person has a
bright aura.
Diagram and caption courtesy of Dr. Ann Ray, "Journey Into Light" (50, P. 79).

1 95
Symbolic representation of the chakras and their distribution in the etheric counterpart
of the human physical organism. Note that from numbers 1 through 7, the symbols depict
increasing complexity of design - this reportedly reflects an actual graduated complexity
in chakra function and rate of vibration, with the crown center being the most complex
and having the highest rate of vibration, while the sacral or root center is the least complex
and with the lowest rate of vibration. (Courtesy Astara)
1 96
CHAKRAS AND ASSOCI­ As already suggested, chakra energies are not phenomena
ATED BIOLOGICAL/ which are limited to assessment and understanding exclusive­
BEHAVIORAL SYSTEMS ly within a framework of vibrations, radiations, and undula­
tions. Physical health, as well as emotional and mental factors
are intimately associated with the various functions of the
chakra system.

Dr. Gallert tells us that the chakra centers are points of

interchanging energies between man 's etheric* and physical
bodies. And besides that, that there are currents of energy
flowing from one chakra to another at the same auric level.
These energy flows, Gallert asserts, are vital to the continu­
ance of the state of 11 aliveness 11 of the physical vehicle (G- 1 ).
Ideally, Gallert resumes, the flow should be equal for each
current at each of the life centers. However, many things
occur in life which tend to set up blockages or restrictions to
full flow, and most individuals show a gradual narrowing or
lessening of the flow from one chakra to the next. In persons
having serious problems with health, emotions, or thoughts,
one finds sudden drop-offs, large reductions in the flow of
energies at one or more of the chakra centers.

* Another researcher, Phoebe Bendit, reports as fol l ows : "Occult

science teaches that the e nergies i nvolved in etheric phenomena are, i n
nature, the same as those o f the remainder o f the electromagnetic
range. They are subtler and h ave a shorter wavelength, while potential
d ifferences are very m uch smal ler. Here we are dea l i ng with energies
possibly expressible in terms of m icro-microvolts, or one b i l l ionth of a
volt" (37, P. 1 6) .

Stil l further, C. W . Leadbeater has n oted that the particles of the

etheric part of m an's body are constantly changing just as are those of
the denser physical body. This etheric matter is al legedly thrown off via
the pores, as is gaseous matter, so that when two persons are close
together each necessarily absorbs much of the physical e manations of
the other (4 1 , P. 66).

1 97
 It becomes apparent, then, that there are several different
kinds (wavelengths) of energies with varying degrees of
admixture or compounding, flowing through man's chakra
system. And one of the principal energies in this regard,
noted by Bishop Leadbeater, is that of the "vitality " radiation
whose source is the sun, and which manifests itself in the
physical, as well as the emotional and mental dimensions of
the human make-up (4 1 , P. 3 5 & 42). Lead beater contends
that the "vitality " force emanating from the sun is not to be
confused with electricity, though it in some ways resembles
electricity (4 1 , P. 43). Extending this view, Dr. Gallert has
noted that the vital life energy needed to keep the human
body alive, is progressively stepped down in intensity through
the various auric bodies of increasing density, with the final
step-down and energy transfer occurring between the etheric
and the physical body (G- 1 ).

Virtually all researchers of chakra phenomena recognize a

further linking between the chakra complex and man's
physiological/behavioral systems. This involves the associa­
tion of particular chakra centers with specific ganglia of the
autonomic nervous system, and with specific glands of the
body 's endocrine system. One distinguished clairvoyant
researcher, Mrs. Phoebe Bendit, has noted that the " relation
between the chakras and the autonomic and endocrine
systems . . . is more than merely spacial or anatomical, it
is also functional. And when a major endocrine change such
as that of puberty takes place in the body it is accompanied
by - indeed, preceded by - a corresponding change of
consciousness, or psychic activity, and the chakras are
directly related to the psychic state of the individual " (3 7,
P. 26). A chart in this section shows the various correspond­
ences between the chakras, the nerve plexuses, and the
endocrine glands, as generally accepted by researchers in the
field.
Several observations are available on the functional nature
of the chakra-neural-endocrine tie-in. Mrs. Bendit has written
that the chakras, taken collectively, are a manifestation of
the whole of the individual in action.

1 98
 Nothing, she maintains, of non-physical man becomes effec­
tive in the dense worlds except through the chakras. Illustrat­
80 ing this point, she notes that if the chakra associated with the
solar plexus becomes paralyzed, whether from psychic inhibi­
tion or by the misuse of drugs, emotion will not be felt in
- - - . . 68 physical consciousness, while inhibitions of the head centers
will cancel the expression of thought or intuition (37, P. 24).
It is now well established that the pituitary gland functions in
a controlling or governing role with respect to the other
glands of the endocrine system. Bendit asserts that the chakra
- - - 62 corresponding to the pituitary gland is also extremely import­
ant in maintaining the general balance of the lower chakra
centers (3 7 , P. 26). Continuing her assessment of the various
chakra functions, Bendit reveals the following : "A highly
intellectual person who had remained emotionally infantile,
55
may have a labile, shallow, unprotected solar plexus chakra
- ·

which makes him prey to hysteria and lack of control. One

50 who may be very intelligent, but who has no creative ability,
may find himself with an immature throat center, and hence
liable to temporary loss of voice. Physically, functional heart
trouble, and emotionally, the inability to love may be linked
with the chakra corresponding to the heart. Sexual aberra­
tions are often associated with the sacral center" (3 7, P. 29).

Another outstanding contemporary clairvoyant, Mr. Geoffrey

Hodson, relates that the solar chakra is the receiving station
for all sub-conscious emotional vibrations, which are
conveyed by that chakra to the physical solar plexus nerve
ganglion. Further, Hodson reports that one of the basic
functions of the spleen chakra is the absorption, assimilation,
and distribution of life force. According to him, lowered
vitality and nervous debility can frequently be traced to
malfunction of this chakra (38, P. 1 25). This view of the
spleen center's function is supported by the perception of
Leadbeater, who observed that that particular chakra
"specializes" "vitality " radiation whose source is the sun
( 1 4, P. 3 5 ).

1 99
 CHAKRA-NEURAL-ENDOCRINE CORRESPONDENCES

Sanskrit Engl ish *Surface

Name of Chakra Name of Chakra Location Neural Plexus Endocrine Gland

Sahasrara Crown Top of Head Brain Dendrites Pineal

Ajna Brow Mid-Brow Carotid, Medulla Pituitary

Oblongata

Vishuddha Throat At the Throat Pharyngeal, Thyroid and

Plexus Cervicus Para-Thyroid
N
0
0 Anahata Heart Over the Heart Cardiac Thymus

Manipura Solar Area of Solar Plexus Coeliac, Solar, Adrenals (and

Plexus Epigastricus possible Pancreas)

Swadhisthana Spleen Over the Spleen Splenic, Plexus Spleen

Hypogastricus

Muladhara Sacral Base of Spine Coccygeal, Sacral Gonads

*The root of each chakra energy vortex is reportedly cantered at a definite point along the etheric counterpart of the human
spine and not in the organ itself. Nevertheless, the chakra mouth, the bell-l ike surface opening, is often described as being
generally located near or over a specific organ, hence the name given to a particul ar center.
 THE CHAKRAS AND THE NERVOUS SYSTEM

(7) Crown Center

(6) Brow Center

Carotid plexus

Superior cervical
sympathetic ganglion

Pharyngeal plexus ----\/J

---k�'l.?'f'J�

(S) Throat Center

(4) Sympathetic trunk

) Solar Center

1 lumbar spinal ganglion

1 sacral spinal ganglion

Coccygeal spinal ganglion

Sacral Center (1)

TIE-IN MECHANISMS It would be useful to include in this overview o f chakra
energy, some discussion of the possible linking mechanisms
between the chakras and their corresponding physiological/
behavioral systems. Three leading researchers of chakra
phenomena provide us with further insight into the matter.
First, Professor William Tiller, Chairman, Department of
Material Sciences, Stanford University, has offered the follow­
ing tentative explanation of the chakra/endocrine tie-in :

"The function of these chakra/endocrine pairs is very much like that

of power receiving stations and transmitting stations in our vehicles.
Both power and information are tapped from a cosmic or environmen­
tal source into the etheric. It is transduced into a different form into
the physical, is used to function in life and, in transmuted form is
radiated through the endocrine/chakra unit back into the environment.
The currents in the individual circuits provide important energies for
various parts of the body. In principle we can think of great energy
streams flowing through space and passing through our bodies
unabsorbed and unnoticed unless we tune the chakra to couple with
this power source and transduce some of its energy into the etheric
system ( 40, P. 1 7- 1 9).

These seven endocrine centers have been called our sacred centers, and
through them we radiate transmitting information of a quality
(frequency) associated with that center. As an example, the thymus
gland is supposed to be the center that controls the quality of love in all
its spectral range from hate through the various expressions of what we
call love. Now, I postulate that an entity radiates from this gland a field
that is broadcast through space and is absorbed in the similar gland by
another entity. This stimulates the gland and generates some biological
activity within the organism. If the second entity radiates an in-phase
vibration back to the first, then the love consciousness can form a bond
between them. Now, if the first entity radiates at small power and over
a very limited range of expression, then only a few selected individuals
will receive this radiation and be aware of this love. However, if the
entity has built himself to radiate at large power and over a very broad
band of the spectral distribution, then many, many entities will receive
this radiation, be aware of this love and be nourished by this love. Since

202
 most of the audiences of Christ did not understand him intellectually,
I suspect that the reason they had such a great response to him was
because he was transmitting from this gland at very, very high power
levels with very, very broad transmission which was received by,
absorbed by, and served to nourish, many people. They were aware of
it only at an organismic level" (40, P . 20).

Next, there is the suggestion of Bishop Leadbeater that, so

far as the emotional and mental dimensions of man are
concerned, the chakras apparently serve as a kind of transmit­
ter/receptor, in that certain emotional energies generated
within the individual are released via one or more of the
chakras into the surrounding environment. And, reciprocally,
emotional and mental energies already present in the external
environment are detected, and are frequently internalized by
the individual, also by way of one or more of the chakra
centers. (4 1 , P. 48-50).

Violet - - - . - - . ...
I ndigo . . . _ .

B l ue

G reen . . _ _

Ye l low .. .
...2.. Orange .
.L Red . . . . .
�------����--

S u pe r s e n s o n i c r u l e s a n d wa ve - g u i des
H uma n Ch a k ra s y s t em a c t s a s a
reco rd the p ropo r t i on a l
wave- g u i de fo r cos m i c r8ys
re l a t i on s h i p s i n the
and re f r a c t s t h em i n to
wave f i e l ds o f a s ph e re
l eve l s of b i o- e l ec t r i c i ty
of p s y cho- p hy s i ca l
c a l l ed Con s c i ou s ne s s
ene r gy .

203
 Finally, Dr. Christopher Hills provides his interpretation of
the chakra-physiological/behavioral systems link-up which, it
will be noted, happens to be firmly supportive of that
previously given by Professor Tiller. According to Hills, the
etheric chakra system is connected by way of invisible (i. e.
to normal vision) forces to the body 's endocrine and nervous
systems. And certain of the body 's chemicals and nutrients
are governed by these interrelated functions of chakra-nerves­
glands. Consequently, special chemical secretions in the body
are regulated by what is occurring in the chakras. And hence,
one's personality is determined by chakra/neural regulation
of particular glandular secretions. Hills maintains that to
change a single component of the endocrine secretions is to
change one 's personality, and that the triggering element
behind the controlled secretions of the endocrine glands is
the "psychic chakra electricity " (J).

Christopher Hills conceives of our

consciousness in his theory of the Nuclear
Self as an absorber of all radiation and
light He likens it to a black hole in which all
outlines are eventually annihilated so that the
nucleus becomes one homogeneous yolk or
plasma.

204
 CROWN CHAKRA
(Pineal 3 rd
Ventricle)

B R OW C H A K R A
(Pituitary G. Vagus -
H ypothalamus Eyes)
3rd V E N T R I C L E O F
BRAIN

T H R OAT C H A K RA
(Thyroid, Pharynx ,
Mouth, Nose, Ears)

H EA R T C H A K R A
( Heart, Thymus)

C O E LIAC P L E X US,
(Adrenals, Pancreas)

SOLAR P L E X US \
CHAKRA - 1
'
t.l

P E LV I C C H A K R A

SAC R A L C H A K R A
(Anus)

205
CHAKRA S OCIAL
MANIFESTATIONS
CHAKRA S OCIAL MANIFESTATIONS

207
THE CHAKRAS AND As a metaphysician and philosopher, the research of
TIME PERCEPTION Dr. Christopher Hills extends far beyond the physical/
biological domains of human existence. His investigations
deal with man 's social, behavioral motivations of the temporal
world, as well as with causal factors which are not time­
bound. The chakras, Hills explains, are very definitely associ­
ated with man's behavior as a social being, with the funda­
mental drives peculiar to each person, and with man 's percep­
tion of time. It is this latter chakra association, with its
behavioral implications, that concerns us in the present text.

As suggested in the preceding discussion of Chakra Energies,

each chakra has its own rate of vibration, its own frequency
as distinct from the others. Moreover, according to Dr. Hills,
the human chakra system mediates man's experience of time,
each person having an innate tendency to experience time
predominately through one particular chakra more than the
others. This means, then, in Hills' view, that each individual,
without being aware of it, has within himself a time world
which is somehow conditioned by the rate of vibration of his
most prominently active chakra (J).

Thus, a conceptual framework is laid for understanding how

the flow and vibration of chakra energies might have immedi­
ate implications for human behavioral patterns, thereby
influencing one 's perspective of, and reactions to, events
occurring within his social environment.

What follows is a brief general discussion and condensation

of Dr. Hills' concept of Chakra/Time Perception, Personality
interrelationships. Portions of Hills' theory, as presented
here, are available in his book, Nuclear Evolution, * while
further explanations were obtained from Hills himself by way
of lecture and private conversation. Also, a chart in this
section offers an additional comparative presentation of these
chakra factors .

. * Dr. Christopher Hills has since expanded his book "Nuclear Evolution :
D iscovery of the Rainbow Body" to i nclude all the points covered i n
private conversation with Dr. Beasley.

208
DR. CHRISTOPHER HILLS

209
SACRAL CHAKRA This is the chakra which deals with physical sense percep­
tion, and its time world is now - the immediate Now. One
functioning through this chakra is mainly concerned with
physical inputs, sensual stimuli of the present moment. This
personality tends to incorporate past and future events into a
response pattern dealing with the tangible present. Practicali­
ty, quickness of response and effectiveness in dealing with
the physical environment are characteristics of those manifest­
ing the prevailing energies o f the sacral chakra. Operating
through this center, an individual 's actions usually do not
derive from any intellectual grounds or predetermined plan.
These persons experience time from moment to moment, a
First Chakra
need for the stimulus of activity, to experience continuously
( Root or S acral) new and novel situations. Consequently, gratification of an
impulse is not to be deferred until some later d ate, b ut to be
satiated in the immediate now.

SPLEEN CHAKRA The time world of this chakra is the Now as it relates to the
Future, what is happening in the present as it conditions and
11 11
sets the stage for the future. This is the chakra of social
awareness, of deferring personal gratification in the present
for the ultimate good of the group or community in the
future. The personality dominated by this chakra is eminent­
ly concerned with social contact and expansive group activity :
the next party, the next election, the next social function. It
is at this chakra level that homo-sapiens as a cooperating
species becomes apparent - the millions of years of social
evolution which have made it possible for man to maintain
complex social structures requiring the interdependence of
Second Chakra
many component sectors. The personality o f this chakra is
(Navel or Spleen)
generally ambitious, gregarious, outgoing, and savors large­
scale social involvement. He will react to immediate stimuli,
when presented in terms of the wider community, and where
these activities promise to widen his sphere of social involve­
ment. For this person, things past practically do not exist -­
only the now as it might apply to the future.

210
SOLAR CHAKRA Here the time world is linear, a time line - past leads to
present leads to future. All events occur logically, sequential­
ly, and any variance from this orderly process is sorely
tolerated. This is the time concept of the analyst, the intellec­
tual, the scientist, the planner. This personality divides events
into neat little categories, all systematically arranged accord­
ing to plan. If the present is considered, it is seen to extend
back into history and into the future - both in strict linear
fashion, and all understandable in an organized step-by-step
manner. This person constantly seeks and compiles informa­
tion in quest of novel solutions. The mind is restless,
continually flitting about from one question to another, and
Third Chakra
always starting at the beginning and ending at the end, all the
while maintaining an orderly process. Joy is produced by the
wide sweep of knowledge and fact, which links up so many
different events in the whole scope of past, present and
future. Conclusions are drawn on the strength of hypotheses
and theoretical proofs. Scrutiny and close attention to detail
is typical of personalities characterized by this chakra.

HEART CHAKRA The focus of time in this center is moving back and forth,
shifting from present to past to future, depending on
emotional attachment or threats to self-security. At this
level the person's consciousness attaches itself to things : to
food, to money, to material objects, to job security, to
individuals, to emotional security. The tendency is to possess
whatever the consciousness becomes attached to, to wonder
whether the love object is really secure, or if it is about to be
lost, ruining the personality's self-security. Thus, any threat
to the love object causes shifting of the time world : to the
past where the love object was secure ; to the future where its
loss is certain to bring a decline in prestige and self-image ; to
the present where action must now be taken so as to restore
Fourth Chakra
past self-security and protect against future loss of it. If the
love object is indeed lost, then the future uncertainty
immediately becomes the present, but the consciousness
reverts to the past trying to convert it into the present.
Receiving support, recognition from others, external objects
 as a vehicle for one's self-assurance, are here characteristic.
And whatever is happening in the heart center will influence
the workings of the other centers.

THROAT CHAKRA The past is the time world of this center. The personality
functioning herein tends to associate present affairs with
some event of the past which remains firmly stored in his
memory. This is the conservative, tradition-oriented, hind­
sighted, historically-focused individual, for whom the real
importance of presently occurring events is how time will
bind them into history, into the past. This is the person who,
for confmnation of a particular set of facts and ideas, relies
primarily on accumulated knowledge, the " lessons of history, "
or the established authority. One functioning through this
chakra is usually good at conceptualizing, handling abstract
concepts, associating seemingly unrelated information and
Fifth Chakra experiences into a single concept. This center is the home of'
the contemplative, the idealist, for whom confrontation and
uncertainty are disturbing and who prefers peace -- at any
price. Thus, the new, the novel, the strange, are met with
firm resistance for they do not fit into a time-bound frame­
work of the past which bears the stamp of authoritative
approval. Here, " feeling" is the predominant experiential
mode, as opposed to " sensation " at the sacral level, or " social
contact " of the spleen center, or " possessiveness" in the
heart chakra.

BROW CHAKRA Here we find the time world of the future, with intuition
the major mode of experience. The person dominated by this
center experiences now, yesterday, and is experiencing
tomorrow, today . His time world has no past or present, his
mind is always around the corner; consequently, such a
person is often impractical in dealing with tasks of the
immediate moment. It is through this center that one knows
without knowing how one knows, intuitive " psychic" impres­
sions are received, yielding information not available via
normal sensory channels. The frequent inability of this type

Sixth Chakra
212
 Diagram
shows chakras
receiving but
not radiating
except o n one
level.

of personality to fix his concepts in a logical process, or

relate them to historical precedent, or apply them to a
current situation, engenders the criticism o f personalities
dominated by other chakra centers who see the intuitive
as unreal and divorced from concreteness. However, there is
a reality which is practical and realistic within its own
framework of anticipation and foresight and which can
equal any of the other types in their own special perceptual
mode. The intuitive has difficulty in adjusting and returning
Blue chakra open, Blue excreted. to the present where he has to wait for chronological time
to catch up to his perceptions. Thus, there is no awareness
of time as an instrument, but rather there tends to be little
consciousness of time as structured by the clo ck, thereby
making this personality somewhat unpunctual and unable to
m ake a schedule that is in any way reliable.

CROWN CHAKRA This center governs the awareness of timelessness - an all­

pervading Now, which embraces all time worlds - past,
present, and future into an enduring Divine universal order.
Here, imagination is the outstanding experiential mode -
11 primordial imagination 11
- - knowing and relating by way of
images or patterns which could represent an entire celestial
galaxy, or a system of the human body, depending upon the
perspective from which the universe is viewed. At this level,
the prevailing condition of consciousness is more like that
which relates to the dream state, or the hypnotic state,
wherein the mind is more open and responsive to suggestion
than during normal waking consciousness. This chakra is the
time dimension of the great mystics, the visionaries, those
masters of imagination who, through metaphors and power­
ful imagery, establish patterns of behavior which often carry
Seventh Chakra mortals into realms of supra-mental thought and Divine
order. The perceptual vantage point of the crown chakra is
one which enables the viewer to observe what is occurring
at all other levels - it is the point through which one
obtains at-oneness with the universe.

213
 Further to the above chakra/personality sketches, Dr. Hills
has noted that each man is really all of the chakras and time
worlds, but that usually one or two chakras tend to
predominate in the personality. Thus, it is seen that while
the energies flowing in the chakra system are conditioned
by each of the seven centers through which it moves, one's
personality according to Hills ' analysis, is ultimately deter­
mined by which of these seven centers is most active.

Then, there is the additional observation of Dr. Christopher

Hills that difficulties in social communications - between
individuals and b etween groups - frequently occur because
the parties involved in the interchange are speaking, as it
were, from different chakra centers, different time worlds.
If, for example, an intuitive-type personality, speaking from
the brow chakra with his future time orientation, treats an
issue with a sensation-type whose perspective from the
sacral center tells him that the real, concrete present is the
only basis for dialogue, obvious communication barriers
arise. Or, consider the situation, Hills offers, of a married
couple where each partner experiences time in a different
Dia.
shows receiving and conflicting manner, each through his own dominant
and hardly chakra - perpetual marital conflict might ensue ; whereas,
radiating at all.
by contrast, if the two respective chakra frequencies are
similar, or different but complementary, marital harmony is
more easily facilitated (J).

According to Dr. Hills' interpretation, the whole matter of

chakra-determined time perspectives, as related to social,
inter-cultural communications, really reduces to a considera­
tion of the relative frequencies of the chakra involved in a
given social interchange. Two persons, for example, both
with a time-consciousness and personality determined by
the throat chakra, could still fail to understand each other
on a given issue, simply because they are speaking from
opposite ends of a wide frequency spectrum which exists
for the Throat Chakra - and , indeed for all other chakras.
Consequently, in any social interaction, it is the relationship

214
of the chakra frequencies that really matters - their relative
11 11
degree of complementariness or cancellation and not
their absolute identification as belonging , to the throat
center as opposed to the spleen center, and so on (J). Thus,
again we find the persistent theme of the resonant inter­
action of frequencies, applicable in this context to chakra
energies, personality, and social interrelationships.

Dr. Hills maintains that chakra/time world factors are also

important variables in matters involving the social conduct
of groups, organizations, and governments, for unconscious­
ly, there is the tendency for such bodies to take on the
chakra-time world qualities of its leadership -- and herein
lies much of the cause for large-scale group social conflict.
But while the conflict may eventually come to involve large
11 11
numbers of people, the animating chakra perspective
invariably begins with the individual (J). Further, Hills has
observed that the ineffective decision-making of many
organizations is often because the key decision-makers all
tend to function primarily through the same chakra, thus
obviating a more balanced solution which could otherwise
11
result with the presence of other complementary chakra
11
types (J).

215
 GENERAL PRINCIPAL
CHAKRA TIME WORLD PERSONALITY TRAITS EXPERIENTIAL MODE

CROWN The External Now, Imagination (internal "Primordial imagination"

including all time worlds ; vision) ; Awareness o f an (akin to the dream state)
past, present, and future enduring order; Makes wherein the universe is
combined into a single all- effort to display charm perceived in images or
pervading Now ; Focus on goodness, and sympathetic patterns; Knowing or
a Divine, enduring universal emotions; Tries to influence experiencing via images
order. others with spiritual or or analogies ; Contact
magical images ; Love of with supra-mental intelli-
withdrawal and self- gence; Identification
humiliation. with an enduring uni-
versa! order.

BROW Exclusively future Intuitive sensitivity ; Intuition; Intuitive

oriented, having no Desire to broaden knowledge, knowing
past or present. horizon of self; Lives without words or rational
in the future ; Not Psychic impressions;
punctual; Somewhat Identification with the
impractical in everyday emotional needs of man-
affairs; Lacks concrete- kind; Sense of union
ness and adherence to with humanity ; "Falling
details; Visionary ; in love" with an idea;
Anticipatory. Identification with the
idea of "fusion", or of a
more inclusive universal
order.

THROAT The past ; Backward- Tradition oriented ; Feeling ; Established emo-

looking; Historically Contemplative ; tions; Reality of nostal-
oriented; Hindsighted ; Authority-seeking ; gic memories ; Peace at
Experiences time as Introspective ; any price ; Resistive to
binding all events Conceptualizing; the new and untried ;
into memories of Association of varied Dependence on authori-
emotional and experiences into a ties ; Security of small
mental concepts. single concept ; group with established
Passive ; Tolerant ; authority image ; Love of
Contentment ; established ways, princi-
Idealistic. pies, ethics and morality.
HEART Shifting ; Neither fixed Focused on self; Self- Accumulation of, and
nor linear, but moving security ; Self-measuring ; attachment to physical
from p ast, to present, Self-confirmation; Pride and emotional objects ;
t o future, depending on of possession; Possessive Confirmation of self via
emotional dictates, attachments to love
objects outside self; Rela-
tionships with others
which tend to confirm
and enhance opinion o f
self.

SOLAR Linear time-line ; Analytical; Logical ; Thinking ; Analysis ;

Sequential progression Theoretical ; Intellectual ; Planning ; Linking the
of time ; Time as a contin- Categorizing ; S cientific ; past with the present,
ual flow of process from Self-expansive ; Desire for with the future ; Consis-
past, to present, to future. change and novelty. tency of events ; Logical
time-order; Adherence to
process.

SPLEEN Now as it relates to, Expansive ; Outgoing ; Social contact, Group

or conditions, the future ; Ambitious ; Community activity ; Large-scale
Extension of the present conscious; Gregarious; social involvement ; Love
into the future ; Deferring Explorative ; Strong of one's own class, corn-
the immediate to some communal tendencies. munity or nation.
future date.

SACRAL Immediate Now ; Present Aggressive ; Impulsive ; Sensation ; Physical

moment; Little awareness Quick-acting ; Practical ; contact ; Touch, Concrete
of the past, or of the Skill in manipulating reality ; Immediate exter-
future. physical environment ; nal stimuli ; Sensual
Power conscious ; Active ; events.
Reluctant to d efer gratifi-
cation.
PSYCHOLOGICAL Much of the research and theory of Dr. Christopher Hills
PERSONALITY TYPES is based largely upon " metaphysical " investigations,
methods that, as yet, are neither fully understood nor
accepted by more conventional lines of scientific inquiry.
Nevertheless, in the physical and social sciences, the work
of many modern" , researchers seems to be destined to
ultimately bring about a general redefmition of what
" science " is, and what constitutes legitimate scientific
endeavor. In this vein, the work of Professor Humphrey
Osmond of Princeton University, New Jersey, is significant.
And considering, too, the ever-diminishing conceptual
barriers between " science " and " para-science, " it is not
especially astounding to find that the psychological person­
ality types identified by Osmond and his colleagues,
Drs. Harriet Mann, Richard Smoke and Miriam Siegler, bear
what seems to be an almost direct tie-in with some of the
chakra personality types as recognized by Hills.

Professor Osmond 's work is built upon an earlier system of

personality typology devised by the famed psychologist,
Dr. Carl G. Jung. Osmond described Jung's classification
system as being " the product of a brilliant intuition, which
correlates personality variables in a way that other observers
can confirm " (H- 1 ). Osmond reports that in studying
individuals who belonged to the different Jungian-type
categories, four basic temporal orientations were observed.
Osmond 's innovation has been to recognize the importance
of the time dimension - or individual views of time - in
relation to J ung's classification of personality types (H-1 ).

Fundamentally Jung's system postulates that there are

four functional personality types : Sensation, Thinking,
Feeling, and Intuitive (H-1 ). Below is a brief, basic discus­
sion of each of these types, according to Osmond 's analysis
and as taken from the paper: The Many Worlds of Time *
b y Osmond e t al.

* For a fuller rendition of thi s paper, see "Nuclear Evolution" (44,

P. 896-9 1 4) , which is a condensatio n of the yet-to-be-p u bl ished book,
"Worlds Apart" ( tentative title ) by Osmond, et a l .

218
SENSATION TYPE Sensation is the function which is concerned primarily
with that which is current and immediate. No other type
has such a well-developed ability to perceive the present
moment in all its shadings and ramifications. Events which
take place now, which are tangible, concrete, visible, and
sensual are the events which take priority for one who is
present orientated. Events are met in terms of their existen­
tial reality, with little concern for how they got that way.
Life is a happening. Where it comes from and where it is
going is of minor importance, that it exists; and can be
perceived, is paramount. It is from this lack of concern with
the past or future, an almost total reliance on the present,
that the sensation type 's primary personality traits derive.
Sensation types are superbly effective in dealing with
concrete reality. Nothing hampers them from facing the
object before them and dealing with it. They tend to
respond without hesitation to environmental stimuli. To
this type, that which is real is only that which can be
perceived by the physical senses. For the sensation type, the
present is all of life. Those having sensation as their first
,function tend to be weak in intuition.

BRIGITTE BARDOT

219
THINKING TYPE Here, the directionality of time is a flowing from the past
through the present and into the future. No particular
dimension is of central importance, rather it is the flow
itself and the continuity of the process which is the crucial
issue. The concern is to see the process through to comple­
tion, and to extend the time line as far into the past as
possible, and as far into the future as they can project. An
issue cannot be discussed, nor can it be understood without

Cl)
:s:
0
a:
a:
::::>
CO
>­
a:
a:
<I:
-.1

BERTRAND RUS SELL

220
 it being stated where the event originated, how it developed,
and when it concluded. Spontaneous or tangential events
are not dealt with unless they fit into the system of continu­
ity. This type is unwilling to recognize events which come
from nowhere or "out of the blue. " Everything has a
history, came from somewhere, and exists only insofar as it
is heading in a specific direction.

Another characteristic of thinking types, is their tendency

to live according to principles, a tendency to try and grasp
the whole situation in ideal terms. Nor does this type trifle
with time. For them, time is serious, real, and demanding.
The attention to process, the love of planning, the respect
for principles -- these major characteristics of the thinking
type are directly attributable to their temporal orientation.
No other type can equal them in the ability to plot things
out through time, follow each logical step from beginning
to end. For this reason, either a primary or secondary think­
ing function is extremely valuable in such tasks as adminis­
tration and organization -- in Western culture t}3s is a skill
highly valued.

THINKING TYPE

JOHN F. KENNEDY

22 1
FEELING TYPE For the feeling type, time past becomes time present, and
so the pre·sent may be perceived as deriving from the past.
For them, time is circular : the past manifests itself in the
present and then is immediately returned to the past as a
memory. Reminiscences, diaries, folklore, heritage, traditions
- all these are maj or concerns of feeling types. They tend
to see situations in terms of what is similar in the current
event to events of their personal past, rather than in terms
o f what is unique about the existential situation ; they tend
to be uncomfortable in new situations. From middle age
onwards, feeling types are conservatives. They need to
continue to see things in the ways which were popular,
fashionable, and appropriate in their younger days. The
evaluation o f things in terms of what place they will take in
the past rather than in terms of what effect they have in the
present, or where they might lead in the future, is one of
the easily observable characteristics which differentiate
feeling types from others whose outward behavior may
seem to be similar. Because they value the recollection of
emotion, feeling types are extremely skillful at assessing the
exact emotional tone of any current event. But in the
modern world where change is frequent and rapid , their
inability to keep up with the times can be damaging,
particularly in the latter half of life.

MARIA CALLAS

222
 MAHATMA GANDHI

INTUITNE TYPE Intuition is the function which relates primarily to the

future dimension. The intuitive goes backward from his
vision of the future into the lesser reality o f the present,
where he is constrained to wait until chronological time has
caught up with his vision. The actual time flow in their
experimental world is backwards. This is the function which
tries to ascertain that which is possible. The intuitive's
function is precognitive, perceiving by way of the uncon­
scious, relating to the world through hunches and guesses.
They sometimes appear to others to be flighty, impractical,
and unrealistic. This type generally lacks a developed
sensation function. It has been observed that, in the psyche­
delic movement, there seem to be a large percentage of
people with a primary or secondary intuitive function.
Investigations with introverted intuitives have produced a
working hypothesis that timelessness, that sphere of
temporal experience which mystics and the Taoist Masters
concentrated on, is the normal experiential world of this
particular type. Western culture as a whole has tended more
to emphasize the functions of sensation and thinking, and
to under-value the skills of those who relate to the world
primarily through either feeling or intuition.

223
 Elaborating upon his theory and classification model,
Professor Osmond explains that in typology, generally it can
be said that nothing is either totally positive or totally
negative, any typology is an abstraction from reality.
Further, Osmond points out that there is not, nor could
there be, a person who is positively one type. Every human
being, he notes, has the potential for all four functions, and
most people 's inner experience and observable behavior
show evidence of all these possibilities (H-1 ). Invariably,
however, each person has a kind of hierarchical ordering in
the functions; some functions being more prominent than
others. So, while bringing all four experiential modes into
conscious control is the optimal situation, this type of intra­
psychic development is not common. The majority of
normal individuals tend to relate to the world essentially
through their first two functions (H-1 ).

Nor can one function be taken as more real than another,

Professor Osmond informs, for typological studies indicate
that there are four realities : the thinking reality of process
and ideas; the feeling reality of memories and emotions ; the
sensation reality of immediacy and concreteness ; and the
intuitive reality of anticipation and visions. And within the
framework of this latter reality , intuitives are as practical
and realistic as the other types in their special perceptions
(H-1 ) . Osmond further cautions that communication
between some personality types can often be difficult, and
that a constructive team effort between types should be
sought whenever possible. The intuitive, Osmond affirms,
because of his general [Link] of regard for details, should
collaborate with a thinking type who can map out the
procedure and particulars of the intuitive's vision. Because
of the ability of thinking types to tie into each of the three
time dimensions, they are compatible with all the experien­
tial worlds. No other type can do this so effectively (H- 1 ).
Osmond goes on to say that, in typology there are many
possible collaborations between types, but that some are
more feasible than others. He notes that to achieve a dialogue

224
between two people, one of whom sees reality as being in
the present and another who sees it as being in the future,
can be a fruitless, though often amusing encounter (H- 1 ).

Only a cursory comparison of Dr. Hills' chakra analysis

against the psychological types of Professor Osmond, reveals
the following correlations :

Hills Osmond
Brow Chakra Intuitive Type
Throat Chakra Feeling Type
Solar Chakra Thinking Type
Sacral Chakra Sensation Type

In conversation, both Hills and Osmond have confirmed

that there is a direct link between chakra energies and
psychological types. Throughout Nuclear Evolution:
Discovery of the Rainbow Body Hills elaborates on the
intricacies and mechanics of this link (44 ).

Whatever the ultimate possible tie-in between the two

systems, what must emerge as a most cogent challenge to
both the spirit and the intellect of man is, how at their
point of inception, do these " personality determinants "
become implanted within the human system of chakra
energies, before being passed onto the state of social
manifestations? What are the determining and governing
sources of input into the chakra system? How is it that with
some four billion people presently inhabiting the earth, no
two persons have exactly the same chakra functions? And
why? What are the details of the chakra mechanisms involved
in group phenomena? What are the areas of frequency
resonance or " complementariness" which bind some persons
together with a common identity in contrast to other groups?
Clearly, at the present juncture of our understanding, we are
at a stage where it is best to first try and ask the right
questions, before launching off to find answers.

225
ES OTERIC ENERGIES
OF
GROUP PHENOMENA
 ESOTERIC ENERGIE S
OF GROUP PHENOMENA

THE SYMBOL OF NUCLEAR EVOLUTION

227
A SCIENTIFIC VIEW It has been suggested by some thinkers that there is no
OF GROUP PHENOMENA manifest thing which is not a group, that each atom, each
atom grouping, has its own collective and specific rate of
vibration which distinguishes it from other similar groups.
There are, in fact, certain classes of physical phenomena
which are generally termed " cooperative phenomena"
wherein the individual entities cooperate with one another
with the result of enhancing a particular effect, as in the
case of ferromagnetism, where the elements of ferromagnetic
matter, iron or cobalt, combine their respective magnetic
moments to produce an overall enhanced effect (A).
Additionally, physics teaches that when two separate sources
of energy, each having its own distinct frequency pattern, are
brought into close proximity of each other, there is an inter­
action, a mutual sharing of their individual oscillations. This
common interchange is represented by a frequency pattern
which is not an exact replica of either, but rather, a combina­
tion of both. If several individual frequency sources are
involved in the interaction, then the resultant wave form is,
necessarily, a combined representation of all participating
frequencies. Once the combined frequencies are again
isolated from each other, their combined waveform is lost,
each entity returning to its own natural frequency (B).

Following upon this general theme, Professor H. S . Burr,

based upon his several . decades of biological/behavioral
research with L-fields, speculated that it is not beyond the
bounds of possibility that mankind - whatever the cause -­
is subject to collective " highs" and " lows , " times when the
vitality and alertness of entire populations could fluctuate
between maximum and minimum values (3 9 , P. 1 20). Burr
goes on to suggest that if it could be determined that such
conditions do, in fact, exist, then world leaders would be able
to know in advance those periods when they should exercise
special caution, particularly in international relationships.

228
GROUP MIND The reality and the potency of human thought* energy has
been emphasized on preceding pages. We come now to
consider some aspects of collective mental energies, or
" group mind " , as recognized by several clairvoyant
researchers.

Bishop Leadbeater once observed that the power of the

united thought of a number of people is always far greater
than the sum of their separate thoughts, and that it would be
much more nearly represented by the product of the
constituent thought energies (3 2 , P. 48). This view is
mirrored and expanded upon by the late Dionne Fortune, the
widely know British clairvoyant. She reports that the
composite or group mind, once formed , * * will contain only
those ideas and feelings which are directed towards the
common object of attention ; these ideas will diffuse them­
selves into the subconscious minds of all the people compris­
ing the group and thence influence their conscious minds.

Fortune asserts that at the subconscious level, the inter­

action (the combining of human mental energies with those
natural energiest associated with the object of attention)
between the group and their object of attention is such that
there is an amalgam of energies which flow together produc­
ing a single cloud which overshadows the whole group (3 3 ,
P . 5 9-60).

* One i nvestigator, E . L. Gardner, reports that, to clairvoyant vision,

thought vi brations seem to have the characteristics of electric pulses
through a wire --- wave l i ke and u ndulatory (3 1 , P. 31 ) .

* * Generally speaking, esoterists consider that a "group m ind" is

formed by the collective mental energies generated by a group of
i ndividuals i n mutual association with each other, i . e. persons having a
common mental focus or experience. Such an association may be del i­
berate or fortu itous.

t Such natural energies, or natu re forces, are frequently referred to by

the term, "Deva."

229
 Continuing her explanation, Fortune maintains that when a
group mind becomes well established, it has a distinct exist­
ence of its own, that it is a separate entity drawing its life
from the group. This latter function appears to be but one
half of a reciprocal system between the group mind and the
group itself, for according to Fortune, the group mind is also
a reservoir of energy upon which each member of the group
can draw. The group mind, she concludes, can only be
destroyed by dispersing the group (33 , P. 60-63).

Another account of the energies involved in group-mind

phenomena is given by Mrs. Phoebe Bendit, who for many
years worked with her clairvoyant abilities in partnership
with her husband, a psychiatrist. The entirety of the follow­
ing report in this section of Group Mind, is hers.

"From a more technical, psychological angle, the human manifests a

mixture between the forces of the collective subconscious and the
collective super-conscious. The former is the garnered collective experi­
ence of animals and lower biological kingdoms, i. e. instinct. The latter
represents those aspects of consciousness which are also collective in
the sense that they are universal - as pointed out by Jung in his
discussion of myth and religious symbols - but which have not yet
passed through the field of explicit experience (3 7, P. 1 05).

To clairvoyant vision, a group .energy field appears as a moving, pulsat­

ing globe of etheric matter which envelops all those present. Through it
the impulses of thought and feeling ripple. While at times the whole
structure is comparatively quiescent, it may also appear turbulent, as if
tossed by a storm. Individuals who remain objective and outside the
collective impulse may be geographically in the group energy field, but
do not become a part of it. Such people are like rocks in a stream of
water - and may, indeed, sometimes cause eddies and cross-currents in
the group atmosphere, in the actual energy pattern which reflects group
thought and feeling (37, P. 1 23).

230
 Seen clairvoyantly, from the point of view of the etheric field, the
difference between individual persons and a group depends upon
whether or not a common energy field exists. A crowd of people walk­
ing down a street consists of separate individuals, each within his own
energy field. But beyond the level of etheric matter, proper, there is the
dimension of mental matter wherein the individual mind is only ,partly
personal and separate, where there exists a collective mental level into
which the individual is merged into a general field of thought and feeling.

Two factors facilitate this fusion of the personal mind with the larger
mental field : ( 1 ) close physical proximity, especially in a room or build­
ing and, (2) a common mental focus. Thus, it is difficult for people
living in a crowded house, even among strangers, to remain immune and
aloof from the mental atmosphere of the place as a whole. Even in open
country, if the attention of a number of people becomes drawn to some
object or event, there is a tendency for a group energy field to form, so
long as the situation holds the attention of the group.

There are any number of situations, accidental or contrived, where

people are drawn together with a common focus : a theatrical perform­
ance, an auto accident, a flood, a riot, a religious service, a political
rally, or a piece of national pageantry. In each instance the nature and
quality of the group energy field will depend not only on the common
temperamental traits of those involved, but also on the object which
draws them together - but in any event, a holistic phenomenon takes
place. And the energy of the group, in whatever direction it runs, is
greater than the sum of the individual energies of those who comprise
the group (3 7, P. 1 2- 1 2 1 ).

An immense thing like the Commonwealth at the time of the Corona­

tion cannot, clearly, have a single world-wide energy field. Each nation
or group will naturally tend to create its own - but on such occasions
there will be a close magnetic tie or link between each part. The
response will possess a basic and universal quality, while each spatially
separated unit will supply a different overtone due to indigenous local
variations (37, P. 1 23).

23 1
 There is a 'plus' quality in the group energy field which corresponds
to the quality o f the thought and feeling o f the group. Where there is a
leader, he is an important pivot in the group energy field . He may be a
lecturer, an actor, a priest, the chairman of a com p any, a governor, or
the ruler of a country. In any case, he is a focal point capable, to a
certain extent, of holding or breaking up a group energy field , and also
of giving it an identifying tenor. This latter function of the leader is
especially p ronounced if the leader is put up as an embodiment of
some collective m ental m ovement in a nation, or if he fills an archetypal
role, such as a king or high-priest (3 7, P. 1 2 1 ).

When a group energy field forms around constructive discussion, the

'plus' element can be so strong, that not only are personal differences
resolved, but a higher octave of understanding and insight into a
difficult subj ect can be reached. On the other hand, fatigue inevitably
comes to a discussion after a period of time , and the whole structure o f
the group energy p attern falls slack and flags" ( 3 7, P. 1 24 ).

M R S. ALICE BAILEY

232
ESOTERIC RADIATIONS Shifting our discussion of esoteric energies and human
OF NATIONS group behavior to yet another level of reality, as claimed by
supra-normal faculties of perception, we consider now some
of the findings of Mrs. Alice A Bailey, an accomplished practi­
tioner of mental telepathy and author of numerous works
on esoteric phenomena (34).

Mrs. Bailey 's fundamental contention is that there exist

distinct and particular radiating energies or forces of a cyclic
natu·re, and of cosmic/divine origin, which are responsible for
the trend of world affairs. The broad perspective of this
system holds that in the last analysis, all history is the record
of the effects of these energy radiations as they play upon
humanity in its numerous and varied stages of evolution. Her
view holds that all that has happened is the result of these
energies operating through that part of nature which we call
the human kingdom (P. 3 ) . According to this schema, one of
the kinds of influence to be expected with the influx of these
varying cosmic/divine radiations is that the nature of civiliza­
tion and the culture of humanity in any given period is deter­
mined by their presence (P. 1 1 6) . Bailey contends that the
fundamental law, as expressed by conventional science that
11 energy follows thought, 11 also holds in the realm of cosmic/

divine energies as they are received, inculcated and re­

expressed by man (P. 3 5 ) . The further assertion is that
nations, like individual human beings, react under the
influence of the respective radiations, and that once the
rhythm and momentum of a radiation is established in a
particular group, it can last for a long time just through the
power which it gains through the force of organized numbers
(P. 29).

Mrs. Bailey has identified the energies in question as being

seven in number, and noted they they are called by many
names in different countries. However, the names which she
applies are as follows :

233
The energy of: 1 . will or purpose
2 . love-wisdom
3 . active intelligence
4. harmony through conflict
5 . concrete knowledge or science
6. devotion or idealism
7 . ceremonial order

(P. 3-4). The above energies, it is said, can function simultane­

ously in combination with, or in opposition to, each other.
Each radiation is believed to embody an idea which can be
sensed as an ideal (P. 5 7). While all these energies are cyclical
in their periods of manifestation, some combination of them
is reportedly always present, ceaselessly playing upon humani­
ty, and over time, fashioning and modifying nations and
their patterns of relationships, thus bearing witness to the
processes of social evolution (P. 4 & 57). And curiously, the
cosmic/divine energies which, it is maintained, affect humani­
ty at the national level, are also suggested to have a direct
correspondence to specific chakra centers along the human
spine (P. 3 3 ) . The chart on the following page displays the
correlations between the cosmic/divine energies as outlined
by Alice Bailey, and the energies of the chakra centers as
investigated by Christopher Hills.

As stated above, Mrs. Bailey postulated that the essence of

each radiation is the idea which it embodies ; from this
premise it is maintained that the present major ideologies
around which nations and societies are formed, are largely
distortions of the cosmic/divine energies as they are sensed
and interpreted by various populations, particularly the
leaders of these groups (P. 1 6 & 22). The direction of the
currents of men's thoughts, the moulding of their ideas, the
altering of the policies of nations are all attributed to the
cyclic energy radiations of cosmic/divine origin (P. 28).

234
 SUGG ESTED CORR ELATIONS B ETW E EN
COSMIC/DNIN E AND CHAKR A EN ERG I ES

BAI L EY'S SCH E M A H I L LS' SCH EMA

ASSO C I ATED
NO. E N E R GY CHAK R A CO LO R ASSOCIAT E D M O D A L I TY

1. Will o r purpose Crown Violet I magination and sense of Divine order

2. Love-wisdom B row I ndigo I ntuition and abstract real ity

3. Active i ntel l igence Heart G reen Vital forces and sel f security

4. Harmony through confl ict Solar Yel l ow P roblem solving, n ovel changes, creative conflict

5. Concrete knowledge Sacral Red Concrete reality, measurement by senses

6. Devotion or ideal ism Throat B l ue Devotion to authorities, idealism

7. Ceremonial order Spleen Orange Social patterns, commun ity involvement, consti-
tutional order
 It is further pointed out that no single radiation with its
accompanying ideology is generally suitable to all nations or
groups, but that these radiation-imposed ideologies may be
temporarily adapted to the populations who receive them
and who mold their national life accordingly (P. 9). Thus, it
is considered that the conflict and antagonism existing
between some ideologies and, consequently, between some
nations, is frequently understandable in terms of different
and opposing cosmic/divine radiations being sensed by
respective groups or nations (p. 45). Hence, according to
Bailey, it is with the turbulent manifestations of various
conflicting radiations upon the social, physical plane of
existence that the United Nations has to deal (P. 3).

But all is not conflict within Mrs. Bailey 's framework, for in
some instances two or more nations, because of certain
similar natural vibratory conditions inherent in their
geographical locations and because of their similar frequencies
of cosmic/divine energy radiations, have a close affinity
between themselves (P. 45-50). This phenomenon of vibratory
affinity between some countries is said not to be an arbitrary
matter, but due to a definite " magnetic" interplay between
them, which follows the law of attraction and repulsion
(P . 72, 90). Additionally, it is held that certain definite
geographical locations upon the earth are a kind of gathering
point or relay station between the incoming cosmic/divine
energies and their diffusion throughout the world, while still
other locations are points of fusion or blending of energies
(P. 1 2, 92 and 1 04).

Mrs. Bailey concludes that the instinctual life of nations is a

factor which is amenable to scientific study, and that the
processes of evolution will be much better understood when
investigators gain a fuller comprehension of esoteric energy
radiations (P. 1 1 6). She surmises that when the nature of the
world struggle is considered from the perspective of subjective
causation -- cosmic/divine energy radiations - instead of
superficial objective reasons, then real progress can be made
in releasing humanity from the thraldom and the narrowness
of the present civilization (P. 35).

236
THE GROUP CONSCIOUS­ In 1 963 when Life magazine of Japan did a feature story on
NESS EXPERIMENT Professor Hiroshi Nakamura* , one of the world 's foremost
experts on algae as a food for man, Nakamura stated that he
was a colleague of Christopher Hills and a student of Nuclear
Evolution. Toru Matsui* * , one of Japan 's leading philos­
ophers, who lived a semi-reclusive existence on Mt. Hakone
near Mt. Fuji, contacted Dr. Nakamura to inquire " Who is
Hills, and what is Nuclear Evolution? " As a result, the
Japanese wise man began to study Nuclear Evolution and
eventually set up a group to work on group consciousness as
outlined in Hills' book Universal Governmen t by Nature 's
Laws (49). Matsui stated that the Japanese Tendai Sect , a
branch of esoteric Buddhism, expounds a similar idea but, to
his knowledge, no group in history had ever succeeded in
achieving group consciousness.

TO R U M ATS U I D R. H I ROSH I NAKAM U RA

* Dr. H i rosh i Nakamura has authored i n Japanese "Meditation i n

R etreat," " Foods o f the F uture" a n d "The Usefu lness o f H u man Life."

** Toru Matsu i has authored i n Japanese, "Entropee -- Physiology,"

"Physiology of Poverty," "Physiology of Nakedness," and "The Way
Towards a Spi ritual Awakening."

237
 t To that date Hills had formed many groups world wide over the
previous eight years in an effort to achieve group consciousness. During
these years he consolidated, refined, tested, and m odified his approach
until the working plan for "Universal Government by Nature's Laws"
( 49) was developed. This plan contains a flexible constitution that is
changeable in an orderly m anner by its members, thus enabling it to
expand and grow with the development of the group mind.

In 1 966 Hills founded the Centre House Community in London on

these principles and spent the next six years there further refining his
technique to achieve group consciousness before he came to the United
States. Centre House is still in operation today under the direction of
Malcolm Strutt* , a master of Hatha Yoga, and author of "Holistic
Health and Living Yoga".

CENTRE HOUSE

LONDON

t Extract from the chapter on the H i story of Group Consciousness i n

"The R ise o f the Phoenix" published b y University of the Trees Press.

* Malcolm Strutt's yoga courses are standards for the British Wheel of
Yoga and the London Education Authority.

238
 The fall of 1 9 73 saw Christopher Hills and his wife Norah moving to
the small village of Boulder Creek, California, just south of San Francisco.
Hills stayed relatively secluded but was still sought out by people who
knew of his abilities as a scientist and clairvoyant. Now instead of
accepting people, his mind was finely tuned as to what it took to get
group consciousness.

He scared off more people than he attracted by confronting their egos

almost immediately. It seemed like he was in a hurry to weed out those
that lacked a quality that he knew it took for an individual to become
part of a successful group-conscious team. With this sort of welcome,
out of a hundred people who passed through, only one stayed. Hills'
task was, in his own words, "How do you get a diverse collection of
strong individuals to behave as one whole organism without losing their
individuality?"

BOULDER CREEK, CALIFORNIA

239
 By Christmas 1 975 Hills had attracted to himself thirteen extremely
diverse people who had totally committed themselves to achieving
group consciousness. They ranged from high school graduates to
Ph. D. 's, from educators to carpenters, and included a philosopher, a
physicist, a psychologist, a social worker, an electronics engineer, an
artist, and a computer salesman. Each of these people had some things
in common. They were searching for a better way and had a willingness
to learn. They were successful in their own fields and were not afraid of
hard work.

Hills' method of working toward group consciousness is multi­

dimensional, from the esoteric realms of meditation to the practicalities
of selfless action. The main emphasis is a skill called Creative Conflict 0 *
by which ego patterns are exposed, challenged and eventually mastered.
An individual's ego divides him from another and from the group by
creating a separation between his own and others' levels of conscious­
ness.

The majority of the world's people are not aware of the workings of
the seven different levels of consciousness and the fact that their
combinations expressed in personalities give rise to many different
realities and time worlds. The ego tends to hold fast to its reality and to
write off, judge, suspect anyone who is different. Thus communication
between individuals, groups, and nations break down, with results that
are only too well known to us all.

With a working knowledge of Nuclear Evolution and skill in Creative

Conflict, the ego can be penetrated constructively, resulting in the
dissolution of separateness and the creation of selflessness. These
qualities which are essential to group consciousness can be better
understood by experiencing the group vibration."* *

* ® Creative Confl ict, copyright of the Un iversity of the Trees Press,

see "The R ise of the Phoen ix".
** Further readi ng on the ways that the U niversity of the Trees group
is worki ng toward group consciousness can be found i n the books :
" H i l ls' Theory of Consciousness" (43) and "Journey I nto Light" ( 50) ,
written through the eyes of two members 6f the group.

240
 SUMMARY
AND
DIS CUS SION OF PART II
 SUMMARY DISCUS SION OF PART II

COSMIC/DIVINE RADIATIONS

PLANETARY & EXTRATERRESTRIAL

RADIATIONS SOLAR RADIATIONS

ETHERIC
& CHAKRA MENTAL
ENERGIES & SOCIAL
ELECTRO­
VIBRATIONS

ELECTRO-VIBRATIONS OF
ELECTRO-VIBRATIQNS PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENTAL
OF HUMAN BIOLOGY
STIMULI

GEOPHYSICAL FORCE-FIELDS
& AIR IONS

The writer's symbolic conception which attempts a visual, hueristic intergration of the "electro-vibrations" presently discussed.
Here, man is seen enmeshed in, and a part of, a continuous and complex network of nature's radiations - he is both transmitter
and receiver and the sources of radiation, though distinct are all interrelated.

243
 Part II presents an eclectic survey of various kinds of " extra­
physical, " phenomena, as possibly related to human behavior
from both scientific and meta-physical areas of inquiry. In
some instances, it has been possible to suggest tie-ins between
different systems as indicated below. In other cases, however,
direct correlations and tie-ins between systems is a more
elusive matter. But in each situation, it should be evident that
the phenomenon under consideration is fundamentally
" electro-vibratory " in nature, and in some way bears upon
human behavior patterns, as understood by the respective
researchers.

S uggested " Electro-Vibratory" Tie-ins

L-field forces . . . . . . . . . . Extraterrestrial force-fields

Radionic Energies . . . . . . Auric systems
Radiesthesic Energies . . . Universal field
Chakra Energies . . . . . . . . Endocrine & Neural systems
Chakra Energies . . . . . . . . Personality patterns
Chakra Energies . . . . . . . . Environmental force-fields
Chakra Energies . . . . . . . . Cosmic/Divine radiations

Focussing first on scientific research, Professor H. S. Burr,

over a period of 40 years, conducted investigations which
resulted in his postulating the existence of " L-fields, " or
fields of life, which according to Burr, are associated with all
life forms. Experimental results from both Burr and Ravitz
indicated that an individual's L-field voltages reflect mental
and emotional conditions. In some tested cases, the pattern
of variation in L-field voltages predicted , in advance, when an
individual would not be feeling his best. Does this, then,
mean that there is some dimension of man's being having a
[Link] o f " eI ec tro-v1'b ratory precogn1· t wn,
· " th at " knows, "
ahead of time, what will be one's emotional state during a
given period?

244
 Burr maintains that L-field forces play an integral role in
human behavior, with measured variations in L-field voltages
indicating one 's response to both physiological and ideological
stimuli occuring in one 's environment. Experimental findings
revealed that ideas and emotions impinge upon the nervous
system with the same reality as a pin prick or slap on the
face. This supports the contention that there are associated
with ideas, force-fields that are, indeed, real, and that these
fields are capable of releasing within the human neural
system, the same kind of bioelectric currents as do physical
stimuli, as measured by the galvanometer.
11
Burr postulates further that L-fields are links in a chain of
11
authority, part of a universal pattern, that there are other
more pervasive cosmic fields from which L-fields, in effect,
receive instructions. He implies, moreover, that entire popula­
tions could conceivably undergo occasional fluctuations in
vitality and altertness, owing to variations in some aspect of
external, extraterrestrial field conditions. If Burr's assessment
is accurate, this suggests that mental and emotional states are,
to some extent, continually, or occasionally governed by
certain types of cosmological force-fields acting through or
upon the human L-field.

Following Burr's lead, one wonders how much better could

we understand the complexities of human social relationships
if we better understood the effects of extraterrestrial force­
fields upon the human L-field . What are the generalized and
the specific behavior-laden aspects of force-field interaction
between man and the cosmos? What is the relationship
between Burr's L-fields and the human auric bodies which
11 -­
Mark Gallert claims to detect on his Radionic Analyzer?
11

are they perhaps even the same force-fields, but investigated

by different instrumentation and discussed using different
jargon? And would L-field, radionic and radiesthesic investi­
gations of Osmond 's personality types and Hills' chakra types
reveal a further corroborating tie-in between all these systems?

245
 To what extent can the various corrective energies employed
in Supersensonics, radiesthesia and radionics be applied to
social/behavioral situations? We recall the Supersensonics
Magnetron of Part I that worked with radiesthesic energies
and light to change group behavior. Clearly, in order to
answer these questions, there must be further investigations,
indeed eo-investigations, team efforts, engaging the mutual
participation of researchers representing different conceptual
approaches.

Clairvoyant investigation of certain human " auric" energies,

particularly chakra energies, indicate additional tie-ins
between behavior and " electro-vibratory " forces occuring at
other, more subtle dimensions of man's make-up.
Clairvoyant vision affirms the presence of chakras, or wheel­
like vortices of energy existing at auric levels of the human
entity. The chakra centers are reported to receive and distri­
bute throughout the system various in-coming " electro­
vibratory " energies of solar and extraterrestrial origin.
Additionally, chakra centers are thought to detect the
presence of other kinds of force-fields or " electro-vibratory "
tensions in the surroundings. The work of Christopher Hills,
involving the chakra centers and the human perspective of
time, particularly when viewed together with the fmdings of
Humphrey Osmond, suggests that personality differences are
really " electro-vibratory" . differences, as expressed and
detected through the chakra system. Another investigator,
C. W. Leadbeater, maintains that the chakras apparently serve
as a kind of transmitter/receptor for various mental and
emotional energies present in the environment. This would
seem to suggest that different types of ESP are made possible
by means of the chakra system. Mark Gallert, in measuring
radionically the flow of energy through chakra centers, finds
that serious emotional problems are accompanied by a
sizeable reduction in the energies flowing through one or
more centers. In Aura Balancing, Robert Massy shows that
the chakra energies can be positive, negative, or a combination
of the two and that the intensity can be directly correlated to
specific problems in the areas of physical, social, intellectual,
emotional, mental, intuition and imagination.

246
 There is a convergence of opinion among leading investiga­
tors that there is a tie-in of the chakra system with the neural
and endocrine systems, and that it is this link-up which
makes it possible for the movement of chakra energies to
exert a degree of determination and control over human
personality and behavior. In fact, both Hills and Bendit agree
that the human chakra system mediates the totality of man's
social/behavioral manifestations.

Our understanding of chakra energies and their relation to

human behavior still rests mainly upon clairvoyant investiga­
tions, which those of "scientific " bent are usually not wont
to accept. Nevertheless, there is an increasing number of
instances where scientific investigation and clairvoyant
perception reinforce each other. Several such situations are
mentioned by Dr. Shafica Karagulla in her book Breakthrough
to Creativity , 1 967, where she relates that there are several
practicing physicians in the western world who regularly
diagnose their patients by means of clairvoyant observation.
This apparently is done casually and informally without the
patient 's awareness, and all the while the physician may be
engaged in accepted medical procedures, employing stetho­
scope, X-ray, laboratory analysis, etc. According to Karagulla
who is herself a psychiatrist, some clairvoyant physicians try
to camouflage their extraordinary abilities by always appear­
ing to diagnose by standard scientific practices - this so as
not to jeopardize their professional status within the medical
community.

If one accepts as accurate clairvoyant reports on the flows

and functions of chakra energies, then a broad and penetrat­
ing range of explanatory possibilities unfolds. For instance,
one could, perhaps, more readily conceive of the finer matter
of man's auric bodies as being more malleable to the force­
fields created by thought energy than is the physical body.
And since it is understood that the auric bodies interpene­
trate the physical body, being in fact inseparable under
" normal" conditions, perhaps it becomes easier to appreciate

247
how a disturbed mental/emotional state, which is " electro­
vibratory, " acts upon an auric body, which is " electro­
vibratory" which, in turn, acts upon an electro-vibratory
nervous system, thereby producing physical illness or
behavioral abberations. It is as though there were a series of
" electro-vibratory " links or couplings existing between the
origin of a disturbance at a mental level and its manifestation
as illness or abberation of the physical and social planes, a
kind ofharmonic association of frequencies where disharmony
(or harnomy) occuring at one level of man's being is succesive­
ly repeated at other levels as well. Could this, then, be the
anatomy of psychosomatic illnesses?

Throughout the range of " electro-vibratory " phenomena,

there is found a dimension of group response which bears
most heavily upon what happens to individual entities exist­
ing as part of a collective. In physics, the magnetic moment
of atoms comprising certain types of substances behave in a
distinct collective manner, thereby producing an enhanced
effect which would not be possible without combined effort ;
an example of this pattern is found in ferro-magnetic
materials, iron, nickle, etc. Or, stated differently, the resonant
interaction of two or more individual oscillations having
similar frequencies, results in an amplified, combined wave­
form of greater strength than would have been possible with
a single frequency.

Similarly, the importance of group "electro-vibratory "

phenomena is advanced by clairvoyant investigators dealing
with more esoteric levels of human behavior. Clairvoyant
research indicates that when a group of persons come
together, either by design or by accident and share in a
common thought or idea, there is generated a collective
"electro-vibratory, " semi-autonomous energy field, frequently
called the " group mind " . The group mind is said to have its
existence in the realm of mental - non-physical -- matter,
and represents an amalgam of the men tal energies of those
individuals who have their attention engaged in a common
experience, e. g. , an accident on the street viewed by a
number of causal onlookers, or a planried parliamentary

248
discussion on a piece of legislation with the purposeful
participation of government officials -- both situations would
be expected to produce a "group mind " , a collective " electro­
vibratory " representation of constituent mental energies.

Once in London, during discussions with Dr. Corona Trew,

an outstanding physical chemist and theosophical scholar, the
writer opened the question of " group vibrations. " The
substance of the query was, how best could one understand
or come to grips with the esoterist's claim for the presence
of an " electro-vibratory force-field purported to exist in non­
physical dimensions, and supposedly reflecting certain
attributes of the group as a whole? Replying as a scientist,
but one with a profound understanding of metaphysical
matters, Dr. Trew suggested that the science of spectroscopy
-- wherein through the use of certain light frequencies,
individual molecular groupings can be identified as distinct
from other molecular groupings within the same piece of
physical substance -- might be the kind of direction in which
scientific inquiry could proceed on the question of "group
.
mm d " phenomena.

Extending Dr. Trew's speculation, one conceives of a

scientific instrument capable of measuring the subtle vibra­
tions of human mental energies, a device similar in concept to
the spectrographic apparatus, which could register and
identify the " group mind " vibrations of group A, as distinct
from those of group B. If this were possible, it could mean
the objective scientific exploration of the phenomenon of
. .
" group consciousness,
. " or " co11ec t1ve unconsciOusness, " as
postulated in the works of Jung and others.

Viewing group phenomena from a ,slightly different perspec­

tive, Alice Bailey asserts that the social evolution of human
society is really the manifestation of the cyclical appearance
of seven principal cosmic/divine radiations, waxing, waning,
interplaying, and over the long course of history, imposing
their [Link] influence upon earth's populations. Clearly, the
contention that the trend of world affairs is conditioned by
certain definite " electro-vibratory " phenomena of cosmic/
divine origin, carries with it formidable implications, the kind

249
The human vehicle re-radiates the
absorbed energies through the
biol ogical rad iomagnetic cell which
acts as a semiconductor for the
transport of electrons into the
human wave-field.
:J! :' '·.'.'
'•
•

,,

which have for centuries engaged the thought of the world's

I

greatest philosophers, and boggled lesser minds. What is the

reality of planetary and extraterrestrial influences upon
OF LIGHT
human affairs? Is there some ultimate Divine source from
� which all " electro-vibrations" emerge, wherein the planets
Red
merely act as energy modifiers or relay stations? Does this
mean, then, that all vibrations (man included) are divine, but
merely varying in degree of divineness? Are such matters even
answerable through scientific inquiry? Are such questions
answerable at all?

Christopher Hills thinks they are. He sees all forms in the

universe as an expression of the universal field of intelligence
vibrating at different frequencies in which the human chakras
function as step-down transformers that can be varied with
the frequency of the consciousness we pass through them.
The root chakra crystalizing this energy into the physical
vehicle, the spleen chakra giving rise to man 's herding instinct,
the naval chakra manifesting the intellectual drive, the heart
chakra providing our need for security, the throat chakra
transforming this energy into the mind, the brow chakra
vibrating at the intuitive frequency and the crown chakra
creating the imagination.

The classical philosophical arguments for the existence of

God or universal purpose · Seem almost obsolete when the
universe is viewed in terms of vibration and its various
plateaus of "reality " . With this theory of Nuclear Evolution,
Christopher Hills provides the link between the meta-physical
"electro-vibratory " force-fields and human social behavior.

The research group at the University of the Trees has, in

the past four years, gone a long way in proving Hills' theory
'• \ • ·
'
· ·
' l
�
I
, • of consciousness on themselves. The question remains as to
' '
\ '
·-.. '"'
\
' " ' f ,
'

' ,/' , ,
'

•
what will be the significance of "group consciousness " as a
" .. '

' -t"· �
.. , . �·� ...� \ .. , , ,· ,' . 4:
' ' •."!'>,
\
' l t f I.

' . "' '-� i ,A'

" ..

/
,. . new vibration in the world. Will the experience be spatially
restricted governed by the group's location? Or will its effect
\ '\ �.... � ,, i r; 'l}..•
•

/'
' '11. ., • ,
be felt world-wide, even by people who cannot directly
' ·� 'i/1 ,
' .., • I perceive that the experiment has finally succeeded?
I ;
\ I
\�
'".t
250
 APPENDIX:

A PERSONAL PILGRIMAGE OF SEARCH AND

RES EARCH UNDERTAKEN TO WRITE

. THIS VOLUME

This section is included as something of a personal note to

this volume which has relied heavily upon the works of
others. The intent here is merely to offer the reader a bit
more insight into my personal quest and conceptual ground­
ing which have contributed to the realization of this work.

Also, this entry has the added advantage of allowing me to

give fuller acknowledgement to the many individuals, experi­
ences, and written works which helped make this project
possible.

WORKSHOPS & TRAINING From mid 1 97 2 to early 1 974, numerous informal and
EXPERIENCES : instructive discussion sessions were held with Drs. Lloyd
Kunar and Fred Campayne, Geophysicist and Nuclear
Physicist respectively of the Physics Department, University
of Guyana (A, B).

Most of these talks were held on the University campus

and involved inquiry into matters of electromagnetics, electro­
dynamics, geophysics, nuclear and particle physics, as related
to my area of inquiry. On two occasions, such talks were held
on the St. Augustine campus of the University of the West
Indies, Trinidad, and in one instance evolved into a lengthy
discussion of several hours, and included various members of
the physics staff.

25 1
 These informal talks provided vital b ackground theory and
data on electro-vibratory phenomena, as understood by the
physical sciences, and served to reinforce, with scientific
understanding, some of the more esoteric concepts contained
in the present volume. Moreover, these conversations were
especially instructive for me as they renewed and expanded
my knowledge of electromagnetics and geophysics, while
introducing me to new concepts in nuclear and particle
physics.

Also during 1 97 2-3 , three or four informal discussions were

held with Dr. Neville Trotz, Organic Chemist of the University
of Guyana. These talks centered on the biochemical composi­
tion of the human body and its electrolytic functions, and
were important in helping to focus on the electro-vibratory
aspects of human body chemistry.

On September 29th and 3 0th, 1 9 73 , I attended a weekend

seminar on " vibrations " held at Centre House, London,
England. This included a lecture on chakra energies by
Christopher Hills, as well as lectures and demonstrations on
various types of vibratory phenomena, including sound,
color, and Kirlian-type photography of " bio-plasmic "
energies. During the same seminar, I also participated in a
lecture-workshop on " toning, " which dealt with the influence
of sound vibrations upon· human temperament. This is
closely related to the mantra yoga of eastern tradition. As a
group, we experimented with various voice-emitted sounds,
together with sounds produced by eastern string instruments.

The workshop was led by Mr. Nigel Hamilton , a Centre

House resident, working as a research physicist in solar
energy at the Trinity House Laboratory, London, and by
Mr. Makunda, a native of India, who is a physicist and a
professional musician. The major importance o f this session
was to learn of the definite but subtle relationships which
obtain between sound and the human psyche.

252
 In August 1 9 7 2 , over a period of four days, I transcribed
several tape recordings from the Centre House Library,
London, England. Subjects dealt with various metaphysical
topics, particularly " group phenomena. " The tapes contained
lectures given at Centre House by Christopher Hills and guest
speakers over the last few years. The content of these record­
ings was used primarily as b ackground information.

Viewing and listening to electromagnetic vibrations occurred

in the laboratories of Dr. A. Roy Davis, Green Cove Springs,
Florida, November 1 972, and is recounted in this volume
under the section on Polarities - North and South . However,
the substance of this experience is that the two poles of a
single magnetic field have a different tonal pitch (when the
proper sensing instrumen tation is used), as well as a differen t
visual pattern and direction of movement, when seen o n
Davis' special viewing device .

During September-October, 1 9 7 3 , over a period of two

weeks, I transcribed additional background material from
tape recordings of the Centre House Library, London.
Subjects related principally to etheric and chakra energies.

During October, 1 9 7 3 , I attended a two-day " vibration

seminar " sponsored by the Carthage Trust Organization in
Cheltenham, England. Among the speakers were Dr. Mark
Gallert, noted authority on radionics, and Father Andrew
Glazefski, Catholic priest, physicist, and an outstanding
" spiritual healer. " Other speakers dealt with " absent healing, "
healing with color and sound vibrations, and certain esoteric
considerations associated with human illnesses. In addition to
the formal discussions, an instructive film on vibrations was
shown, and several informal conversations evolved around
assorted metaphysical, esoteric phenomena, in particular
one led by Father Glazefski, where he demonstrated " spiri­
tual healing, 11 using my wife and others present as subjects.
Another experience during this period was a " spiritual read­
ing, 11 involving precognition, with myself as the subj ect ; this
was performed by an individual in attendance at the seminar.

253
 Another notable experience of the Cheltenham seminar was
the showing of a film on vibrations. This film was produced
by a scientific research group in Switzerland, headed by
Dr. Hans Jenny, and its contents were striking and unforget­
table. It demonstrated the effects of vibrations upon matter.
Various sound vibrations, ranging from a single, simple note,
to complicated, classical orchestral music, were fed into a
membrane-like surface which vibrated accordingly. On top of
this vibrating surface was placed a moderately viscous, gelatin­
like substance which moved easily across the membrane
surface as the vibrations were fed into it. For each note, or
combination of notes, causing the membrane to vibrate, the
viscous material assumed a definite geometric pattern. The
more complex the vibration (as in the case of a full symphony
orchestra holding a single note), the more complex the
geometric pattern. In some instances, the pattern resembled
the intricate lace-like designs of photographed snow flakes.

As part of the film 's narration, the comment was made that
even the investigating scientists who prepared the film did
not fully understand the mechanisms involved in the
phenomenon, or the extent of its further implications. But
the message which the film conveyed was that vibrations can
structure and pattern matter. And from other sources, we
know that certain vibrations can " destroy " matter, for
example, the sustained high " C " which shatters a wine glass,
or the rhythmical vibrations set up by troops marching across
a bridge causing it to collapse. From the film, one could
extrapolate to the concept that various vibrations - differing
perhaps in kind, but still vibrations -- act upon all aspects of
human physical and social existence, and are responsible for
structure and form throughout the manifest world !

2 54
WRITTEN WORKS: Many written materials have contributed significantly to
this work, but of particular note are the following :

1. Cosmic Humanism, by Oliver Reiser and the Biological­

Spiritual Transmutation Papers, produced by the Commission
for Research Into the Creative Faculties of Man, when
considered collectively, are unique in that, quite apart from
their wide-ranging wealth of scientific detail involving
physics, biology, and cosmology, there is an overriding theme
of [Link], an interdisciplinary weaving together of what
would otherwise be disparate fields of endeavor. Reiser, for
example, draws upon an incredibly broad range of technical,
historical, and behavioral data in formulating his concepts of
a possible interrelationship between the human organism
11 11 •
and a hypothetical cosmic organism

2. Various De La Warr and Radionic Centre Publications,

contained accounts of some of the pioneer investigations in
radionics, and other types of electro-vibrations spearheaded
by the late George De La Warr of Oxford, England. Much of
De La Warr's work apparently has not yet been duplicated,
and the impression one gets is that his findings, even now, are
in advance of their times. His work on 11 nodal points, 11 for
example, still seems to be virtually unknown in scientific
circles.

3. Various written works o n esoteric aspects o f vibrations are

listed below and have provided crucial background informa­
tion, as well as direct contributions to this work. These
volumes are instructive on numerous aspects of extra-physical
phenomena, and they especially advance the notion that an
outstanding feature of metaphysical realms is that of vibra­
tional, radiational, electrical properties and mechanisms -
even though the nature of the 11 electricity " differs from our
popular concept of it. These works seem largely unknown or
ignored in many scientific circles, but are found to bear
significant relationships to scientific investigations. Several of
these works also appear in the bibliography :

255
 The Sacred Flame, Phoebe Bendit
Man Incarnate, Phoebe & Laurence Bendit
The Science of Seership, Geoffrey Hodson
The Etheric Double, A. E. Powell
The Men tal Body, A. E. Powell
The Power and Use of Tho ugh t, C. W. Leadbeater
The Chakras, C. W. Leadbeater
Tho ugh t Forms, Annie Besant & C. W. Leadbeater
Man and His Bodies, Annie Besant
The Eso teric Philosophy of Love and Marriage,
Dione Fortune
The Holy Science, Sri Yukteswar

4. Nuclear Evolutio n : Discovery of the Rain bo w Body, by

Christopher Hills, centers on an examination of the " absolute
self, " which lies at the core of man's being. One learns from
this book that there are numerous approaches to, and ramifi­
cations of, an absolute self, including a scientific one. The
author, for example, draws upon physics and biology in
discussing the utilization of primary light vibrations in
sustaining the human organism, and in conditioning human
personality. Also, various layers or levels of consciousness,
and personality types are related to the specific constituent
frequency bands which comprise primary light.

Using Hills' perspective, one comes to view human levels of

consciousness (personality) as being greatly influenced by the
body 's direct intake (or lack of intake) of certain primary
vibrational forces which are constantly present in the atmos­
phere. The book instructs on how to identify personality
types which are grouped according to various col or categories,
i. e. red, orange, yellow, etc. , and by relating this color
schema to certain mechanical rates of vibration, such as those
produced by a metronome.

Just before this book, Your Electro- Vibratory Body, went

to press, Christopher Hills published a much expanded, 1 024
page edition of the original Nuclear Evolution, * from which
extracts have been used in this book. Time did not permit the
full impact of this [Link] work to be conveyed here.
* Its cover is used to introduce the chapter on " Cha kras and Social Mani,­
festations. " page 207 of this book.

256
INTERVIEWS, Dr. Christopher Hills - Philosopher, Scientist, Metaphysician,
VISITS, TRAVEL: -- 1 970 to present.
My contact with Hills extends over a period of seven years.
During that time we have had numerous private discussions
at Centre House, London and the University of the Trees,
California, on matters related to both the esoteric and the
exoteric aspects of radiational energies. Additionally, attend­
ance at his public presentations, transcription of his tape
recorded lectures, and frequent correspondence, have
expanded my understanding of chakra energies and associated
phenomena. Hills' suggestions and endorsement are responsi­
ble for much of the content of this work, particularly as
concerns things metaphysical.

De La Warr Research Laboratories, Oxford, England -­

August, 1 972.
During a visit to these facilities, I met with the Director,
Mrs. Marjorie De La War, who explained the radionic and bio­
magnetic work of the centre, and took me on a tour of the
laboratory. I also met with staff engineers and technicians,
and received explanations on the concepts underlying the
workings of their numerous treatment and research equip­
ment. Mrs. De La Warr elaborated on the principles of
radionics and how it was possible to effect " cures " over
distances of thousands of miles using a radionic broadcasting
device which was seen in operation at the time.

Mrs. Marjorie de la Wa"

Dr. R alph U . S ierra -- Biomagnetic R esearcher - November,
1 972.
A two-day visit to Sierra's facility in Rio Piedras, Puerto Rico
was instructive on a broad range of research activities. Sierra
has an extensive " magnetic garden, " which he regularly
waters with polarized water. This is made possible by the
invention of a specially designed electromagnet through
which the water passes before it reaches the plants. Accord­
ing to Sierra, the foliage and produce of his plants are
especially abundant because of their magnetic treatment.
Employing many of the devices which he had constructed for
biomagnetic treatment and research, Sierra also explained the
basic principles of electro-magnetism and biomagnetism and
gave examples and demonstrations of how the two energies
interact.

S ister Justa S mith Research Biochemist -- November,

1 972.
While I was in Puerto Rico visiting Dr. Sierra, Dr. Smith was
also in that country at Sierra's invitation. She gave two
lectures on her research with enzymes, magnetic fields, and
" healing hands " - one to a general audience at the University
of Puerto Rico, and the other to a small group of profession­
als at Sierra's home . I attended both presentations, and inter­
viewed her following her discussion at Sierra's home.
Dr. Smith talked about " the implications of her pioneer
research, indicating that science is really only beginning to
understand some of the subtle forces of nature with which
metaphysicians have been dealing throughout the centuries.
She also explained how electromagnetic force-fields could
influence the reactions of certain neural enzymes, which
could conceivably lead to b oth motor and behavioral
irregularities in the human organism. Other features of the
interview with Dr. Smith are contained in the present work
under the section of Magnetism and Enzymes.

258
Dr. A. Roy Davis - Biomagnetic Researcher - November,
1 972.
Many details of my visit to Davis' laboratory in Florida are
contained in this volume under the section Polarities - North
and South. It can be added that Davis was a patient inter­
viewee, generous with both his time and his information. We
spent long hours sorting out the behavioral implications of
his biomagnetic work with animals and humans. Davis was
always careful to explain the technical details of his experi­
ments and the operation of his various measuring devices.
For me his explanations represented a practical exposure to,
and an expansion of, some of the electrodynamic theories
which I had studied years ago. I continue to maintain contact
with Davis and have consulted him on several specific cases
where biomagnetic treatment was, or might have been, applied.

Dr. Francis Woidich --- Biophysicist and Practicing Physician

-- December, 1 972.
A brief interview was held at Woidich 's home in McLean,
Virginia. In addition to being a trained scientist, Woidich is
unique in that he is also well versed in various metaphysical
teachings. Our conversation dealt primarily with the border­
line area of investigation found b etween science and meta­
physics. It is Woidich 's contention that when breakthroughs
to understanding the " psychic " world are made, that it will
be the physicist, not the spiritualist, who makes them, since
the primary question about the very nature of matter and
atomic substance, upon which much " psychic " phenomena
rests, must be answered by those who work closely with the
confounding perplexity of subtle, unexplained forces
contained within the atom. Woidich further discussed areas
of extraterrestrial radiations and nuclear forces which were
completely new, and edifying to me, for example, the
existence of unidentified, non-electromagnetic vibrations,
which are a part of solar radiations, but which are not
associated with either heat or light wavelengths.

259
Dr. Eric A ustin - Physician, E EG S pecialist - February­
March, 1973.
Dr. Austin was interviewed on two separate occasions at his
office in the public hospital, Georgetown, Guyana. The value
of his input was his instruction on the behavior of the
bioelectric frequencies emitted by the human brain, their
specific boundary points as recognized by medical science,
and as registered on the electroencephlogra:m. Austin's contri­
bution is contained under the section on Brain Rhythms.

Dr. lngho H. Kornblueh -- R esearch Physician - May, 1 973 .

A tape recorded interview was conducted with Komblueh at
his home in Philadelphia. Kornblueh is recognized as one of
the foremost pioneers in the medical application of negative
ion therapy. His biggest contribution to my research was his
discussion of some of the physiological effects of small air
ions. Also important was the fact that he directed me to the
works of other researchers, including that of Drs. F . G. Sulman
and A. P. Kruger.

Dr. Reinhold R eiter - Environmental Physicist - S eptember,

1 973 .
A tape recorded interview with Reiter was held during a
visit to his environmental research station in Garmisch­
Partenkirchen, Germany . . Reiter's approach to assessing
environmental electro-vibratory influences is strictly scienti­
fic, relying heavily upon repeated experiments, continuous
measurement of environmental forces, and statistical analysis
of voluminous amounts of data. Reiter's techniques are
" material" and " pragmatic. " The value of his views is
precisely that they do represent the classic scientific attitude
of inquiry, which in the present instance, is supportive of
some of the metaphysical beliefs about the influence of
extraterrestrial vibratory phenomena upon human popula­
tions. And, in the broader context, Reiter's contribution is
important in achieving the scientific-metaphysical balance,
which this work seeks to achieve overall.

260
Mr. Charles Topley - Engineer- I nventor - S eptember­
O ctober, 1 973.
On three separate occasions Topley was interviewed at his
home, which also serves as his laboratory in London. It was
very useful to see the theory of ion/behavioral influences
take on applied form with Topley 's negative ion generator.
Topley, who was recommended to me by Dr. Sierra, was
engaged in several medical research projects, physical as well
as behavioral, including one particular case of terminal cancer
in a 2 1 -year old boy, who, at last report, was making a
·

remarkable recovery with the aid of negative ion therapy.

Conversations with Topley had the added advantage that he
was knowledgeable with other significant works in his field of
investigation, and in numerous cases was in regular personal
contact with other researchers around the world. Topley, like
Reiter, holds close to scientific method and its practical
applications.

Dr. Mark Gallert - Naturopath, R adionics R esearch -

O ctober-November, 1 973.
In addition to two tape recorded interview sessions with
Gallert, we had several other informal discussions on
radionics, plus a lecture given by him during the Cheltenham
vibration seminar, mentioned earlier. Also, a friend, my wife,
and myself, all received a full diagnosis on Gallert's Radionic
Analyzer, which served as further instruction and demonstra­
tion on the theory and methods of radionics. The unique
value of Gallert's contribution lies in the fact that his
radionic techniques bridge the gap between Science and the
Esoteric; for whereas he employs electronic devices capable
of detecting and, in a sense, quantifying radionic energies, he
is also dealing with the more subtle auric bodies of the
human being, which are usually detected by means of clair­
voyance, or other supra-normal faculties, and which are
discussed in the jargon of metaphysics.

The fact that Gallert is trained in both scientific method

(degree in psychology), as well as in meta-physics, and that

26 1
his methods of investigation also involved both areas of
inquiry, makes radionics something of a natural meeting
place for both scientific and metaphysical researchers. Much
of the information and insight obtained from Gallert appears
under the section on R adionic Energy. His book New Ligh t
on Therapeutic Energies, published by the Radionic Associa­
tion, Burford, England, is a good outline of his approach.

Dr. Corona Trew - Chemist and Theosophist - November,

1 973.
Private discussions were held with Dr. Trew on two separate
occasions in London at the headquarters of Theosophical
Society in England. Unlike the strict scientific approach of
Reiter and Topley, Dr. Trew, in her thinking on electro­
vibratory phenomena can easily integrate the scientific with
the esoteric. The value of her input was to help focus on
ways whereby the link-up between science and metaphysics
might become more explicit and more practical. She was also
instrumental in directing me to the relevant works of other
researchers, particularly those ofPhoebe and Laurence Bendit.

Dr. Humphrey O smond - Psychiatrist - December, 1 973 .

The brief interview with Osmond was conducted by long
distance telephone conversation. The value of Osmond 's
input lies in his personal .confirmation of his belief that his
Jung-modified personality types bear a close relationship to,
and probable tie-in with, the chakra-time world schema of
Dr. Christopher Hills. It was also useful to have Osmond's
affirmation that his earlier work, which he now considers
somewhat simplistic, is soon to be superceded by a more
elaborate analysis, thus suggesting that some of the gaps
between our present tentative correlation between the
Osmond and Hills schemas, may eventually be filled in by
Osmond 's expanded concepts. The Hills-Osmond correlations
are contained under the section, Psychological Personality
Types.

262
Dr. Felix Gad S ulman, M. D . , D . V. M. , - Head of the Depart­
ment of A pplied Pharmacology and Bioclimatology U nit,
Hebrew U niversity.
Dr. Sulman generously contributed to this second edition
by responding to requests for publications and illustrations of
his work on the biological effects of positive and negative
ions in the environment. Sulman 's unique geographical
situation for studying positive air ionization, and his highly
respected scientific reputation, make his observations a
valuable addition to this book.

Dr. A lbert Paul Krueger, M. D . , LL. D . , - E meritus Professor

of Bacteriology and E meritus Lecturer in Medicine, U niversity
of California Berkeley.
Dr. Krueger, like Dr. Kornbleuh, was one of the original
pioneers in the field of ion research. He has headed the
University of California Air Ion Research Laboratory since its
inception 2 1 years ago and has published around I 00 papers
on the biological impact of small air ions. His philosophical
insight into the subject is an invaluable contribution to this
book and to all students of ion research.

The editors wish to add their appreciation to those people

who so readily responded with additional materials and
pho tographs to enable this expanded edition to be realized.

A n A nonymous Metaphysician
There have been discussions with, and guidance from, an
individual trained in metaphysical systems. This person has
asked to remain unnamed, but has played a pivotal role in the
direction taken in this work.

2 63
 WO R KS AN D SOU R CES CITED

1. B I O L O G I CA L E F F ECTS O F M A G N E T I C F I E L DS, Edited by Madel l ne F . Barnothy. New York :

Plen u m Press, 1 964.

2. M I N D A N D MATT E R , Radionic Centre Organization, Oxford, E n gland, March 1 966.

3. COS M I C H U M A N I S M , O l lver L. Ra iser. Cambridge, Mass. : Schen kman P u b l ish i ng Co. , 1 966.

4. T H E L I V I N G C E LL, O l lver G i l l le. London : Thames and H udson Ltd. , 1 97 1 .

5. C O L O R PSYC H O LO G Y A N D C O L O R T H E R A P Y , Faber B i rren. New Y o r k : U n iversity Books,

I nc., 1 96 1 .

6. B I O LO G I CA L-SP I R I T U A L T R A N S M UTAT I O N S, Paper No. 3, Comm ission for Research I nto

the Creative Facu l ties of Man. Centre House, London.

7. B I O LO G I CA L-SP I R I TU A L T R A N S M UTAT I O NS, Paper No. 4, Comm ission for Research I nto
the Creative Faculties of Man. Centre H o u se, London.

B. M I N D A N D M ATT E R , Radionlc Centre Organization, Oxford, E n gl and, March 1 967.

9. R A D I O N I CS N E WS L ETTE R , Radionlc Centre Organization, Oxford, E ng l a n d, S u m mer 1 972.

1 0. TH E D I V I N A T I O N O F D I S E AS E , Henry Tom l l nson . S u rrey, E ng l a n d : Health Science Press, 1 9 58.

11. M I N D A N D MATTE R , Radionlc Centre Organizetion, Oxford, E n g l and, September 1 965.

1 2. "POW E R O F T H O U G HT", George De La Warr, Rep r i n t of a paper read to the Oxford U n iversity
Scie n tific Society, May 5, 1 96 1 .

1 3. A N I NT R O D U CT I O N TO F O U R I E R A N A L YSIS, A . D. Stuart. London : Methuen Publ ishing

Co. Ltd. , 1 96 1 .

1 4. SC I E N C E G R O U P J O U R N A L, V O . X I V, No. 1 . H. Tudor Ed mons. The Theosoph ical Society I n

E n g l and, Spring, 1 970.

1 5. P A R APSYC H O LO G Y , V o l . 5, No. 3, 1 96 3-4.

16. "TH E E A R TH A S A D Y N A M O " , Waiter M . E lsasser. Reprint from "Scientific American", May,
1 958.

17. U N D E RSTAN D I N G T H E E A R T H , Edited by I. G. Gass, Peter J. S m i th , and A. C. L. W l l so n .

London : Artemis Press, 1 97 1 .

18. " R E LATI O N S H I P O F G E O M AG N ET I C E N V I R O N M E N T T O B I O LO G Y", Robert 0 . Backer,

" New York State J ournal of Medicine", August 1 , 1 963.

1 9. OC E A N O F T H E OSOP H Y , Wi l l lam 0. J u dge. Los Angeles, Ca l i fornia: The Theosophy Company,

1 97 1 .

20. DA I L Y C H R O N I C L E , G uyana, S. A. , A p r l l 26, 1 973.

21. British Broadcasting Corporation, London, October 3 , 1 973.

22. M A G N ET A N D M A G N E T I C F I E L DS, A . A . Davis and A . K. Bh attacharya. Calcutta, I n dia:

F i rm a K. L . M u khopadhyay, 1 970.

23. "MAN, T H E B I O-MAG N ET I C A N I M A L", Joseph F. Goddavaga. " Fate Magazine", J u l y 1 964.

24. "TH E L I V I N G O R G A N I S M A N D T H E M AG N ET I C F I E L D", Leon l d R ep l n . "Sputn i k", No. 4,

1 96 7 .

264
25. T H E I N I T I A T I O N O F T H E W O R L D, Vara Stanley A l der. N e w Y or k : Samuel Weiser I nc. , 1 969.

26. "T I M E M A G A Z I N E ", U . S. E d ition, J u ne 1 4, 1 97 1 .

27. "CE R E B R A L E L E CT R O MAG N E T I C F I E L DS", P. I . G u l laev. " I nternational J ou rney of Para­

psych o l ogy", V o l . 7, N o . 4, 1 96 5.

28. " M A G N ET I C F I E L D ST R E N G T H A N D O R G A N I S M I C O R I E N TATI O N " (a bstract) , F. A . Brown

and F. H. Barnwel l . " B i o l ogical Bu l letlng", 1 1 9 :3 06 , 1 960.

29. " E XTR I NS I C R H YT H M I CA L I TY : A R E F E R E N C E F R A M E F O R B I O L O G I C A L R H YT H MS

UNDER SO-CA L L E D CONSTANT CO N D I T I O NS", F. A. Brown, J r. , " A n n als New York
Academy of Sciences, 98 : 7 7 5-787, 1 962.

30. T H E P OW E R A N D USJ: OF T H O U G H T, C. W. Leadbeater. 4th Reprint. Ady ar, Madras, I n d i a :

T h e Theosoph ical P u b l ish ing H ouse, 1 9 70.

31. T H E W E B O F T H E U N I V E RS E , E. L. Gardner. 2nd E d ition. London : F letcher and Son Ltd . ,

1 960.

32. T H E M E N T A L B O D Y, Arthu r E. Powe l l , 2nd Reprint. London : The Theosoph ical P u b l ish i n g
H o u se London Ltd . , 1 96 7 .

33. ESOTE R I C P H I LOS O P H Y O F L O V E A N D M A R R I AG E , Dlone Fortune. 4th E d lton. London :

The Aquarlan Press, 1 970.

34. T H E D EST I N Y O F T H E N AT I O NS, A l ice A. Bailey. 3rd Reprint. New Y o rk : Lucls P u b l ish ing
eo. , 1 968.

3 5. PS Y C H I CA L P H YS I CS, S. W. Tromp. Amsterdam, H o l l an d : E lsevler P u b l ish i n g Co. , I nc., 1 949.

36. T H E SAC R E D F LA M E , Phoebe D . Bandit. London : Theosophical P u b l ish i n g House, 1 9 53.

37. M A N I N CA R N A T E , Phoebe D . Bandit a n d La u rence J . Be n d l t. London : Theosoph ical P u b l ish i n g

H o u se, 1 95 7 .

38. T H E SC I E N C E OF S E E RS H I P , Geoffrey Hodso n . London : R i der & Co.

39. B L U E P R I N T F O R I M M O RT A L I T Y , Harold S. B urr. London : Nevl l l e Spearman, 1 972.

40. " N E WS L E TT E R", Radlonic Magnetic Centre Organization, O xford, E n g l an d, S u mmer 1 972.

41. T H E C H A K R AS, C. W . Leadbeater. 8th Reprint. London : Theosoph ical P u b l ish i n g H ouse, 1 969.

47. H E A LT H , W E AT H E R A N D C L I M A T E , Dr. F . G . S u l man, M . D . , Al bert J . P h leblg, I nc., Box 352,

Wh ite P l ains, N ew York 1 0602.

The following publications are available through the University of the Trees Press

42. S U P E R S E N SO N I CS, Chr istopher H i l ls, 1 97 5 .

43. H I L LS ' T H E O R Y O F C O N SC I O US N ESS, R o bert Massy, 1 9 76.

44. N U C L E A R E V O L UT I O N : D I S CO V E R Y OF T H E R A I N BO W B O D Y , Ch ristopher H i l ls, 1 97 7 .

45. E N E R G Y , MATT E R A N D F O R M , P h i l A l ie n , R oger S m ith , A l astair Bearne, 1 977.

46. "T H E S C I E N C E OF V I B R AT I O N A N D T R A N S M I SS I O N OF L I F E F O R C E " -- Series of 24

cassette tapes, 1 97 5 .

48. A L I V E TO T H E U N I V E RS E , R obert Massy, 1 9 76.

49. TH E R IS E OF T H E P H O E N I X : U N I V E RS A L G OV E R N M E N T B Y N AT U R E'S LAWS, 2nd

E d ition, 1 9 78.

50. J O U R N E Y I N TO L I G HT, Ann Ray, 1 97 7 .

265
 TAPE R ECO R D E D I NTE R V I EWS, P R IVATE CON V E R SATI ONS,
W R ITTE N CO R R ESPO N D E NCE, AN D PE RSONAL PAPE RS:

A. D r . F red Campayne, N uclear Physic ist. U n iversity of G u yana, G u yana, S. A. , 1 972-74.

B. D r . L l o y d S . N . K u nar, Geophysic i st. Head, Department of Ph ysics, Un iversity o f G u yana, S . A . ,
1 9 72-74.
C. • Dr. R a l p h U. S ierra, Biomagnetlc Researcher. R i o P ledras, Puerto R ico, 1 97 2-4.
1) " Biomagnetic Report".
2) M isce l l aneous articles written an d/or complied by Dr. S ierra.
D. • Dr. A l bert Roy Davis, B i omagnetlc Researcher, G reen Cove Spri ngs, F l orida, 1 9 72-74.
1 ) " B iomagnetism" ( M aster Man uscript) .
2) "Anatomy of B iomagnetlsm".
3 ) " B iomagnetism --- Bio logical E l ectronics".
E. Sister J usta Smith, Ph . D. , B i ochem ist. D i rector of Research , H u man D imensions I nstitute ;
Chai rman, Chemistry Department. Rosary H i l l College, Buffalo, New York, 1 972.
F. Dr. E r ic 0 . Austin, Physician, E E G Special ist. G eorgetown P u b l ic H ospital, G u yana, S . A . , 1 973.
G. • Dr. Mark L. Gal lert, N . D. , Radionlc Designer and Researcher. Carhage C l i n ic, Cheltenham,
E n g l and, 1 9 73-4.
1 ) " E soteric Aspects of Tuned E lectro nics".
H. Dr. H u mp h rey Osmond, Psychi atrist. Bu reau o f R esearch I n Neuro l ogy a n d Psych iatry. P r l nceton
U n i versity, 1 9 73.
1 ) "The Many Worlds of Ti me", H . Mann, M . Slegler, and H . Osmond. Reprint from the "Journal
of Anal ytical Psychology", Vol. 1 3 , No. 1 , 1 968.
I.• Dr. Reinhold Reiter, Physicist, D i rector, I nstitute for Atmospheric E nvironmental Research,
Garm lsch-Parte n k l rchen, German y ; Chairman, Study G roup of B lometeorology, Lelden, Hol l and,
1 973.
1 ) " B iometeorology", Vol. 5, Part 1 1, p roceedi n gs of 6th l ntl. Congress. Sept. 3-9, 1 9 72. Ed ited
by S. W. Tromp, et. a l .
J. • Dr. Chrlstopher B. H i l ls, Metaphysical Researcher, B o u l der Creek, Ca l i forn i a, 1 9 72-74.
1 ) " N uclear Evo l uti o n " , Centre Commun ity P u b l ications, London, 1 968.
K.* M r. Charles Topley, Research E ngineer, London, E ng l and, 1 973.
1 ) " I nfluence of Air I o ns on Certa i n Physiological F u nctions." A paper co m p l i ed from the
p u b l ications of Prof. A. P, K rueger, U n iversity of Californ i a, Berkeley.
2 ) "Air I o n i zation and Weather Sensitivity", a paper written by Prof. F . G . S u l man, Head,
Department of Appl ied Pharmacology, The Hebrew U n i versity of Jerusalem, lsrea l .
3 ) A personal l etter written b y Prof. S u l man to M r . Topiey.
4) " I o n iz i n g Effects of W i n ds of I l l Repute on Serato n i n Metabol ism". A. Danon and F. G.
Su lman. An extract, proceedin gs, 5th B iometerol ogical Congress, Montreux, Switzerland, 1 969.
5 ) " Effects of Hot, Dry , Desert Winds (Si rocco, Sharav, Hamsi n ) on the Metabo l ism of H o rmones
and M i nerals." F. G. S u l man, N. H i rschman and J. Phe ifer, Reprint from p roceedings,
Luck now Sympos i u m on Arid Zones, U N ESCO, 1 964.
6) " R eview of Scientific I nformation o n the Effects of I o n ized Air on H u man Beings and
An imals." J oseph B . Davis, M. D. , Rep r i n t, Aerospace Medicine, Vol. 34, No. 1 . Jan. 1 963.
L. Dr. l ngho H. K o rnblueh, Research Physician, Former V ice-President, American I nstitute of
Medical C l i matology, P h i lade l p h ia, 1 9 73.

• In addition to conversations and recorded interviews with the researcher, the works l i sted below h is
name were either written or com p i led by the resea rcher h i mself, and have also contri buted to th is
vo l u me.

266
 INDEX
A -energies : 246 . . . . . . . . . .
B iomagnetic field : 1 7, 82, 1 56 .
Axis: 7, 1 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B iosphere: 57 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aaron: 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B i polar: 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Abrams, Dr. Al bert: 77, 80, -forces : 54 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

82, 93. 1 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . B Black, Dr. D. I . : 89 . . . . . . . . .

Acid : 1 7, 1 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . Black holes: 29 . . . . . . . . . . .

Acupuncture : 40 . . . . . . . . . . Back (spi ne) : 78 . . . . . . . . . . .

Blood : 1 6, 1 7 . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adrenal cortex : 1 33 . . . . . . . . Bagch i, Dr. Bashu K.: 1 42 . . . . -cells: 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aging: 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bailey, Al ice A . : 232, 234- Bloodstream : 1 26-1 27, 1 34 . . .

Air-ion behavioral tie-in : 1 39 • . 236, 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Blueprint for I mmortality : 1 66 .
Air ion environment : 1 36 . . Baines, A. E . : 1 1 4- 1 1 5. . . . . . . Bone: 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air ionization : 1 23, 1 42, 1 44 . . Bardot, Brigitte: 2 1 9 . . . . . . . . Brai n : 22, 40, 45, 78, 1 06- 1 07,
Air ions: 1 24, 1 26, 1 34, 1 38, Barnothy, Dr. Jeno: 1 6, 92, 1 00 1 09- 1 1 0, 1 42, 1 50 . . . . . . . .

1 56-1 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barnothy, Dr. Madel ine : 8, 1 5, ·frequency: 1 09- 1 1 3, 1 50 . . .

Air pol lutio n : 1 25 . . . . . . . . . 80, 1 00, 1 5 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .

-responses: 1 04 . . . . . . . . .
Akashic Barn)llle ll, Dr. F. H . : 91 . . . . . . 'Breakthrough to Creativity':
-forces : 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barometric pressure : 98 . . . . . . 247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-l ight : 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brown, Dr. Frank A., Jr. : 9 1 ,
Alexander, Dr. Harold : 1 00 . . . Beasley, Victor: iv, 207 . . . . . . 1 06, 1 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Algae: 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Becker, Dr. Robert: 1 00, 1 06, Bullard, E. C. : 86 . . . . . . . . . .

'Alive to the Universe': 82, 1 79 . 1 1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Burns: 1 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Al kal ine: 1 7, 1 08 . . . . . . . . . . Beckett: 1 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Burr, Prof. Harold Saxon : 1 66-

Alien, Dr. D. W. : 86 . . . . . . . . Bendit, Phoebe: 1 63, 1 97- 1 99, 1 7 1 , 228, 244-245 . . . . • . . •

Alien I nternational : 1 1 0 . . . . . 230, 247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Allen, Phi l : 1 1 , 40 . . . . . . . . . Benoit, M . : 42, 44 . . . . . . . . .
Al pha rhyth m : 1 1 0- 1 1 1 , 1 1 3, Beta rhyth m : 1 1 1 , 1 1 2 . . . . . . c
142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bhattacharyan, Dr. George: 97,
Alternating fields: 1 2 1 . . . . . . . 1 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cain, Dr. I . K. : 87 . • . . . . . . . .

Anesthesia: 1 07, 1 1 3 . . . . . . . . Big Bang Theory : 1 63 . . . . . . . Cain, Dr. P. C . : 87 . . • . . . . . .

Angle of i ncidence: 61 . . . . . . . B i nding force : 99 . . . . . . . . . . Callas, Maria: 222 . . . . . . . . . .

Antioch College: 1 79 . . . . . . . Biochemica l : 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . Calcifications : 73 . . . . . . . • . .

Aristotle : 99 . . . . . . • . . . . . . -responses: 1 4 . . . . . . . . . . Cancer: 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Arthritic spurs: 73 . . . • . . . . . B ioclimatology: 1 1 7- 1 1 8, 1 53 .

Causal body: 1 77 . . . . . . . . . .

Astral body : 1 77 . . . . . . . . . . B ioelectric Cel l

Atomic -energies: 1 09, 1 37- 1 38 . . . . -division : 1 5 . . . . . . . . . . .
-disintegratio n : 29 . . . . . . . -fields : 98, 1 94. . . . . . . . . . -membrane: 1 9, 20 . . . . . . .
-molecular magnetism : 5 . . . Biofeedback: 82 . . . . . . . . . . .
-nucleus : 1 9 . . . . . • . . . . . .

-magnetic field : 6 . . . . . . . . B iological Cells: 1 7, 1 9, 20, 22, 1 68 . . . . .

-precession : 9 . . . . . . . . . . . -catalyst: 22 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centre House : 54, 62, 238 . . . .

Atomic Energy Commission : -evolutio n : 86 . . . . . . . . . . Centrosphere: 57 . . . . . . . . . .

1 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -sensitivity to geomagnetic Cerebral

Atoms: 7-8, 1 0, 3 1 , 64, 1 23, forces: 1 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . -cortex : 1 04, 1 50 . . . . . . . .

1 72, 1 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -systems : 85 . . . . . . . . . . .
-systems : 46 . . . . . . . . . . .
Aura balancing: 82, 1 79, 1 83, Biological/behavioral Cerebrum : 1 1 2- 1 1 3 . . . . . . . . •

246. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -influences : 1 52 . . . . . . . . . Ceremonial order: 234-235. . . .

Auras: 27, 66, 1 63, 1 8 1 , 1 83, -systems: 1 97 . . . . . . . . . . . Chakra
' 1 87 . . . : . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . -tie-ins: 1 50-1 5 1 , 1 54, 1 56 . . -earth : 1 88 . . . . . .
. . . . . .

Auric -electricity : 204 . . . . . . . . .

-bodies: 1 77- 1 78, 1 98, 205, -endocrine tie-i n : 1 98, 200 .

267
 -energies : 2 1 5, 225, 235 . . . . Einstein, Albert: 28, 1 48, Fundamental ray disc: 64-65 . .
-systems: 1 92, 1 95- 1 96, 2 1 4, E lasser, Dr. William: 90 . . . . . .
246-247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric fields: 1 1 9, 1 2 1 , 1 7 1 . .
Chakras: 1 83, 1 85, 1 87-1 88, Electricity : 6, 1 78, 1 86 . . . . . . G
1 92- 1 94, 1 96-202, 204, 208, Electrobiodynamics: 27-28. . . .
2 1 0-21 7, 225, 235, 250 . . . . Electrochemica l : 1 9 Gal lert, Dr. Mark : 1 72- 1 73,
Electroencephalogram : 1 09-1 1 0, 1 75, 1 77-1 78, 1 97-1 98, 245 .
Circulatory system : 1 38. . . . . . 1 1 2- 1 1 3, 1 42 . . . . . . . . . . . Gandhi, Mahatma: 223 . . . . . .
Clairvoyance : 1 92- 1 93, 230 . . . Electrolytic responses: 1 4 . . . . Gardner, E. L. : 229 . . . . . . . . .
Cleopatra : 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . E lectromagnetic energies: 27-29, Gauss, C. S.: 90 . . . . . . . . . . .
Cohen, Dr. David : 1 1 0 . . . . . . . 30-3 1 , 44, 1 48, 1 88 . . . . . . . Gauss : 23-24, 88, 1 00- 1 0 1 .
Cohesion : 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetism : 6, 23, 27, Geomagnetic fields : 87, 92, 1 52
Collective Unconscious: 249 . . . 44-45, 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Geomagnetism : 85, 98. . . . . . .
Colors: 42, 53, 1 83, 1 85- 1 86 Electrons: 6-7, 1 0- 1 1 , 27, 62 . . Grad, Dr. Bernard : 24 . . . . . . .
Commission for the Research Electrostatic changes: 1 1 9 . . . . Gravitational forces: 29 . . . . .
I nto the Creative Faculties of Electro-vibratory : 2, 1 48, Guliaev, Dr. P. 1 . : 45-46 . . . . . .
Man : 54, 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 50, 244, 248, 250 . . . . . . . Gunst, Robert: 87 . . . . . . . . .
Conflict: 234-235, 240 . . . . . . . -energies : 1 50-1 52, 246 . . . .
Consciousness : 1 79, 1 82, 1 85, -fields: 77, 1 49, 1 55 . . . . . .
1 88, 1 94, 1 99, 203 . . . . -forces: 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . H
Cosmic/divine energies: 234- -phenomena: 1 52 . . . . . . . .

236, 249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -tie-ins : 243-244 . . . . . . . . . Hanoka, Dr. N . S. : 1 04 . . . . . .

Cosmic Humanism : 32, 34 . . . . Emotional body : 1 77 Harmonics: 36-37, 40, 1 49 . . . .

Cosmic rays: 27, 30, 89, 1 63 . . Endocrine systems: 1 26, 1 33, Harmony: 234-235 . . . . . . . . .
Cox, Dr. Alie n : 88 . . . . . . . . . 1 88, 1 98-1 99, 202, 204, 247 . Harrison, Christopher: 87 . . . . .
Creative Confl ict: 240 . . . . . . . Energy: 28, 40, 44, 79, 1 08, Hefigar: 1 1 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 75, 1 77- 1 78, 1 83-1 84, 1 92, Hertzian phenomena: 1 2 1 . . . .
1 94, 1 97, 230, 234 . . . . . . . Hills, Christopher: 3 1 , 63-64,
D 'Energy, Matter and Form': 40 . 76, 1 1 1 , 1 63, 1 85- 1 89, 1 93 -
Enzymes: 1 5, 22, 24, 1 48 . . . . 1 94, 204-209, 2 1 4, 225, 237 . .
Dal rymple, A. Brent: 88 . . . . . Esoteric : vii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hills' Model of Magnetism : 7 1 . .
Davies, Dr. David: 1 52-1 53. . . . -electronics : 1 77 . . . . . . . . . 'Hills' Theory of Consciousness':
Davis, Dr. A. Roy: 1 7, 69- -energies: 23 3 -236 . . . . . . . 29, 30, 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70, 73-75, 78, 1 0 1 , 1 1 1 . . . . Etheric body : 1 77, 1 98, Hodson, Geoffrey : 1 62, 1 99 . . .
Davis, Dr. Joseph B . : 1 24 . . . . . Extrasensory perception : 1 62 . . Hypothalamus: 1 1 2, 1 50 . . . . .
De La Warr, George : 1 5 1 , 1 72 . . Extra-terrestrial force fields:
De La Warr Researchers: 33, 38- 1 7 1 , 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42, 44-45, 94-97, 1 76 . . . . . .
Devotion: 234-235 . . . . . . . . .
Disease: 77, 1 40 . . . . . . . . . . . F Ideal ism : 234-235 . . . . . . . . . .
Divining: 66, 82-83, 1 72, 1 86 . . Im agination : 2 1 6, 235 . . . . . . .
DNA: 1 1 , 1 9, 74 . . . . . . . . . . Feeling type: 222, 225 . . . . . . I nfra-red : 28, 30, 42 . . . . . . . .
dowsing : 1 84, 1 87 . . . . . . . . . Ferromagnetism: 228, 248 . . . . l n-phasedness : 36, 203 . . . . . .
Force fields: 39-40, 1 48, 1 54 . . ' I nstruments of Knowing': 66 . .
Foster, Joh n : 86 . . . . . . . . . . . I ntelligence: 234-235 . . . . . . .
E Fortune, Dionne: 229-230 . . . . I ntuition : 2 1 6, 2 1 8, 235 . . . . .
Frequency : 28, 36-38, 40, I ntuitive type : 223, 225 . . . . . .
Earth : 1 0, 27. 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . 64, 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ion
East-west flow: 54, 56, 1 49 . . . Friedell, Or Aaron : 1 08 . . . . . . -density- 98 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Funnel!, Brian: 87 . . . . . . . . . -therapy : 1 3 1 , 1 34, 1 38 . . . .

268
I onizing winds: 1 30-1 33, -moment: 5, 7-8, 1 4, 1 9 . . . . N odal points : 35, 39, 4 1 , 1 49,
1 39, 1 44, 1 56 . . . . . . . . . . . -north : 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 87- 1 88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetism : 1 9, 22, 24, 40, 42, N uclear Evolution : 240,
44, 50, 77, 89, 94, 96, 1 03 . . 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J Magnetosphere : 27 . . . . . . . .
. 'N uclear Evolution: Discovery of
Magnetophotocronograph : 69. . the Rainbow Body': 64, 1 1 1 ,
'Journey I nto Light': 240 . . . . . Magnetron : 47, 52, 246 . . . . . . 1 42, 1 85, 207-208, 2 1 8, 225 .
Judge, Will iam 0.: ix • . . . . . . Mann, Harriet: 2 1 8 . . . . . . . . . N uclear forces: 29-30 . . . . . . .
Jung, Dr. Carl G . : 2 1 8, 249 . . . 'Many Worlds of Time': 2 1 8 . . . Nuclear magnetron: 1 4 . . , . . .

Marshal!, N inian: 34-35 . . . . . . N ucleus : 8, 1 9, 64 . . . . . . . . .

Massy, D r. R obert: 47-48, 82-

K 83, 1 35, 1 37, 1 72, 1 8 1 , 239 .
Massy's Law of R adiesthesia: 0
Karagulla, Dr. Shafica : 247 . . . . 1 81 - 1 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Katz, Bernard: 1 9 . . . . . . . . . . . Matsui, Toru : 237 . . . . . . . . . . Organic farming: 52 . . . . . . . .

Kennedy, John F . : 22 1 . . . . . . Matuyama Epoch : 88 . . . . . . . Osmond, Prof. Hum phrey : 2 1 8,

Kholodov, Dr. Y. A. : 93, 1 05 . . McDonald, Keith : 87 . . . . . . . . 224, 225, 245-246 . . . . . . . .

Klyston generator: 47 . . . . . . . Meditation : 1 42, 240 . . . . . . . Out-of-phasedness: 36 . . . . . . .

Kornblueh, Dr. lgho H . : 1 2 8 Medu l l a : 1 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ovulation : 1 69 . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 29, 1 37, 1 42 . . . . . . . . . . . Menstruation: 1 69 . . . . . . . . . Ozonosphere : 57 . . . . . . . . . .
Krueger. Prof. A. P. : 1 2 6- 1 2 7 . . . . Mental body: 1 9 1, . . . . . . . . .

Kundali n i : 59, 66 . . . . . . . . . . Mesozoic period : 87 . . . .. . . .

M icro-gauss range : 78 . . . . . . . p
M icrowaves : 28, 47 . . . . . . . . .
L M itochondria: 1 9 . . . . . . . . . . Pacinian corpuscles: 97 . . . . . .
Pain : 73, 1 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lakhovsky. George: 9 7 . 1 5 1 . . . . . Molecular magnetism : 11 . . . . . Pendul u m : 66, 76, 82, 1 79- 1 8 1 ,

Leadbeater, Bishop C. W. : 1 92 . Moses : 82 . . . . . . . . . . .
, . , . 1 83 , 1 87- 1 88 . . . . . . . . . . .
1 93, 1 97-1 99, 203, 229 . . . . Mulay, Dr. I . L. : 1 5. . . . . . . . . Personality types : 2 1 8 . . . . . . .
L-fields: 1 65- 1 7 1 , 1 87, 228 . . . M ulay, D r. L. N . : 1 5 . . . . . . . . Pest control : 52 . . . . . . . . . . .

Light: 30, 42, 44, 64, 75, 94, Philippi, Dr. H . : 38 . . . . . . . . .

98, 1 74-1 75, 1 78, 1 86 . . . . . Pituitary : 1 99 . . • . . . . . . . . .

Livanov, Dr. M . N . : 1 04 . . . . . . N Plaut, Dr. M . G . : 87 . . . . . . . .

Love-wisdom : 234-235 . . . . . . Polar energies: 60-6 1 , 7 5, 77,

Nagata, Dr. T. : 86 • . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6, 1 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Nakamura, Prof. H i rosh i : 237 . . Polarities : 50, 54, 56, 6 1 , 70,

M N ebel, Dr. : 76 . . . . . . . . . . . . 78-80, 82-83, 87-88, 1 07,
Negative pole: 60 . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3, 1 24, 1 52, 1 56,
Maclean, Dr. E. K . : 99 . . . . . . . Nerve force : 1 1 4, 1 1 6 . . . . , . . Polarization : 1 6 . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnet: 33, 60, 69-70, 1 1 3 · 1 1 5 . Nervous syste m : 20, 7 7, 82, Polarized water: 73 . . . . . . . . .

Magnetic 1 1 3- 1 1 4, 1 21 , 1 26, 1 49, 1 69, Poles, North and South : 33, 75,
-energies : 79, 92, 1 0 1 , 1 08, 1 79, 1 88, 245, 247 . . . . . . . 80, 87, 1 79 . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 1 5, 1 79, 234 . . . . . . . . . . . -autonomic : 1 03, 1 98 . . . . . Positive ions: 1 2 5 - 1 2 8 . . . . . .
-environment: 9 1 . . . . . . . . -centra l : 1 05-1 09 . . . . . . . . Postma, Dr. J . : 28. . . . . . . . . . .

-equator: 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . Neural Potassium : 1 6, 1 9, 20 . . . . . . .

-field composition : 33 . . . . . -plexuses: 200-20 1 . . . . . . . Propagation : 38 . . . . . . . . . . .

-fields: 1 5, 20, 23-24, 33, 36, -stimulation devices: 1 1 4 . . . Proton: 8, 1 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40, 49-50, 69, 73, 78, 86 . . . Neuro-biological currents: 1 1 3 . Psychical physics: 1 1 9 . . . . . . .

-force fields: 50, 62, 8 1 , 92 . Neuromuscular response: 1 86 . . Psychological types: 2 18 2 2 5 -

269
Q Sm ith, D r. P. J . : 86 . . . . . . . . . Tramp, Dr. S. W. : 1 1 9- 1 2 1 . . . .
Smith, Roger: 76-77 . . . . . . . . Troposphere: 1 22. . . . . . . . . .
Quanta : 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sodium: 1 6, 1 9, 20 . . . . . . . . . Tropospheric frequencies : 1 22 .
Solar Trypsin : 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-disruptions: 1 1 6, 1 24, 1 57 .
R -energy : 1 56 . . . . . . . . . . .
-fields: 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R adiation : vii, 42, 88, 1 96, -flares: 50, 89 . . . . . . . . . . u
203, 233, 236 . . . . . . . . . . . -syste m : 1 0 . . . . . . . . .
. . .
Radiational physics : 35, 54 . . . -winds : 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uffen, Dr. R . J . : 88. . . . . . . . .
Radiesthesia: 47, 70, 76, 1 65, Somatic magnetism : 20, 1 48. . . Ultraviolet radiation: 2 2 . . . . . . .
1 72, 1 79, 1 8 1 , 1 84, 245 . . . . Somatic polarities: 78 . . . . . . . Ultra theta : 1 1 2, 1 50 . . . . . . .
Radio waves: 28, 30, 1 78 . . . . . Sound: 42, 75, 94. . . . . . . . . . Ultra violet light: 28, 30 . . . . .
Radioactive isotopes : 89 . . . . . Space : 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 'Universal Government by Na-
R adionic Analyzer: 1 72, 1 75, . . Spectrum : 28, 3 1 , 64 . . . . . . . ture's Laws': 237-238, 240 . .
R adionics: 4 7, 49, 1 72, 1 74, Spheric pulses: 1 22, 1 54 . . . . . Un iversity of the Trees : 49, 1 34
1 76- 1 79, 246 . . . . . . . . . . . Spine: 96, 1 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1 , 250 . . . . . . . . . . .

Rapport: 42, 44-47 . . . . . . . . . Spriritual healing: 24 . . . . . . . . -Press : 48, 53, 240 . . . . .

R avitz, Dr. Leonard J . : 1 69 . . . Square balance equal izer: 76-77
R eflexograph : 94, 96 . . . . . . . Static fields: 1 1 9- 1 20 . . . . . . .
Reiser, Prof. F. Oliver: 1 1 , 1 9, Stratosphere: 57 . . . . . . . . . . . V
32, 34, 97, 1 7 1 . . . . . . . . . . Strutt, Malcolm : 238 . . . . . . . .
Reiter, Dr. Reinhold : 1 1 6, 1 1 8- Subconscious: 2 2 9 . . . . . . . . . Van Alien Radiation Belts: 59,
1 22, 1 24- 1 25, 1 30- 1 32 . . . . . Subethers: 1 62. . . . . . . . . . . . 88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repulsion : 33, 36, . . . . . . . Sulman, Prof. Felix G . : 1 1 7, Vibration : 28, 34, 36, 70, 1 6 1 ,
R esonance : 4-1 0, 34-35, 38, 1 32-1 33, 1 36- 1 37, 1 39 . 1 72, 1 79, 208 . . . . . . . . . . .
40, 42, 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun : 27, 50, 1 1 6, 198 , Vi bratory resonances : 1 77 . . . .
Respiratory system : 1 26- 1 27 . . Supersensonic ru le : 187 . . . . . , Vitic: 1 1 4- 1 1 5 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reticular formation : 1 1 2, 1 50 . Supersensonics: 3 1 , 63,
Reversal periodicity : 86 . . . . . . 1 1 4, 1 65, 1 85-1 87, 246 . . .
R NA : 1 9, 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 'Supersensitive Life of Man': v . . w
R ogers, A. Stanley: 1 74 . . . . . .
R ussell, Bertrand : 220 . . . . . . . Wave
T -fiel d : 1 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-forms : 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
s Tarczy-Hornoch, Zolta n : 1 1 2 ·. .
Tchijevsky, A. L . : 1 00, 1 26 . . . Weak interaction forces : 29-30 .
Saint Augustine: 99 . . . . . . . . Tesla, N i kolai : 50 . . . . . . . . . . Witness ( in experimentation) :
Semi-permeable membrane : 1 9 . Testicles : 78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 1 84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensation type : 2 1 9, 225 . . . . . Theta rhythm : 1 1 1 . . . . . . . . .
Seroto nin: 1 27, 1 33, 1 39, 1 44 . Th i nking type : 220, 225 . . . . .
Servranx Brothers: 47 . . . . . . . Thought waves: 3 1 . . . . . . . . . X
Sexual intercourse: 1 94 . . . . . . Til ler, Prof. William: 202 . . . . .
Siegler, Miriam : 2 1 B . . . . . . . . Time: 45, 208 . . . . . . . . . . . . X-ray : 28, 1 36, 1 63 . . . . . . . .
Sierra, Dr. Ralph : 73, 80-8 1 , Toml i nson, Dr. H . : 33, 54, 78 . .
\
1 00, 1 1 5, 1 77 . . . . . . . . . . . Topley, Charles: 1 24, 1 32, 1 34 .
Skeletal system : 20 . . . . . . . . . Toussul is, Yann i : 1 79 . . . . . . .
Sleep : 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
� . Tracy, Lee : 1 1 0 . . . . . . . . . . .
Smith, Dr. Justa : 22-23 . . . . . . Trew, Dr. Corna : 249 . . . . . . .

270
 UNNERSITY OF THE TREES PRESS
Publishers of practical spiritual guides, scientific books and Correspondence
courses
I N TO M E D I TA T I O N N OW : A C O U RS E O F STU D Y , by Christopher H il ls 45.00
This cost covers the registration and introduction to the comprehensive three-year
cou rse of study that enables you to make the philosophy of Nuclear Evolution
a reality In your direct experience. Write for more details.

M E D I TATI N G W I T H C H I L D R E N , by Deborah Rozman 5.95

The first of its kind! A delightful teaching book that brings the great art and sc ience of
meditation and conscious evolution to chil dren of all ages, this workbook is being used
In classrooms throughout the country as a non-rel igious text In cantering and awareness
development.

M E D I TA T I O N F O R C H I L D R E N , by Deborah Rozman 5,95

A how-to-relax, concentrate, meditate and apply Nuclear Evolution book for the entire
fam ily. Awareness exercises deal with family psychology, problems with commu nication
and openness, and ways to foster deep sharing and love. Published by Celestial Arts.

T H E R I S E OF T H E P H O E N I X
U N I V E RS A L G O V E R N M E N T B Y N AT U R E'S LAWS by Christopher H i l ls

A radical breakthrough theory of government to answer the pressing problems of today,

this book shows how to create a new social and political order through organised self·
government. Commanded by Bertrand Russell who wrote the Introduction to the first
edition (published In l i mited quantity ) and said that these methods provide the only
possible way of combining discipline with freedom and freedom with organization,
we now h ave a viable approach to a new constitution based on nature's models.

S U P E RS E NSON I CS, by Chrlstopher H il ls 1 5.00

The Diviner's bible and encyclopedia that describes actual methods of measuring psychic
electricity (prana ) and the ways ancient masters and civilizations arrived at advanced
knowledge of perception which shows you how to communicate with plants, crystals,
atoms, Cosmic Intell igences or your true Self. A m i n d-bending book.

A L I V E TO T H E U N I V E RS E I, by Robert Messy 9.95

A physicist explains Supersensonics in simple layman's language, and gives step-by·
step i nstructions on how to divine for lost objects, people, water, m inerals, health, etc.
Your vast potential for m ultl·dlmenslonal awareness awaits unfolding through this
book. An illustration a page.

E N E R G Y , MATT E R A N D F O R M, by P. Alien, R. Smith and A . Bearne 9.96

Three consciousness researchers p rovide a dynamic workbook for those ready to test the
bounds of their consciousness. lt shows how to perform experiments for unfolding
extra-ord inary dimensions of experience. This comprehensive text presents extensive
Information and insight i n to the human aura, psychic energy canters, kundalinl, psycho­
tronics, electrophotography, divining, acupuncture research, radlonics, holography, black
holes, pyramid energies and the Creative I magination.

R A YS F R OM T H E CAPSTO N E by Ch rlstopher Hills 4.96

After 20 years of I n depth research Into pyramid energies, we now h ave a book which
contradicts many fantasies about meditation and pyramid power, shows the positive and
negative uses of pyramid energies and explains the Pi-ray orgone acc u m u l ator coffer, a
"natural" power dynamo invented by the author which allows you to use pyramid
energy safely for growing healthier plants, changing emotional states, zapping you rself
with energy, and purifying consciousness.

S U P E RS E NS O N I C I NSTR U M E N TS OF K N OW I N G , by Ch rlstopher H i l ls
1 .9 6
.
This book provides Instructions on the use o f various Supersensonlcs tools, rods, pen_
d u l ums, ate, In a complete catelog of biofeedback Instruments and their uses.

H I L LS ' T H E O R Y O F CONSC I O U S N ESS, by R obert Messy 6.96

A student of a m aster of consciousness describes his own development in a group of
16 selected students of N uclear Evolution. This book contains simplified accounts of
inspired research of the actual structure of Consciousness and its many drives which
physicist Messy believes will dominate the next 600-1 000 years of m an's h istory.

All prices subject to change without notice.

27 1
Nuclear Evolution: Discovery of the Rainbow Body, by Christopher H ills
Deluxe paperback $ 1 2 . 95 Hardback library edition $ 1 8 . 9 5
This book i s perhaps the most authoritative look a t the evolutionary potentia I s o f the human
race ever published. Light is the theme of the book: that the human personality is formed from
waves and pulses of light. Humans and other animals and objects eat light and the human
mind is a black hole that absorbs light then emits it as the rainbow body. A masterpiece in
consciousness research.

Food From Sunl ight. by Christopher H i lls $1 4.95

The Japanese have known since 1 9 1 7 that successful harvesting o f algae would produce
infinite a mounts of food from air, light and water. Failure to do so prompted in 1 9 59 the
Japanese newspaper a rticle, Chlorella Algae. the Manna from Heaven. is a Twentieth Century
Myth. But in 1 9 63 Spirulina algae was discovered and, over the next ten years. brought
manna from heaven to a reality. In Japan it now sells ounce for ounce the same price as gold,
due to its nutritional values and rejuvenation properties.

May You Live i n Health, by Aaron Friedell. M. D. $3.95

·After meeting 80-year old Aaron Friedell. you would want to buy his book-a guide t o
effective health ha bits. His system i s the result of forty year's practice a s a physician and
researcher on increasing the vigor of the human body and obtaining peace of mind. Although
practical. Dr. Friedell's book has some a mazing technical data explained simply.

The Politics of God, by Dr. Hugh J. Schonfield $9.95

The author of The Passover Plot does i t again! I n this book h i s aim i s t o show that Christianity
as practiced today is not identical with what Jesus of Nazereth or his immediate followers
taught but represents a deviation from their bel iefs. This book picks up the ancient Messianic
idea and gives it a modern application bringing together once again the essential faith of Jews
and Christians.

Wholistic Health and Living Yoga, by Malcolm Strutt $9.95

A new wholistic approach t o the spiritual science of total health which includes the application
of yogic principles to daily living situations, complete self- examination and encounters, yoga
postures. meditations. breathing and energizing methods. and other practical techniques for
spiritual stimulation.

Journey I nto Light by Ann Ray $7 . 9 5

B y weaving a woman's story of spiritual struggle a n d unfolding with wondrous insight of time,
space and consciousness. a delightful and informative book has been created. Seemingly
remote modern scientific breakthroughs are related to everyday life and problems. Different
from the usual books on spiritual teachings, this book on the principles of Nuclear Evolution is
not a bstract and u ntested, but is written out of real experience and proven in the laboratory of
the heart.

ENERGY MATTER & FORM

(Toward a Science of Comciousness)
• PY R A M I D E N E R G Y • TE LEPATHY
• P E N D U L UM POWE R • H E A L I N G
• A U R AS • WA T E R D I V I N I N G

Clear, easy to u n dersta n d experimen ts that

can help you devel o p incredible supersensi­
tiv i ty to the U n ive rse a ro u n d y o u . 288pp,
8Y. x 1 1 , color cover, $9.95.

All prices subject to change without notice.

272
 SUPERSENSONICS TOOLS AND INSTRUMENTS

The following divining tools mentioned in the text are aids for contacting
intelligences or energies, and are not substitutes for spiritual work on our­
selves.
A U R A P E N D U LU M : A low cost pendulum for determining a person's aura a n d the psychic atmos­
phere that surrounds them. $6.00. An excellent accompaniment is "The Rain ow Aura Pendulum b
Booklet" for $ 1 .00.
TH E M E R K H ET : Has the same use as the Osiris but the mercury is contained in an unbreakable body
for use in a tougher environment. $16.00
R O O M P H C O l L: For those who wish to raise their Kundalini energy. $83.00.
H I LLS P OS I T I V E G R E E N P E N D U L U M : Is specifically tuned to l ife-force or prana and is therefore
used for checking people's health and vitality, the nutritional value of foods and herbs, and checking
pyramid energies. $1 5.00.
P I- R A Y O R G O N E E N E R G Y ACC U M U LATOR C O F F E R : " l t material i zes your imagin ings," said one
user. " l t has helped bring about some remarkable events, Including healing, sel l ing properties, finding
houses and cars for people at the right price, and increasing one's spirituality." $79.00.
E G YPTI AN A N K H D I V I N I N G R O D : Is a type of divining rod that made the ancient Egyptians an
advanced civil ization. For use in the field. $8.00.
TU R E N N E M A G N E T- F I TT E D R O D : A very selectil7e divining rod, used for outdoor work in much
the same way as Moses and Jacob used their rods. Excellent for water, m i neral and lost objects
locating. $22.00.
TU R E N N E M A G N ET-F I TT E D P E N DU LU M : Called the Rolls Royce of pendulums because it has a
wide range of selectivity end is specially suited for use with the Turenne R u le for detecting atomic and
chemical substances. The researcher's pendu lum. $20.00.
T U R E N N E F U N DA M E N TA L RAY D I SC : For chem ists this disc takes the place of expensive analyti­
cal instruments. For those concerned about health and self-healing, the disc can reveal whether the
forty-four elements of nature present in the human body are in excess o r are deficient. $29.00.
SPECT R U M M I R R O R : A many-amplified pendulum containing radium, a wave-guide, and a silver
mirrored surface to reflect off unwanted vibes including negative thoughts. Excellent for the
professional and the beginner. As a gift it is very beautiful . $ 1 8.00.
MAG N E T R O N : This instrument is a broadcast healer and direction finder, allowing you to send
healing vibrations to anyone whose photograph you place at the canter. Also a great gift for the
organic gardener to protect plants from insects. $35.00
SQUA R E B A LA N C E E QU A L I Z E R : A tool for absorbing and balancing life-force. $28.00.
TIME R EC E SS I ON A L D IS C : E n ables a person with a Merkhet o r Osiris pendulum to date and
orientate ancient objects. $7 .50.
TU R E N N E R U L E : Reveals the 44 elements of nature which are present in the human body, excess or
deficit of any of which w i l l cause i l l health. lt is a remarkable i nstrument for finding out your true
spiritual condition, and your physical and emotional state of being. A real bargain at $35.00
R A D I U M B LOCK, T R I T I UM B L OC K : Are ampl ifiers for all divining i nstruments. Both are $23.00.
The Radium Block is specially made to fit on the Turenne Rule and amplifies the field of the sample
itself. The Tritium Block ampl ifies the diviner's reaction.
H E F I G A R : Ampl ifies the field so strongly that, using it, most people can become diviners. l t is a
virtu a l l y indispensible instrument to be used in conjunction with a pendul u m or rod. $35.00 Name is
abbreviation for " H i l ls End-F ire I ntensifying Guide and Radiator."

These prices subject to change without notice.

U N I V E RS I T Y OF T H E T R E ES P R ESS, P.C. Box 644, Boulder Creek, California 9 5006

ORDERING INFORMATION
U.S.A. FOREIGN

1. Prepayment: check or money

Foreign mail is very expensive for us so
order.
we must charge to cover. Overpayment
2. No C.O. D.'s.
will be credited.
3. No stamps. please.
4. We ship immediately.
1. Have all checks and money orders
stating cenified U.S. Dollars.
5. Postage & handling rates:
If your order is:
2. Expect delivery after five weeks.
3. Postage and Handling Rates:
up to $6 add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1 .00
$6.01 -$20.00 add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 .50 0-$50 add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $3.50
$20.01 -$40 add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.50 $ 5 1 - $ 1 00 add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $4.50
$40.01-$60 add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50 $ 1 0 1 - 1 50 add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $5.50
$60.01-$240 add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.50 $ 1 5 1 -$200 add . . . . . . : . . . . . $6.50
$201 -$250 add . . . . . . . . . . . . $7.50

273
 THE SCI ENCE OF V I B RATION AND TRANSMISS ION OF L I FE-FORCE
R u m f Roomph Yoga i s the name given b y Chrlstopher H i l l s t o a series of practical steps distilled
from many different yogic techniques for heightening and purifying human consciousness. The
words come from a combination of the Sanskrit word Rum meaning spirit and the American word
oomph meaning the inner bubbling of life-force. These tapes cannot be effectively described as they
are oral step-by-step Instructions. Many people use these exercises for increasing the brain electricity
and entering the Cave of Brahma.

R U M F ROOMPH YOGA
Available in sequence only R RV -1 3 Group Exercises for Dissolution of Separated
TAPE S U BJECT SELF
R R Y-1 Introduction to the Series; the principle of R R Y-14 Contacting the Tree o f Life & the Tree of
Identification Knowledge Inside Each Other
R R Y-2 Stimulation of Brain Cells; E xpansion Into R R Y-1 5 Evolutionary Group I nteractions: The Love
Total Openness; Creation of Mudras Seat
R R Y-3 Tantric Union of Opposites th rough Shakti- R R Y-16 Principles of Creative Conflict; Mastering
Shiva Dance Self-I n toxication with Self-Saturation
R R Y-4 How to Control the Chakra Forces by R R Y-1 7 Becoming a Soul Mirror - or Cosmic Tele­
Looking at the G arbage vision Camera
R R Y-5 Radicallzing the Ego Sense; Meditation on R RV -1 8 Anahata Nadam: Chanting through the Heart
the Canter Symbol Centre; Gaining Control over Inner Forces
R R Y-6 Getting Control of the Ego R R Y- 1 9 Group Discussion of Rumf Roomph Yoga
R R Y-7 Meditation for Expanding the Self-Sense Experience
and Bursting the Ego Bubble R R Y-20 Mahavideya: Super Penetration of the Mind­
R R Y-8 The F u nction of the Ego, The Super­ stuff of Self & Others
Conscious Mind, & I m agination R R Y-21 Balancing Levity & Gravity; the Steps to
R R Y-9 Meditation & Breath Control for Protein Nuclear Evolution
Synthesis; Transmuting Sexual Energies R R Y-22 Advanced Exercise in Shiva-Shaktl;
R RY-1 0 Understanding the Nature of Pure Surrendering All Your Being to the One
Consciousness Guru : Your True Self; Discovering Karma
R R Y-1 1 Practlcing the Presence R RY 23 Purifying the Chakras by Chanting the Om;
R RY-1 2 Validation of Yogic Methods of Knowing, Overcoming Resistance & I nertia
Washing the Mind Clear of Previous Concepts R R Y-24 Embodying the Avatar Consciousness

Rumf Roomph Yoga ( 1 hr. up to 2 hrs. each) Speak to us of .

RRY-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 9 .00 RRY- 1 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 1 .00 Karma. Duty. and One s True Nature (1 Y2 hrs.) . . . . . . . . . . . $1 0.00

R RY-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 1 .00 RRY- 1 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8.00 Change and Self- Mastery (1 hr. , 20 min.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ !}.00

R RY-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 2 . 00 RRY- 1 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8.00 The Universal Hologram (1 hr .. 55 min.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 2 .00

R RY-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 1 . 00 RRY-1 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 2.00 Vision ( 1 hr.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8.00

R RY-5 . . . . . . . . . _ . . . $ 9 . 00 RRY- 1 7 . . . . . . . . : . . . $ 1 2 . 00 Real Love. Motives (1 hr. . 40 min.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 1 .00

R RY-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 1 .00 RRY- 1 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8 . 00 Learning From Nature. Procrastination.

RRY-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 9.00 RRY- 1 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 0.00 Rebirth. Mindlessness (1 hr:) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8.00

R RY-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8 .00 RRY-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 0.00

R RY-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 0.-00 RRY-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 2 .00 Meditations on the One

RRY- 1 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8.00 RRY-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8.00 Numbers 1 - 5 ( 1 hr. each) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . each $ 8.00

RRY-1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 0.00 RRY-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8.00

To the One I Love
RRY- 1 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1 1 .00 RRY-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8.00
N umbers 1 - 6 ( 1 hr. each) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . each $ 8.00

All prices subject to change without notice.

274
 SUPERS EN S ONICS© AIR ENERGIZERS

SUPERENERGIZER SYSTEM I
Wall-mounted Unit

8 emitters
Single room unit perfect
enriching the air
for home, office or den.
with electrical ions.
• • • •••• • • • •
Power "ON' switch . . .. . .. . � .
- � . .. . ... . "We feel we have the
Power "ON' light � � . . .. .'.U� .�
· - � lt/' finest unit available at
.... . .. . . � � this price range with 8
.
•.�'. •
.•. .• •..• •. • •�• emitters. "- Dave Edwards,
.
Production Manager
Attractive wall-mounted
unit which also looks
smart on your desk or
table top.

e This heavy duty

unit makes it ideal for
conference rooms, Many scientists believe that an
small auditoriums, homes, offices, abundance of negative ions will:
libraries, hospitals, schools and e reduce the possibility of infection, colds, etc.
restaurants. e increase concentration and alertness
e reduce the need for sleep
e relieve tension
e refresh polluted air, and
e combat cigarette smoke See the book, YOUR ELECTRO­
VIBRATOR Y BODY for the benefits of
ORDERING INFORMATION
a high negative ion environment based
Univenity of the Trees Press, Box 644, Boulder Creek CA 95006
on recent worldwide research.

NAME ---------- �---------------

STREET ADDRESS: -------------------- Although the considerable research on air ions indicates that beneficial effects may
be obtained from breathing air ions, I am purchasing an ionizer with the express
UPS will not deliver to Post Office. Please supply full address.
understanding and acknowlegement that neither the manufacturer, distributor, nor
CITY' STATE' ZIP -------- ------- ---------
- -- their representatives are making any therapeutic or biological claims regarding
this machine.

NAME OF PRODUCT QTY PRICE

System 1 8 emitters 1 39.00

Signature - ---------Date - - - --

Totai ---­
(Pius postage & handling) [Link] ---­
Calif. residents add 6% tax ---­
GRAND TOTAL ---
All prices subject to change without notice.

275
 . . . about the University of the Trees
The University of the Trees is a community dedicated to man's evolution. It was founded by Christopher Hills in
1 973 as a non-profit organization based on the concept of working on the expansion of our ego self toward a group
conscious spirit. The students who have come together from all parts of the U. S. to unfold this evolutionary thrust
participate daily in such activities as chanting, Rurnf Roomph Yoga, Creative Conflict, Supersensonics, a course on
direct enlightenment called " Into Meditation Now" and a new concept of community government University of the
Trees is also a degree granting institution which awards B. A, MA and Ph. D. degrees in a wide variety of subjects
related to consciousness research.
We are always searching for practical solutions to the problems of society. One of our recent publications, " Food
from Sunlight" , is a direct response to our concern for the needless world hunger crisis. Creative Conflict is a practical
solution to the problem of human conflict We facilitate classes open to the public one night a week where skills in direct
communication, ego penetration, openness, and spontaneous perception are practiced. Several of our authors are
available for lecture. If you are in a group that sponsors workshops and speakers, please write for further details. We
offer workshops in meditation ( adults or children), supersensonics and creative conflict
Members of the University of the Trees do not rely on taxpayer financing, grants or donations for income but rather
our book publishing, phototypesetting, sale of cassette tapes and divining tools. Thank you, everyone, for your response
and support We are still searching for an appropriate property, preferably a school, campground or resort with existing
facilities in a place that is relatively frost-free for our algae program.
Visitors are welcome on Tuesdays and Saturdays for tea at 4:00. We'll be glad to answer your questions at these
times. Visitors may also participate in our meditation, chanting and worship service which Christopher leads on Friday
evenings, promptly at 7:30 ( summer), 7:00 ( winter). Please phone ahead for changes, (408) 338-3855, during office
hours, weekdays, 1 0:00 a m.-5:00 p. m.

Map for reaching the University of the Trees Office in Boulder Creek Blessings,

1 3 1 5 1 Pine Street, Boulder Creek CA [408]338-3855 Student/Faculty

Office Hours: 10-5 Monday thru Thurs.

10-4 Friday, Saturdays 1 0-1 University of the Trees
Closed Sundays
FRIDAY NIGHT MEDITATION with Christopher Hills
7:30 p.m. ( summer only), 7:00 winter
Chanting Instruction
Meditation
Discussion ( bring your questions)

Followed by Tea and Cookies

1 3 185 Pine Street

Doors close promptly at 7:30
Donation

TEA TIMES
Come and visit on:
Tuesdays & Saturdays
4:00 - 5:00 p.m.

FREEWAY ROUTE EASY DRIVE

101 or 280 to 1 7 South
Exit to Felton via Mount Hermon Road - 3 miles
Ben Lomond - 3 miles, to Boulder Creek - 2 miles

276